WO2022062861A1 - Uplink control channel transmission method and apparatus, storage medium, and chip - Google Patents

Uplink control channel transmission method and apparatus, storage medium, and chip Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2022062861A1
WO2022062861A1 PCT/CN2021/115721 CN2021115721W WO2022062861A1 WO 2022062861 A1 WO2022062861 A1 WO 2022062861A1 CN 2021115721 W CN2021115721 W CN 2021115721W WO 2022062861 A1 WO2022062861 A1 WO 2022062861A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
symbols
pucch
time slot
terminal device
dmrs
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2021/115721
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
刘云
薛丽霞
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from CN202011111902.4A external-priority patent/CN114340001A/en
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Publication of WO2022062861A1 publication Critical patent/WO2022062861A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00Local resource management
    • H04W72/04Wireless resource allocation

Definitions

  • the present application relates to the field of communication technologies, and in particular, to a method, device, storage medium and chip for transmitting an uplink control channel.
  • the uplink transmission generally includes the transmission of the physical uplink control channel (PUCCH) and the transmission of the physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH).
  • the transmission of PUSCH includes two modes, one is the transmission mode Type-A, and the other is the transmission mode Type-B, because the transmission mode Type-B can utilize resources to a greater extent than the transmission mode Type-A;
  • the transmission method Type-B it is discussed to use the transmission method Type-B to transmit PUCCH, so as to maximize the use of resources to transmit PUCCH and improve the coverage.
  • the demodulation reference signal (Demodulation Reference Signal, DMRS) is generally arranged in the middle of the frequency hopping part, and is transmitted using the transmission method Type-B.
  • DMRS Demodulation Reference Signal
  • PUCCH may be transmitted on some symbols in a time slot, and there is no corresponding DMRS demodulation channel for this part of the symbols, so there is a problem that decoding cannot be performed.
  • An uplink control channel transmission method device, storage medium and chip.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a method for transmitting an uplink control channel PUCCH, the method comprising:
  • the terminal device receives configuration information or indication information from the network device, the configuration information or indication information is used to configure or instruct the terminal device to send the first PUCCH, the transmission length of the first PUCCH is L symbols, and the first PUCCH is L symbols.
  • the number of times of transmission of a PUCCH is N, where N is an integer greater than or equal to 1, and L is an integer greater than or equal to 1; the terminal device determines X symbols according to the configuration information or indication information, and the X symbols are located in the first a time slot, and the X symbols are used to transmit the first PUCCH; when X is less than L, the terminal device determines not to transmit the first PUCCH on the X symbols according to a preset condition, or The terminal device transmits the first PUCCH on the X symbols, or the terminal device transmits the second PUCCH on the X symbols, or the terminal device transmits the DMRS on the X symbols.
  • the terminal device determines that the X symbols in the first time slot do not include symbols bearing DMRS, based on the configuration information or the indication information that the transmission length of the first PUCCH is L and the number of transmissions is N. There is a possibility that the number of symbols cannot be decoded, and the terminal device determines according to preset conditions that the first PUCCH is not transmitted on the X symbols, or the terminal device transmits the first PUCCH on the X symbols, or the terminal device transmits the first PUCCH on the X symbols. The second PUCCH is transmitted on the symbol, or the terminal device transmits the DMRS on X symbols, so as to solve the problem that the first PUCCH cannot be decoded.
  • the X symbols do not include symbols bearing DMRS.
  • the terminal device determines according to preset conditions not to transmit the first symbol on the X symbols PUCCH, or the terminal device transmits the first PUCCH on the X symbols, or the terminal device transmits the second PUCCH on the X symbols, or the terminal device transmits the DMRS on the X symbols, thereby solving the possibility of transmitting the first PUCCH A problem that cannot be decoded occurs.
  • the terminal device determines not to transmit on the X symbols according to a preset condition
  • the first PUCCH includes: when the frequency domain positions where the X symbols are located are different from the frequency domain positions where the symbols carrying the DMRS in the first time slot and the second time slot are located, the terminal device determines that The first PUCCH is not transmitted on the X symbol; wherein the first slot is adjacent to the second slot.
  • the terminal device can know, according to the configuration information or the indication information, that the X symbols do not include the DMRS-bearing symbols, and when the frequency domain positions of the DMRS-bearing symbols in the first time slot and the second time slot are the same as the X symbols
  • the frequency domain positions are different, it can be known that within the time domain range of at least one time slot near X symbols, there is no corresponding DMRS for demodulating the channel, and the terminal equipment determines not to transmit the first PUCCH on the X symbol, so as to avoid this phenomenon.
  • the problem that X symbols cannot be decoded.
  • the terminal device determines not to transmit on the X symbols according to a preset condition
  • the first PUCCH includes: when the interval between the X symbols and the first symbol exceeds a first threshold, the terminal device determines not to transmit the first PUCCH on the X symbols; wherein the The first symbol is the first DMRS-bearing symbol located after the X symbols.
  • the terminal device can know that the X symbols do not include symbols carrying DMRS according to the configuration information or the indication information, and when the interval between the X symbols and the first symbol exceeds the first threshold, it can be known that the X symbols are near the first threshold.
  • the terminal device determines not to transmit the first PUCCH on the X symbols, so as to avoid the problem that the X symbols cannot be decoded.
  • the terminal device determines not to transmit on the X symbols according to a preset condition
  • the first PUCCH includes: when the X is less than or equal to a second threshold, the terminal device determines not to transmit the first PUCCH on the X symbols; wherein the second threshold is based on the At least one of the length L, the DMRS configuration mode, the format of the first PUCCH, and the frequency hopping mode of the first PUCCH is determined.
  • the terminal device can know that the X symbols do not include symbols carrying DMRS according to the configuration information or the indication information.
  • the DMRS is usually configured in the middle of each frequency hopping part of the first PUCCH Time domain position, it can be known that the X symbols include the first several symbols or the following several symbols in each frequency hopping part of the first PUCCH.
  • the terminal device determines not to transmit the first PUCCH on X symbols, thereby avoiding the occurrence of these X symbols Unable to decode problem.
  • the terminal device determines not to transmit on the X symbols according to a preset condition
  • the first PUCCH includes: when the third time slot includes downlink symbols, the terminal device determines not to transmit the first PUCCH on the X symbols; wherein the third time slot is the same as the The first time slot is adjacent and after the first time slot.
  • the terminal device knows that the X symbols do not include symbols bearing DMRS according to the configuration information or the indication information, and the downlink symbols are usually configured in the first symbol in the time slot.
  • the third time slot includes downlink symbols
  • the time domain position of the X symbols is usually located at the end of the first time slot. The frequency domain location is different, the symbols adjacent to the X symbols in the third time slot are downlink symbols, then there is no corresponding DMRS in the time domain range of at least one symbol interval near the X symbols that can be used to demodulate the channel. It is determined that the first PUCCH is not transmitted on the X symbols, so as to avoid the problem that the X symbols cannot be decoded.
  • the terminal device transmits the first PUCCH on the X symbols, Including: the terminal device transmits the first PUCCH on the X symbols according to the frequency domain position where the previous frequency hopping part of the X symbols is located; or, the terminal device transmits the first PUCCH according to the location of the second symbol Frequency domain position, the first PUCCH is transmitted on the X symbols; wherein the second symbol is adjacent to the X symbols, or the second symbol and the X symbols are separated by 14 symbols within the symbol.
  • the terminal device transmits the first PUCCH on the X symbols according to the frequency domain position of the previous frequency hopping part of the X symbols; so that the X symbols can multiplex the DMRS transmitted on the previous frequency hopping part , to solve the problem that X symbols may lack DMRS, resulting in inability to decode; or, the terminal device transmits the first PUCCH on X symbols according to the frequency domain position of the second symbol; adjacent, or the second symbol and the X symbols are spaced within 14 symbols, since the X symbols do not include the symbol carrying the DMRS, the frequency domain position where the second symbol is located is configured with the corresponding DMRS, so that the X symbols can be multiplexed
  • the DMRS corresponding to the second symbol solves the problem that X symbols may lack DMRS, which may cause decoding.
  • the terminal device according to the frequency domain position where the previous frequency hopping part of the X symbols is located, The transmitting of the first PUCCH on the X symbols includes: the terminal device not enabling frequency hopping on the X symbols.
  • the terminal device if the terminal device enables frequency hopping on X symbols and sends the first PUCCH on the X symbols, in this case, the terminal device sends the first PUCCH on the X symbols, and the network device sends the first PUCCH on the X symbols.
  • the network device After the X symbols receive the first PUCCH, since the X symbols do not include the symbols carrying the DMRS, the network device cannot use the DMRS to demodulate the first PUCCH, resulting in the problem of inability to decode.
  • the terminal device is in the X symbols Do not enable frequency hopping, so that the frequency domain position of the X symbols is the same as the frequency domain position of the previous frequency hopping part of the X symbols, so that the X symbols can multiplex the DMRS transmitted on the previous frequency hopping part, Avoid the problem that these X symbols cannot be decoded.
  • the terminal device according to the frequency domain position where the previous frequency hopping part of the X symbols is located, Transmitting the first PUCCH on the X symbols includes: adjusting, by the terminal device, the frequency domain position of the frequency hopping part where the X symbols are located to be the same as the frequency domain of the previous frequency hopping part of the X symbols The positions are the same, and the frequency domain position of the next frequency hopping part of the X symbols is adjusted to be the same as the frequency domain position of the X symbols.
  • the X symbols may lack DMRS, resulting in the problem that decoding may not be possible.
  • the terminal device adjusts the frequency domain position of each symbol of the first PUCCH transmitted in one transmission where the X symbols are located, and hops the X symbols
  • the frequency domain position of the frequency part is adjusted to be the same as the frequency domain position of the previous frequency hopping part of X symbols, and the frequency domain position of the next frequency hopping part of X symbols is adjusted to be the same as the frequency domain position of X symbols ;
  • the problem that the symbol cannot be decoded.
  • the configuration information or the indication information is further used to indicate the length.
  • X symbols may have no corresponding DMRS demodulation channel and cannot be decoded.
  • the terminal device transmits the second PUCCH on the X symbols according to the configuration information or indication information, and the second PUCCH The transmission will not occupy the time domain resources of the first PUCCH, that is, the first PUCCH can be normally transmitted on other symbols according to the configuration or indication information.
  • additional PUCCH resources are scheduled based on the existing PUCCH configuration, so that the existing While the PUCCH is multiplexed in the configuration, the utilization rate of frequency domain resources is improved.
  • the terminal device transmits the second PUCCH on the X symbols, including: The terminal device transmits the second PUCCH only on the X symbols; or, the terminal device transmits the second PUCCH on the X symbols and some uplink symbols or idle symbols in the second time slot PUCCH; wherein the first time slot is adjacent to the second time slot.
  • X symbols may have no corresponding DMRS demodulation channel, and the decoding cannot be performed.
  • the terminal device only transmits the second PUCCH on the X symbols, and transmits the second PUCCH on the X symbols.
  • the transmission of the second PUCCH will not occupy the time domain resources of the first PUCCH, that is, the first PUCCH can be normally transmitted on other symbols according to the configuration or indication information.
  • the additional PUCCH resources are scheduled based on the existing PUCCH configuration, so as not to affect the In the existing configuration, PUCCH multiplexing can improve the utilization rate of frequency domain resources; or, based on the existing PUCCH resource configuration information, the terminal device can determine the available symbols in the second time slot, and the available symbols refer to the second time slot.
  • the uplink symbols or idle symbols of the first PUCCH are not transmitted in the slot, and the terminal device transmits the second PUCCH on X symbols and some uplink symbols or idle symbols in the second time slot, thereby effectively avoiding the possible lack of DMRS on the X symbols , causing the problem of inability to decode, and at the same time, on the basis of not affecting the PUCCH multiplexing in the existing configuration, the resources of X symbols and some uplink symbols or idle symbols in the second time slot can be fully utilized to improve resource utilization. Improve coverage.
  • the transmitting, by the terminal device, the DMRS on the X symbols includes: the terminal device only transmits the DMRS on the X symbols; The DMRS is transmitted on the X symbols and some uplink symbols or idle symbols in the second time slot; wherein the first time slot is adjacent to the second time slot.
  • X symbols may have no corresponding DMRS demodulation channel, and the situation cannot be decoded.
  • the terminal device only transmits DMRS on X symbols, thus effectively avoiding the possibility of missing DMRS on X symbols, resulting in failure to decode.
  • the problem of decoding is to use these X symbols to carry the DMRS at the same time, to enhance the detection performance of the DMRS, thereby improving the coverage;
  • the available symbols refer to the uplink symbols or idle symbols of the first PUCCH that are not transmitted in the second time slot.
  • the terminal device transmits DMRS on X symbols and some uplink symbols or idle symbols in the second time slot, thereby effectively avoiding X symbols.
  • the DMRS may be missing on the number of symbols, causing the problem of inability to decode.
  • the resources of the X symbols and some uplink symbols or idle symbols in the second time slot can be fully utilized without affecting the PUCCH multiplexing in the existing configuration. , improve resource utilization.
  • transmitting, by the terminal device, the first PUCCH on the X symbols includes: the terminal device transmits the first PUCCH in the X symbols and the second time slot.
  • the first PUCCH is transmitted on part of the uplink symbols or idle symbols of , wherein the first time slot is adjacent to the second time slot.
  • the terminal device can determine the available symbols in the second time slot based on the existing PUCCH resource configuration information, where the available symbols refer to the uplink symbols or idle symbols of the first PUCCH that are not transmitted in the second time slot,
  • the terminal device transmits the first PUCCH on the X symbols and some uplink symbols or idle symbols in the second time slot, that is, the first PUCCH can cross the time slot boundary, thus effectively avoiding the possibility of missing DMRS on the X symbols, resulting in inability to decode
  • the resources of X symbols and some uplink symbols or idle symbols in the second time slot can be fully utilized to improve resource utilization and coverage.
  • the terminal device transmits the DMRS on the X symbols, including: The terminal device transmits the DMRS in a frequency hopping manner over the X symbols, wherein the first frequency hopping part of the X symbols includes symbols, the second frequency hopping portion of the X symbols includes symbol.
  • the number of symbols in the first frequency hopping part and the second frequency hopping part of the X symbols is rounded up or down to configure, so that the X symbols can be fully used to configure additional DMRSs, so that the X symbols are used to configure additional DMRSs.
  • Other symbols with the same frequency domain position as the first frequency hopping part of the symbol use the DMRS of the first frequency hopping part, and at the same time, other symbols with the same frequency domain position as the second frequency hopping part of the X symbols use the second frequency hopping part DMRS, enhance the detection performance of DMRS and improve the coverage.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication device, including: a processor; a memory for storing instructions executable by the processor; wherein the processor is configured to implement the above-mentioned first when executing the instructions Aspect or one or more transmission methods of uplink control channels in multiple possible implementation manners of the first aspect.
  • the terminal device determines that the X symbols in the first time slot do not include symbols bearing DMRS, based on the configuration information or the indication information that the transmission length of the first PUCCH is L and the number of transmissions is N. There is a possibility that the number of symbols cannot be decoded.
  • the terminal device determines according to preset conditions that the first PUCCH is not transmitted on the X symbols, or the terminal device transmits the first PUCCH on the X symbols, or the terminal device transmits the first PUCCH on the X symbols.
  • the second PUCCH is transmitted, or the terminal device transmits the DMRS on the X symbols, so as to solve the problem that the first PUCCH cannot be decoded.
  • embodiments of the present application provide a non-volatile computer-readable storage medium, where the computer-readable storage medium includes computer instructions, which, when the computer instructions are executed on a computer, cause the computer to execute the above-mentioned first step.
  • An aspect or one or more of the multiple possible implementation manners of the first aspect is an uplink control channel transmission method.
  • the terminal device determines that the X symbols in the first time slot do not include symbols bearing DMRS, based on the configuration information or the indication information that the transmission length of the first PUCCH is L and the number of transmissions is N. There is a possibility that the number of symbols cannot be decoded.
  • the terminal device determines according to preset conditions that the first PUCCH is not transmitted on the X symbols, or the terminal device transmits the first PUCCH on the X symbols, or the terminal device transmits the first PUCCH on the X symbols. Two PUCCHs, or the terminal device transmits DMRS on X symbols, so as to solve the problem that the first PUCCH cannot be decoded.
  • embodiments of the present application provide a chip, including a processor, when the processor executes an instruction, the processor executes the first aspect or one of the various possible implementations of the first aspect.
  • the terminal device determines that the X symbols in the first time slot do not include symbols bearing DMRS, based on the configuration information or the indication information that the transmission length of the first PUCCH is L and the number of transmissions is N. There is a possibility that the number of symbols cannot be decoded.
  • the terminal device determines according to preset conditions that the first PUCCH is not transmitted on the X symbols, or the terminal device transmits the first PUCCH on the X symbols, or the terminal device transmits the first PUCCH on the X symbols. Two PUCCHs, or the terminal device transmits the DMRS on the X symbols, so as to solve the problem that the first PUCCH cannot be decoded.
  • embodiments of the present application provide a computer program product, comprising computer-readable codes, or a non-volatile computer-readable storage medium carrying computer-readable codes, when the computer-readable codes are in communication
  • the processor in the communication device executes the first aspect or one or more of the uplink control channel transmission methods in the multiple possible implementation manners of the first aspect.
  • the terminal device determines that the X symbols in the first time slot do not include symbols bearing DMRS, based on the configuration information or the indication information that the transmission length of the first PUCCH is L and the number of transmissions is N. There is a possibility that the number of symbols cannot be decoded.
  • the terminal device determines according to preset conditions that the first PUCCH is not transmitted on the X symbols, or the terminal device transmits the first PUCCH on the X symbols, or the terminal device transmits the first PUCCH on the X symbols. Two PUCCHs, or the terminal device transmits DMRS on X symbols, so as to solve the problem that the first PUCCH cannot be decoded.
  • FIG. 1 shows a schematic diagram of transmitting PUSCH in a Type-B manner in the related art.
  • FIG. 2 shows a schematic diagram of transmitting PUCCH in a Type-B manner in the related art.
  • FIG. 3 shows a schematic diagram of transmitting PUCCH in a Type-B manner in the related art.
  • FIG. 5 shows a schematic diagram of a communication network architecture according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 6 shows a flowchart of a method for transmitting an uplink control channel according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 7 shows a schematic diagram of a method for transmitting an uplink control channel according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 8 shows a schematic diagram of a method for transmitting an uplink control channel according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 9 shows a schematic diagram of a method for transmitting an uplink control channel according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 10 shows a schematic diagram of a method for transmitting an uplink control channel according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 11 shows a schematic diagram of a method for transmitting an uplink control channel according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 12 shows a flowchart of a method for transmitting an uplink control channel according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 13 shows a schematic diagram of a method for transmitting an uplink control channel according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 14 shows a schematic diagram of a method for transmitting an uplink control channel according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 15 shows a schematic diagram of a method for transmitting an uplink control channel according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 16 shows a schematic diagram of a method for transmitting an uplink control channel according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 17 shows a schematic diagram of a method for transmitting an uplink control channel according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 18 shows a schematic diagram of a method for transmitting an uplink control channel according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 19 shows a flowchart of a method for transmitting an uplink control channel according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 20 shows a schematic diagram of a method for transmitting an uplink control channel according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 21 shows a schematic diagram of a method for transmitting an uplink control channel according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 22 shows a schematic diagram of a method for transmitting an uplink control channel according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 23 shows a schematic diagram of a method for transmitting an uplink control channel according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 24 shows a flowchart of a method for transmitting an uplink control channel according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 25 shows a schematic diagram of a method for transmitting an uplink control channel according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 26 shows a schematic diagram of a method for transmitting an uplink control channel according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 27 shows a flowchart of a method for transmitting an uplink control channel according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 28 shows a flowchart of a method for transmitting an uplink control channel according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 29 shows a schematic structural diagram of a communication device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 30 shows a schematic structural diagram of a communication device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 31 shows a schematic structural diagram of a communication device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 32 shows a schematic structural diagram of a chip according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • 5G NR is a newly proposed topic in the 3rd Generation Partnership Project (3GPP) organization, which is located in Standard 14 (release 14, Rel14).
  • 3GPP 3rd Generation Partnership Project
  • LTE Long Term Evolution
  • 4G communication technology For example, China Mobile, China Unicom, and China Telecom have adopted the 4G LTE Frequency Division Duplex (FDD) mode and Time Division Duplex (TDD) mode of transmission technology respectively, and provide users with High-speed and convenient mobile network service.
  • FDD Frequency Division Duplex
  • TDD Time Division Duplex
  • Uplink transmission generally includes PUCCH transmission and PUSCH transmission.
  • PUCCH belongs to the control channel and has a relatively wide coverage.
  • PUSCH belongs to the data channel, with a large amount of transmission information and relatively close coverage. Therefore, it is more urgent to improve the coverage of PUSCH. question.
  • PUSCH transmission can include two transmission modes, also known as mapping modes; one is Type-A, the other is Type-B, and the indication information of each transmission mode includes a start symbol (identified as S), length (identified as L), and the possible value range of S+L
  • Table 1 shows the PUSCH time domain resource allocation, as shown in Table 1, the symbol S in Table 1 indicates that the start symbol is in a time slot where the value of S starts from 0, that is, the number of the first symbol in a time slot is 0, L represents the length of the PUSCH, that is, the number of symbols occupied by the PUSCH, and S+L represents the start symbol and the PUSCH
  • S represents the start symbol and the PUSCH
  • FIG. 1 shows a schematic diagram of transmitting PUSCH in a Type-B manner in the related art.
  • the PUSCH is transmitted in the first time slot and the second time slot, and both the first time slot and the second time slot include 14 symbols, wherein the first time slot includes 6 downlink symbols , 4 idle symbols, and 4 uplink symbols, where the uplink symbol refers to the symbol used for uplink transmission; the downlink signal refers to the symbol used for downlink transmission; the idle symbol, also known as the flexible symbol, or the interval signal, can be located between the uplink signal and the between downstream signals.
  • the second time slot includes at least 10 consecutive upstream symbols, and the upstream symbols of the first time slot are adjacent to the upstream symbols of the second time slot.
  • the number of PUSCH transmissions can be configured, and the parameter-number of repetitions-r16 is introduced in the 5G NR standard.
  • This parameter has a total of 8 configurable values. , indicated by 3 bits (bit), the configuration values of the above 3 bits correspond to ⁇ n1, n2, n3, n4, n7, n8, n12, n16 ⁇ in turn, where n1 indicates 1 PUSCH transmission, and n16 indicates 16 PUSCH transmissions; The more PUSCH transmission times, the more symbols can be included, and the better the coverage performance.
  • Type-B method which allows one transmission of PUSCH to span time slots
  • the S+L of Type-A is less than or equal to 14
  • One transmission of PUSCH is limited to one time slot, and there is no situation that one transmission spans time slots when PUSCH is transmitted in a Type-A manner.
  • the terminal device will detect each time slot within the range.
  • All L-1 symbols can be used to transmit PUSCH, that is, the symbol identifying S in a certain time slot and the L-1 symbols after the symbol identifying S are not occupied by other transmissions, or the symbol S in a certain time slot is not occupied by other transmissions.
  • the symbol of S and the L-1 symbols after the symbol that identifies S are not downlink symbols, then this transmission of PUSCH can be performed in this time slot, otherwise this transmission of PUSCH in this time slot is abandoned, and the judgment of other times is continued. Whether the gap satisfies the condition.
  • the PUCCH transmission method is introduced, and the configuration of PUCCH resources in Radio Resource Control (RRC) includes the following three parameters: the number of slots (Number of Slots, nrofSlots), the number of symbols (Number of Slots) symbols, nrofSymbols), starting symbol index (startingSymbolIndex).
  • RRC Radio Resource Control
  • nrofSlots represents the number of configurable repeated transmissions of PUCCH, including 2, 4 or 8 times
  • nrofSymbols represents the number of symbols occupied by one transmission of PUCCH
  • nrofSymbols can be analogous to L in Table 1.
  • startingSymbolIndex represents the number of the PUCCH starting symbol in a time slot, starting from 0, where 0 represents the first symbol in the time slot, and the startingSymbolIndex is the same as that in Table 1 above.
  • the S function is the same.
  • the repeated transmission of PUCCH uses the same judgment method as the above-mentioned transmission of PUSCH in the mode of type A, that is, in a time slot, the starting symbol identified by startingSymbolIndex and the starting symbol and the starting symbol after the starting symbol are used.
  • nrofSymbols symbols When a total of nrofSymbols symbols can be used to transmit PUCCH, that is, the starting symbol identified by startingSymbolIndex in a certain time slot and the total nrofSymbols symbols including the starting symbol and the following are not occupied by other transmissions, or a certain If the start symbol identified by startingSymbolIndex in the time slot and the nrofSymbols symbols including the start symbol and the following are not downlink symbols, the PUCCH transmission can be performed in this time slot, otherwise, the PUCCH in this time slot is abandoned of this transmission.
  • Type-B transmission mode can utilize resources to a greater extent than Type-A transmission mode.
  • the Type-A transmission method can only transmit at a fixed time domain position. If the symbol at the time domain position is unavailable, the transmission is abandoned, while the Type-B transmission method can use all the symbols as much as possible.
  • the PUSCH may be transmitted in symbols. Therefore, many companies consider using the Type-B method to transmit PUCCH, so as to maximize the use of uplink symbols to transmit PUCCH, thereby improving the coverage of PUCCH.
  • a DMRS When the PUSCH is being transmitted, a DMRS will be configured on the first symbol.
  • the DMRS is generally configured in the middle of the PUCCH frequency hopping part. Therefore, if the existing Type-B transmission mode is used to transmit PUCCH format 3 or format 4, under certain lengths, the first few symbols (such as the first 3 symbols) of the transmitted PUCCH do not have the relevant configuration of DMRS.
  • D represents downlink time slot
  • S represents special time slot
  • U represents uplink time slot
  • downlink time slot can include 14 downlink symbols
  • uplink time slot can include 14 uplink symbols
  • special time slot is used for downlink to uplink conversion
  • special The time slot may include 14 symbols, wherein the 14 symbols included in the special time slot may include uplink symbols, downlink symbols and idle symbols.
  • FIG. 2 shows a schematic diagram of transmitting PUCCH by Type-B in the related art. As shown in Fig.
  • the 13-14th symbol of the special time slot and the 1-12th symbol of the uplink time slot are occupied.
  • the uplink time slot is occupied.
  • the remaining two symbols (the two symbols in the circle in Figure 2), that is, the 13th to 14th symbols of the uplink time slot, the DMRS is not configured on the 13th and/or the 14th symbol of the uplink time slot , since the last three time slots adjacent to the uplink time slot are all downlink time slots, the uplink symbol used to transmit the PUCCH will not appear until the next fourth time slot, and the first time slot of the next transmission of the PUCCH will appear.
  • the DMRS is configured on the uplink symbol of the fourth time slot. It can be seen that there is no DMRS for demodulation near the time domain position of the 13th to 14th symbols of the uplink time slot. The problem that the 13-14th symbols in the slot cannot be decoded.
  • FIG. 3 shows a schematic diagram of transmitting PUCCH in Type-B in the related art.
  • the second frequency hopping part of the PUCCH occupies the 14th symbol of the uplink time slot (a symbol in the circle in Figure 3), and the DMRS is not configured on the 14th symbol of the uplink time slot;
  • the last three adjacent time slots are all downlink time slots, and the uplink symbol for PUCCH transmission will not appear until the next fourth time slot, and the frequency hopping in the time slot is configured.
  • the first DMRS in the second frequency hopping part is configured on the uplink symbol of the 4th time slot. It can be seen that there is no DMRS for demodulation near the time domain position of the 14th symbol of the uplink time slot. , the problem that the 14th symbol in the uplink time slot cannot be decoded occurs at this time.
  • Figure 4 shows a schematic diagram of transmitting PUCCH in Type-B in the related art.
  • No frequency hopping is configured in one transmission of PUCCH, and frequency hopping is configured in the next transmission of PUCCH.
  • another frequency hopping mode is different from that in FIG. 2 and FIG. 3.
  • Frequency hopping once every 14 symbols is configured to transmit PUCCH.
  • the 13th to 14th symbols of the special time slot and the 1st to 12th symbols of the uplink time slot are occupied.
  • the remainder of the uplink time slot is occupied.
  • the two symbols of (the two symbols in the circle in FIG. 4 ), that is, the 13th-14th symbols of the uplink time slot, and the DMRS is not configured on the 13th and/or the 14th symbol of the uplink time slot; Since the next time slot adjacent to the uplink time slot is a downlink time slot, it can be seen that there is no DMRS near the time domain position where the 13th to 14th symbols of this uplink time slot are located for its demodulation.
  • the frequency is hopped once every 14 symbols, that is, the frequency domain position of at least 14 symbols before the 13th to 14th symbols of the uplink time slot is the same as the frequency of the 13th to 14th symbols of the uplink time slot.
  • the domain positions are different.
  • the 13th-14th symbols in the uplink time slot in Figure 4 do not even have the previous DMRS to refer to, and the 13th-14th symbols in the uplink time slot at this time symbols are completely undecipherable.
  • the embodiments of the present application take the DDDSU time slot allocation as an example to illustrate the above-mentioned technical problems existing in the related art using Type-B transmission of PUCCH, and the same or similar problems existing in other time slot allocations It is not repeated; it can be understood that the following technical solutions in the embodiments of the present application can still solve the problem that there is no corresponding DMRS demodulation channel on the part of the symbols where the PUCCH is transmitted in the Type-B manner when other time slot ratios are adopted. , there is a problem that cannot be decoded.
  • FIG. 5 shows a schematic diagram of a communication network architecture according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication network architecture may include: a terminal device 501 and a network device 502 , and the terminal device 501 and the network device 502 may communicate with each other through wireless Internet connection.
  • the signal transmission sent by the terminal device 501 to the network device 502 is called uplink transmission, and the signal transmission sent by the network device 502 to the terminal device 501 is called downlink transmission.
  • uplink transmission mainly includes two types of signal transmission, one is PUCCH signal transmission, which carries uplink control information (Uplink control information, UCI); the other is PUSCH signal transmission, which carries uplink data and/or
  • the uplink control information mainly includes control-related information, such as acknowledgement (Acknowledge, ACK) or negative acknowledgement (Negative Acknowledgement, NACK), or transmission of uplink channel state information, or bearer scheduling requests, etc.
  • acknowledgement Acknowledge, ACK
  • NACK negative acknowledgement
  • FIG. 5 is only a schematic diagram of a network architecture, and the number of network devices and the number of terminal devices in the communication network architecture are not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • M2M machine to machine
  • eMBB enhanced mobile broadband
  • uRLLC ultra-reliable and ultra-low Delay communication
  • massive IoT communication massive machine type communication
  • the terminal device 501 may be a device with a wireless transceiving function.
  • Terminal equipment can be stationary or mobile; terminal equipment can be deployed on land, including indoor or outdoor, hand-held or vehicle-mounted; it can also be deployed on water (such as ships, etc.); it can also be deployed in the air (eg airplanes, balloons, and satellites, etc.).
  • the terminal equipment may be user equipment (user equipment, UE).
  • the UE includes a handheld device, a vehicle, an in-vehicle device, a wearable device or a computing device with a wireless communication function.
  • the UE may be a mobile phone, a tablet computer, or a computer with a wireless transceiver function.
  • the terminal device may also be a virtual reality (VR) terminal device, an augmented reality (AR) terminal device, a wireless terminal in industrial control, a wireless terminal in unmanned driving, a wireless terminal in telemedicine, intelligent Wireless terminals in power grids, wireless terminals in smart cities, wireless terminals in smart homes, and so on.
  • the apparatus for implementing the function of the terminal may be a terminal device, or may be an apparatus capable of supporting the terminal device to implement the function, such as a chip system.
  • the chip system may be composed of chips, or may include chips and other discrete devices.
  • the network device 502 may be a base station or a base station controller or the like for wireless communication.
  • the base station may include various types of base stations, such as: micro base station (also called small cell), macro base station, relay station, access point, etc., network equipment in traditional UMTS/LTE (Universal Mobile Telecommunications System, Universal Mobile Communication system/Long Term Evolution) wireless communication system can be a traditional macro base station eNB (evolved node B), in a HetNet (Heterogeneous Network, heterogeneous network) scenario, it can be a micro base station eNB, in a distributed base station scenario, it can be It is the baseband processing unit BBU (Base Band Unit, baseband unit) and the radio frequency unit RRU (Remote Radio Unit, radio frequency remote unit), in the CRAN (Cloud Radio Access Netowrk, cloud wireless access network) scenario can be the baseband pool BBU pool.
  • BBU Base Band Unit
  • RRU Remote Radio Unit
  • CRAN Cloud Radio Access Netowrk, cloud
  • the apparatus for implementing the function of the network device may be the network device, or may be an apparatus capable of supporting the network device to implement the function, such as a chip system.
  • FIG. 6 shows a flowchart of a method for transmitting an uplink control channel according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the method can be applied to a scenario where PUCCH is transmitted in a Type-B manner.
  • the method may include the following step:
  • Step 601 the terminal device receives configuration information or indication information from the network device, the configuration information or the indication information is used to configure or instruct the terminal device to send the first PUCCH, the transmission length of the first PUCCH is L symbols, and the number of transmissions of the first PUCCH is is N, N is an integer greater than or equal to 1, and L is an integer greater than or equal to 1;
  • the format of the first PUCCH may be format 3 or format 4, and the value of L is any integer greater than or equal to 4 and less than or equal to 14.
  • Step 602 The terminal device determines whether to transmit the first PUCCH on X symbols according to a preset condition; the X symbols are located in the first time slot, and the X symbols are used to transmit the first PUCCH.
  • the first PUCCH when X is less than L, the first PUCCH needs to be transmitted across time slots, and at this time, it can be determined whether to transmit the first PUCCH on X symbols according to a preset condition, so as to avoid the situation that cannot be decoded.
  • the first time slot may include 14 symbols, and the first time slot may be an uplink time slot, a special time slot, or other time slot including uplink symbols, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • the terminal device is configured or instructed to transmit the first PUCCH on symbols other than X symbols based on the configuration information or the indication information.
  • the network device may measure the value of the The channel information on the symbol carrying the UCI is then divided by the corresponding channel information measured and obtained by dividing the signal received by the symbol carrying the UCI and decoding, so as to obtain the uplink control information.
  • the X symbols are used to transmit all the symbols of the first PUCCH in one time slot, and do not include the symbols that carry DRMS; for example, as shown in FIG. 2 above, the X symbols are the 13th symbol of the uplink time slot. and 14th symbols (two symbols shown in circles in Figure 2).
  • the definitions of the X symbols referred to in the subsequent embodiments are the same as the definitions of the X symbols in this embodiment.
  • the terminal device when the terminal device transmits the first PUCCH in X symbols based on the configuration information or the indication information, it can be known that the X symbols do not include symbols carrying DMRS, then the X symbols may have no corresponding DMRS demodulation channel, and there may be In the case of inability to decode, the terminal device determines not to transmit the first PUCCH on X symbols according to a preset condition, thereby avoiding the situation that the X symbols cannot be decoded.
  • the terminal device determines X symbols according to configuration information or indication information; exemplarily, the terminal device may determine X symbols according to the transmission length L of the first PUCCH, the start symbol, and the number of transmissions N. For example, taking the PUCCH transmitted in the above-mentioned FIG.
  • the start symbol is the thirteenth symbol of the special time slot
  • the first PUCCH is The first transmission of the first PUCCH occupies the 13-14th symbol in the special time slot and the 1-12th symbol in the uplink time slot
  • the first transmission of the first PUCCH occupies the 13th-14th symbol in the uplink time slot and The 12 uplink symbols after the uplink time slot; if the special time slot is taken as the first time slot, then X symbols are the 13th to 14th symbols in the special time slot, and if the uplink time slot is taken as In the first time slot, the X symbols are the 13th to 14th symbols in the uplink time slot.
  • the terminal device may configure the first PUCCH to enable frequency hopping, or not to enable frequency hopping, where the meaning of enabling frequency hopping for the first PUCCH is: according to a predefined manner, the first PUCCH is in the time domain. It is divided into two parts of time domain length, that is, two frequency hopping parts, and each frequency hopping part is transmitted on different frequency domain resources; for example, the time domain length L of the first PUCCH is 14 symbols, when the first PUCCH hops During frequency, the first PUCCH of the 14 symbols will be divided into two frequency hopping parts with a length of 7 symbols, and the two frequency hopping parts with a length of 7 symbols are respectively transmitted in different frequency domain positions .
  • the frequency domain location may be one or more resource blocks (RBs), one or more resource elements (REs), one or more carriers/cells, or One or more bandwidth parts (BWP), which can also be one or more RBs on one or more BWPs on one or more carriers, or one or more RBs on one or more carriers One or more REs on one or more RBs on the BWP.
  • RBs resource blocks
  • REs resource elements
  • BWP bandwidth parts
  • the terminal device determines that the X symbol is located in the frequency domain position.
  • the first PUCCH is not transmitted; wherein the first time slot is adjacent to the second time slot.
  • the second time slot may be a time slot before the first time slot, or may be a time slot after the first time slot, and may also include both the time slot before the first time slot and the time slot of the first time slot. the next time slot.
  • the previous time slot of the first time slot may include any one of the downlink time slot, the uplink time slot, and the special time slot, and the time slot after the first time slot may include the downlink time slot, the uplink time slot, and the special time slot.
  • the first time slot can be an uplink time slot
  • the previous time slot adjacent to this one time slot can be a special time slot
  • the next time slot adjacent to this one time slot can be a downlink time slot gap.
  • the terminal device knows, according to the configuration information or the indication information, that the X symbols do not include the symbols carrying DMRS, and when the frequency domain positions of the symbols carrying DMRS in the first time slot and the second time slot are the same as the X symbols
  • the frequency domain positions of the symbols are different, it can be known that within the time domain range of at least one time slot near the X symbols, there is no corresponding DMRS for demodulating the channel, and the terminal equipment determines not to transmit the first PUCCH on the X symbols, so as to avoid the occurrence of The problem that the X symbols cannot be decoded.
  • the X symbols are symbols that carry UCI
  • the first time slot is an uplink time slot
  • the frequency domain positions of the other symbols except the X symbols in the uplink time slot where the X symbols are located are the same as the one.
  • the frequency domain positions of the X symbols are different;
  • the previous time slot of the uplink time slot is a special time slot, and the frequency domain positions of the uplink symbols in the special time slot are all different from the frequency domain positions of the X symbols;
  • the next time slot of the uplink time slot is the downlink time slot; at this time, in the uplink time slot where the X symbols are located, the special time slot and the downlink time slot adjacent to the uplink time slot, the frequency where the X symbols are located
  • the domain location does not include DMRS, and the terminal device determines not to transmit the first PUCCH on the X symbol.
  • FIG. 7 shows a schematic diagram of a method for transmitting an uplink control channel according to an embodiment of the present application; as shown in FIG. 7 , a time slot where the first time slot is located is an uplink time slot, and the last time slot of the uplink time slot is an uplink time slot.
  • the format is format 3 or format 4, and the DMRS is configured in the 4th symbol and the 11th symbol of the first PUCCH transmitted once; the X symbols include the 13th and 14th symbols in the uplink time slot, and the 13th and 14th symbols
  • the 14th symbol is the symbol carrying UCI; the frequency domain positions of the 1-12th symbols in this uplink time slot are different from the frequency domain positions of the 13th and 14th symbols;
  • the uplink symbol is the symbol that carries UCI, and its frequency domain position is different from the 13th and 14th symbols in the uplink time slot; in the special time slot, uplink time slot and downlink time slot in Figure 7, the uplink time slot
  • the 13th and 14th symbols in the frequency domain do not include DMRS
  • the terminal device determines not to transmit the first PUCCH on the X symbols; wherein the first symbol is located in the The first symbol after the X symbols carries the DMRS.
  • the first threshold may be M time slots, where M is an integer greater than or equal to 1; for example, if M is 2, the first threshold is 2 time slots, and the interval between X symbols and the first symbol In the case of more than 2 time slots, the terminal device determines not to transmit the first PUCCH on X symbols. Exemplarily, when the value of X is greater than or equal to 2, in the case that the interval between any one of the X symbols and the first symbol is more than 2 time slots, or when the last symbol of the X symbols is the same as the first symbol. When the interval between one symbol exceeds 2 time slots, the terminal device determines not to transmit the first PUCCH on X symbols. It can be understood that the first threshold may be predefined or configured by the base station. This embodiment of the present application does not limit the manner of determining the first threshold.
  • the terminal device knows, according to the configuration information or the indication information, that the X symbols do not include symbols carrying DMRS, and when the interval between the X symbols and the first symbol exceeds the first threshold, it can be known that the X symbols are near the first symbol Within the time domain range of the threshold, there is no corresponding DMRS for demodulating the channel, and the terminal device determines not to transmit the first PUCCH on the X symbols, thereby avoiding the problem that the X symbols cannot be decoded.
  • FIG. 8 shows a schematic diagram of a method for transmitting an uplink control channel according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the first threshold is set to be 2 time slots
  • the first time slot is an uplink time slot
  • the format of the first PUCCH transmitted is format 3 or format 4
  • the first PUCCH is format 3 or format 4.
  • a PUCCH includes two frequency hopping parts, and the DMRS is configured on the 3rd symbol of each frequency hopping part; the X symbols include the 14th symbol of the uplink time slot, and the 14th symbol is a symbol carrying UCI,
  • the next three adjacent time slots of the uplink time slot are all downlink time slots, the fourth time slot is a special time slot, and the 11th symbol of the special time slot is the next symbol that carries the DMRS.
  • the interval between the 11th symbol of the special time slot and the 14th symbol of the uplink time slot is 3 downlink time slots and 10 symbols, and the interval is greater than 2 time slots.
  • the 14th symbol of the uplink time slot has no corresponding DMRS demodulation channel, the terminal equipment determines not to transmit the first PUCCH on the 14th symbol in the uplink time slot.
  • the terminal device determines not to transmit the first PUCCH on X symbols; wherein the second threshold is based on the length L, the DMRS configuration, the first PUCCH format and at least one of the frequency hopping modes of the first PUCCH is determined.
  • the second threshold may be predefined or configured by the base station. This embodiment of the present application does not limit the manner of determining the second threshold.
  • the second threshold may be determined according to at least one of the first PUCCH length L, the DMRS configuration mode, the first PUCCH format, and the frequency hopping mode of the first PUCCH, where the first PUCCH format may include format 3 or format 4, the first PUCCH length L may include lengths corresponding to different formats of the first PUCCH, for example, the length of the first PUCCH format 3 or the length of the first PUCCH format 4; the DMRS configuration mode may include additional DMRS and no additional For DMRS, the frequency hopping manner of the first PUCCH may include frequency hopping within a time slot and no frequency hopping within a time slot.
  • the terminal device knows, according to the configuration information or the indication information, that the X symbols do not include the symbols that carry the DMRS.
  • the DMRS is usually configured in each frequency hopping part of the first PUCCH.
  • the X symbols include the first several symbols or the following several symbols in each frequency hopping part of the first PUCCH.
  • the terminal device determines not to transmit the first PUCCH on X symbols, so as to avoid the occurrence of X symbols A symbol cannot be decoded.
  • first PUCCH format 3 and the first PUCCH format 4 different first PUCCH lengths in these two formats, two DMRS configuration modes with additional DMRS and no additional DMRS, and two frequency hopping modes are given.
  • the value of the second threshold is shown in Table 2.
  • PUCCH length indicates the length value of the first PUCCH format 3 and format 4 different, and the specific value is an integer from 4 to 14; "no additional DMRS” indicates that no additional DMRS is configured in the first PUCCH, and “additional DMRS” indicates that An additional DMRS is configured in the first PUCCH, "No frequency hopping” indicates that frequency hopping is not enabled on the first PUCCH, and “frequency hopping” indicates that frequency hopping is enabled for the first PUCCH. "0" in Table 2 indicates that the second threshold value is 0, which means that the transmission of the first PUCCH does not need to be abandoned.
  • the first PUCCH may enable intra-slot frequency hopping. Therefore, if the lengths of the two frequency hopping parts of the first PUCCH are different, the value of the second threshold may also be different. ” column appears “1, 1” and other values, corresponding to the two frequency hopping parts respectively.
  • the X symbols do not include symbols bearing DMRS, and when the length L of the first PUCCH and the format of the first PUCCH satisfy a certain PUCCH length in Table 2, the second threshold is determined according to the DMRS configuration mode and the frequency hopping mode When the value of X is less than or equal to the second threshold, the X symbols do not have a corresponding DMRS demodulation channel, and the terminal device determines not to transmit the first PUCCH on the X symbols, so as to avoid the occurrence of these X symbols Unable to decode problem.
  • FIG. 9 shows a schematic diagram of a method for transmitting an uplink control channel according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the X symbols include the 13th and 14th symbols of the uplink time slot, that is, the value of X is 2, and the 13th symbol and the 14th symbol are symbols that carry UCI; by looking up Table 2, the value of the second threshold is 3. Since the value of X is less than the second threshold, the terminal equipment determines that the 13th and The first PUCCH is not transmitted over 14 symbols.
  • the terminal device determines not to transmit the first PUCCH on X symbols; wherein the third time slot is the same as the first time slot.
  • the slots are adjacent and after the first slot.
  • the third time slot may include a downlink time slot or a special time slot, and may also be another time slot including downlink symbols.
  • the terminal device knows, according to the configuration information or the indication information, that the X symbols do not include symbols bearing DMRS, and the downlink symbols are usually configured in the first symbol in the time slot, and when the third time slot includes downlink symbols , for the first PUCCH format 3 or the first PUCCH format 4, the time domain position of the X symbols is usually located at the end of the first time slot.
  • the frequency domain location is different, the symbols adjacent to the X symbols in the third time slot are downlink symbols, then there is no corresponding DMRS in the time domain range of at least one symbol interval near the X symbols that can be used to demodulate the channel. It is determined that the first PUCCH is not transmitted on the X symbols, so as to avoid the problem that the X symbols cannot be decoded.
  • the terminal device determines the number of X symbols and the available symbols in the third time slot according to the number of available symbols in the third time slot before the downlink symbol. Whether the symbol conforms to the first PUCCH length L configured or indicated by the configuration information or the indication information, if so, the first PUCCH can be transmitted on X symbols.
  • FIG. 10 shows a schematic diagram of a method for transmitting an uplink control channel according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the first time slot is the uplink time slot, the X symbols include the 13th and 14th symbols in the uplink time slot, and the next time slot of the uplink time slot is the downlink time slot, that is, in the The next time slot includes downlink symbols.
  • the 13th and 14th symbols in the uplink time slot do not have corresponding DMRS demodulation channels, and the terminal equipment determines that the 13th and 14th symbols in the uplink time slot do not The first PUCCH is transmitted.
  • the terminal device may determine, based on the existing PUCCH resource configuration information, not to transmit the first PUCCH on the X symbols.
  • the existing PUCCH resource configuration information may include the PUCCH already configured in the terminal device.
  • the present disclosure can be applied to a scenario in which X symbols are used based on the existing PUCCH resource configuration information.
  • X symbols can improve resource utilization.
  • the X symbols The PUCCH is configured according to the existing PUCCH resource configuration information.
  • the configured X symbols do not include symbols carrying DMRS, considering that the existing PUCCH is multiplexed with other terminal equipment, in order to avoid resource waste, the use of X symbols is abandoned. That is, the terminal device does not transmit the first PUCCH on X symbols.
  • Some PUCCHs are multiplexed with other terminal equipments. In order to avoid resource waste, the terminal equipment does not transmit the first PUCCH on X symbols.
  • FIG. 11 shows a schematic diagram of a method for transmitting an uplink control channel according to an embodiment of the present application; as shown in FIG. 11 , the first time slot is a special time slot, and the X symbols include the first time slot.
  • FIG. 12 shows a flowchart of a method for transmitting an uplink control channel according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the method can be applied to a scenario of transmitting PUCCH in a Type-B manner.
  • the method may include the following step:
  • Step 1201 the terminal device receives configuration information or indication information from the network device, the configuration information or the indication information is used to configure or instruct the terminal device to send the first PUCCH, the transmission length of the first PUCCH is L symbols, and the number of transmissions of the first PUCCH is is N, N is an integer greater than or equal to 1, and L is an integer greater than or equal to 1;
  • the first PUCCH may include: UCI and DMRS; the format of the first PUCCH may be format 3 or format 4, and the value of L is any integer greater than or equal to 4 and less than or equal to 14.
  • Step 1202 The terminal device transmits the first PUCCH on X symbols according to a preset processing method; the X symbols are located in the first time slot, and the X symbols are used for transmitting the first PUCCH.
  • the first PUCCH when X is less than L, the first PUCCH needs to be transmitted across time slots.
  • the first PUCCH can be transmitted on X symbols according to a preset processing method, so as to avoid the situation that decoding cannot be performed.
  • the first time slot may include 14 symbols, and the first time slot may be an uplink time slot, a special time slot, or other time slot including uplink symbols, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • the terminal device is configured or instructed to transmit the first PUCCH on symbols other than X symbols based on the configuration information or the indication information.
  • the network device may measure the value of the The channel information on the symbol bearing the UCI is divided by the corresponding channel information measured and obtained by dividing the signal received by the symbol bearing the UCI, and decoding is performed to obtain the UCI.
  • the X symbols do not include the symbols carrying DMRS, the X symbols may have no corresponding DMRS demodulation channel, and the decoding cannot be performed.
  • the terminal device adjusts the frequency domain positions of the X symbols, thereby The situation where these X symbols cannot be decoded is avoided.
  • the following further describes the technical solution for the terminal device to transmit the first PUCCH on X symbols according to the preset processing method in step 1202 in the embodiment of FIG. 12 .
  • the terminal device transmits the first PUCCH on X symbols according to the frequency domain position where the previous frequency hopping part of the X symbols is located; or, the terminal device transmits the first PUCCH according to the frequency domain position where the second symbol is located; , the first PUCCH is transmitted on X symbols; wherein the second symbol is adjacent to the X symbols, or the second symbol and the X symbols are spaced within 14 symbols.
  • the previous frequency hopping part is located before X symbols in the time domain, the last symbol of the previous frequency hopping part is adjacent to X symbols, and the frequency domain position where the previous frequency hopping part is located is the same as the one where the X symbols are located.
  • the frequency domain location is different.
  • the X symbol is the 13-14th symbol of the uplink time slot
  • the previous frequency hopping part includes the 6th-12th symbol in the uplink time slot.
  • the previous frequency hopping part and the X symbols may be located in the same transmission of the first PUCCH, or may be located in different transmissions of the first PUCCH.
  • the frequency domain position where the previous frequency hopping part is located is different from the frequency domain position where the X symbols are located.
  • the second symbol is adjacent to the X symbols, or the second symbol and the X symbols are spaced within 14 symbols, and the frequency domain position where the second symbol is located is different from the frequency domain location where the X symbols are located.
  • the terminal device transmits the first PUCCH on the X symbols according to the frequency domain position where the previous frequency hopping part of the X symbols is located; thus, the X symbols can multiplex the data transmitted on the previous frequency hopping part.
  • DMRS to solve the problem that X symbols are missing DMRS, resulting in inability to decode.
  • the terminal device transmits the first PUCCH on X symbols according to the frequency domain position where the second symbol is located; wherein the second symbol is adjacent to the X symbols, or the second symbol and the X symbols are spaced within 14 symbols , at this time, the second symbol can be located in the first few frequency hopping parts of the X symbols.
  • the corresponding DMRS is configured in the frequency domain position of the second symbol, so that the X symbols can be Multiplexing the DMRS corresponding to the second symbol solves the problem that X symbols may lack DMRS, resulting in inability to decode.
  • the configuration information or the indication information is further used to instruct the terminal device not to enable frequency hopping on X symbols.
  • the Y symbols do not include the symbols carrying DMRS, but, In the next time slot or the previous time slot, Y symbols have corresponding DMRS demodulation, which do not belong to the X symbols in this implementation manner.
  • the Y symbols are the 13th and 14th symbols of the special time slot (the two symbols shown in the circle in Figure 4), since these two symbols are in the next time slot The DMRS on the 2nd symbol of is demodulated, so these Y symbols do not belong to the X symbols in this implementation.
  • the above-mentioned terminal device transmitting the first PUCCH on X symbols according to the frequency domain position of the previous frequency hopping part of the X symbols may include: the terminal device does not enable frequency hopping on the X symbols.
  • “disable frequency hopping” can be understood that the terminal equipment is configured with frequency hopping, but does not perform the frequency hopping.
  • the terminal device if the terminal device enables frequency hopping on X symbols and sends the first PUCCH on the X symbols, in this case, the terminal device sends the first PUCCH on the X symbols, and the network After the device receives the first PUCCH in the X symbols, since the X symbols do not include the symbols carrying the DMRS, the network device cannot use the DMRS to demodulate the first PUCCH, resulting in the problem of inability to decode.
  • the terminal device does not enable frequency hopping on these X symbols, so that the frequency domain position of the X symbols is the same as the frequency domain position of the previous frequency hopping part of the X symbols, so that the X symbols can be multiplexed with the previous one.
  • the DMRS transmitted on the frequency hopping part avoids the problem that the X symbols cannot be decoded.
  • the previous frequency hopping part of the X symbols may be located in the same transmission of the first PUCCH as the X symbols, or may not be located in the same transmission of the first PUCCH.
  • the X symbols are symbols that carry UCI
  • the first time slot is an uplink time slot
  • the previous frequency hopping part of the X symbols is located in the uplink time slot
  • the previous frequency hopping part and the X symbols are Not located in the first PUCCH of the same transmission
  • the previous frequency hopping part includes a symbol carrying DMRS
  • the next symbol adjacent to the X symbols is a downlink symbol.
  • the X symbols do not have corresponding symbols.
  • the DMRS demodulates the channel, the terminal equipment does not enable frequency hopping on these X symbols, so that the X symbols are in the same frequency domain position as the previous frequency hopping part, so that the X symbols in the uplink time slot can be repeated.
  • the DMRS transmitted on the previous frequency hopping part in the uplink time slot is used to avoid the problem that the X symbols in the uplink time slot cannot be decoded.
  • FIG. 13 shows a schematic diagram of a method for transmitting an uplink control channel according to an embodiment of the present application;
  • the first time slot is an uplink time slot
  • the previous time slot of the uplink time slot is is a special time slot
  • the next symbol adjacent to the X symbols is a downlink symbol;
  • the first PUCCH includes two frequency hopping parts, each frequency hopping part occupies 7 uplink symbols, and the DMRS is configured on the 4th symbol of each frequency hopping part; when X symbols include the uplink The 13th and 14th symbols in the slot (the symbols in the circles in Figure 13), and the 13th and 14th symbols are symbols that carry UCI;
  • the previous frequency hopping part of X symbols is related to the 13th and 14th The symbol is not located in the first PUCCH of the same transmission; the previous frequency
  • the following describes a scenario where there are two or more frequency hopping positions configured in the first time slot, and the terminal device does not enable frequency hopping on X symbols.
  • the Y symbols do not include the symbols carrying DMRS, but, In the next time slot or the previous time slot, if Y symbols have corresponding DMRS demodulation, they do not belong to X symbols in this scenario.
  • the Y symbols are the 13th and 14th symbols of the special time slot (the two symbols shown in the circle in Figure 4), since these two symbols are in the next time slot
  • the DMRS on the 2nd symbol of is demodulated, so these Y symbols do not belong to the X symbols in this implementation.
  • the format of the first PUCCH is format 3 or format 4.
  • the terminal device indicates the first PUCCH length L, starting position, transmission The number of times N is to transmit the first PUCCH.
  • the DMRS is usually configured in the middle of the frequency hopping part. For some L values, the first 3 symbols of each frequency hopping part may exist without DMRS.
  • the first PUCCH is transmitted in X symbols. Since X symbols do not include symbols bearing DMRS, the next symbol bearing DMRS may be located after multiple downlink time slots.
  • the frequency domain position where the X symbols are located does not even have DMRS, and the X symbols do not have a corresponding DMRS demodulation channel; in this case, the terminal device determines that the X symbols do not include The symbol carrying the DMRS, the terminal equipment does not enable frequency hopping on these X symbols, so that the frequency domain position of the X symbols is the same as the frequency domain position of the previous frequency hopping part of the X symbols, so that the X symbols
  • the DMRS transmitted on the previous frequency hopping part can be multiplexed to avoid the problem that the X symbols cannot be decoded; and the DMRS of the previous frequency hopping part can be utilized to the maximum extent to improve the decoding effect.
  • the X symbols are symbols that carry UCI
  • the first time slot is an uplink time slot
  • at least two frequency hopping positions are configured in the uplink time slot
  • the frequency domain positions where the X symbols are located are the same as the uplink time slot.
  • the frequency domain positions of other symbols in the slot are different
  • the previous frequency hopping part of the X symbols is located in the uplink time slot
  • the previous frequency hopping part and the X symbols are not located in the first PUCCH of the same transmission
  • the previous frequency hopping part includes a symbol carrying DMRS, and at the same time, the next symbol adjacent to the X symbols is a downlink symbol.
  • the X symbols do not have a corresponding DMRS demodulation channel, and the terminal equipment is in the X symbols.
  • the frequency hopping is not enabled on the symbol, so that the X symbols are in the same frequency domain position as the previous frequency hopping part, so that the X symbols in the uplink time slot can reuse the previous frequency hopping in the uplink time slot.
  • Part of the DMRS transmitted on the uplink thereby avoiding the problem that the X symbols in the uplink time slot cannot be decoded, and maximizing the use of the DMRS-bearing symbols in the previous frequency hopping part to improve the decoding effect.
  • the 13th and 14th symbols in the time slot, and the 13th and 14th symbols are symbols that carry UCI; the previous frequency hopping part of X symbols and the 13th and 14th symbols are not located in the same transmission.
  • the previous frequency hopping part includes the 6th to 12th symbols in the uplink time slot, and the 9th symbol in the uplink time slot is a symbol that carries DMRS; at this time, in the uplink time slot
  • the 13th and 14th symbols do not have corresponding DMRS demodulation channels, and the terminal device does not enable frequency hopping on the 13th and 14th symbols in the uplink time slot, so that the 13th and 14th symbols in the uplink time slot
  • the same frequency domain positions as the 6th to 12th symbols in the uplink time slot are located, so that the 13th and 14th symbols in the uplink time slot can multiplex the DMRS transmitted by the ninth symbol in the uplink time slot.
  • FIG. 15 shows a schematic diagram of a method for transmitting an uplink control channel according to an embodiment of the present application; as shown in FIG. 15 , it is a scenario in which two frequency hopping positions are configured in one time slot, and X
  • the first time slot where the symbol is located is an uplink time slot
  • the previous time slot of this uplink time slot is a special time slot
  • the format of the first PUCCH transmitted is format 3 or format 4
  • the DMRS is configured on the 4th symbol and the 11th symbol of the first PUCCH transmitted once
  • X symbols Including the 13th and 14th symbols in the uplink time slot, and the 13th and 14th symbols are symbols that carry UCI; the frequency domain positions of the 13th and 12th symbols in the uplink time slot are the same as the 13th and 14th symbols.
  • the positions of the 14th symbol in the frequency domain are different; the two uplink symbols in this special time slot are symbols that carry UCI, and their frequency domain positions are different from the 13th and 14th symbols in the uplink time slot; in Fig.
  • uplink time slot and downlink time slot in 15 the frequency domain positions of the 13th and 14th symbols in the uplink time slot do not include DMRS.
  • the 13th and 14th symbols in the uplink time slot There is no corresponding DMRS demodulation channel for each symbol, and the terminal equipment does not enable frequency hopping on the 13th and 14th symbols in the uplink time slot, so that the 13th and 14th symbols in the uplink time slot are the same as those in the uplink time slot.
  • the positions of the 6th to 12th symbols in the frequency domain are the same, so that the 13th and 14th symbols in the uplink time slot can multiplex the DMRS transmitted by the ninth symbol in the uplink time slot.
  • the configuration information or the indication information is further used to instruct the terminal device to adjust the frequency domain position of the frequency hopping part where the X symbols are located to be the same as the frequency domain position of the previous frequency hopping part of the X symbols, And the frequency domain position of the next frequency hopping part of the X symbols is adjusted to be the same as the frequency domain position of the X symbols.
  • the above-mentioned terminal equipment transmits the first PUCCH on the X symbols according to the frequency domain position where the previous frequency hopping part of the X symbols is located, including: the terminal equipment adjusts the frequency domain position of the frequency hopping part where the X symbols are located to The frequency domain position of the previous frequency hopping part of the symbol is the same, and the frequency domain position of the next frequency hopping part of X symbols is adjusted to be the same as the frequency domain position of X symbols.
  • the frequency hopping part and the next frequency hopping part where the X symbols are located both contain one DMRS-bearing symbol or both contain two DMRS-bearing symbols, or, the frequency hopping part and the next frequency hopping part where the X symbols are located may be.
  • One hopping part contains one DMRS-carrying symbol, and the other hopping part contains two DMRS-carrying symbols.
  • the frequency domain position of the frequency hopping part where the X symbols are located may be denoted as the first frequency domain position, and the frequency domain position of the next frequency hopping part of the X symbols may be denoted as the second frequency domain position;
  • the terminal device adjusts the frequency domain position of the symbol to the second frequency domain position; when a symbol is configured in the second frequency domain position When , the terminal device adjusts the frequency domain position of the symbol to the first frequency domain position.
  • the X symbols are the last X symbols in a time slot.
  • X 2, the last 2 symbols in the first slot.
  • the X symbols do not include symbols that carry DMRS. It can be seen from the above statement that there is a problem that the X symbols may lack DMRS, resulting in inability to decode. Therefore, the terminal device adjusts the first transmission where the X symbols are located.
  • the frequency domain position of each symbol of a PUCCH, the frequency domain position of the frequency hopping part where the X symbols are located is adjusted to be the same as the frequency domain position of the previous frequency hopping part of the X symbols, and the next frequency hopping part of the X symbols is adjusted.
  • the frequency domain position of the X symbols is adjusted to be the same as the frequency domain position of the X symbols; so that the frequency domain position of the X symbols is the same as the frequency domain position of the previous frequency hopping part of the X symbols, so that the X symbols can be multiplexed before.
  • DMRS transmitted on a frequency hopping part so as to avoid the problem that the X symbols cannot be decoded.
  • the first frequency domain position may refer to the first frequency domain position of the first PUCCH.
  • the frequency domain location where the first frequency hopping part is located, and the second frequency domain location may refer to the frequency domain location where the second frequency hopping part of the first PUCCH is located.
  • the first PUCCH transmitted at one time includes two frequency hopping parts, the frequency domain position where the previous frequency hopping part is located is denoted as the first frequency domain position, and the frequency domain position where the latter frequency hopping part is located is denoted as the first frequency domain position.
  • the frequency domain position, the X symbols are all symbols carrying UCI, the first time slot is an uplink time slot, and the X symbols are located at the end of the uplink time slot, and the frequency domain position where the X symbols are located is the first frequency domain position;
  • the first PUCCH of a transmission in which the X symbols are located is located in the upstream time slot and the next time slot adjacent to the upstream time slot, the previous frequency hopping part of the X symbols is located in the upstream time slot, and the previous time slot is located in the upstream time slot.
  • a frequency hopping part and X symbols are not located in the first PUCCH of the same transmission
  • the previous frequency hopping part includes a symbol bearing DMRS
  • the frequency domain position where the previous frequency hopping part is located is the second frequency domain position
  • the X symbols do not have a corresponding DMRS demodulation channel
  • the terminal device adjusts the frequency domain positions of the first PUCCH symbols of the one transmission where the X symbols are located.
  • the symbol configured in the second frequency domain position in the first PUCCH is adjusted to the first frequency domain position, and the terminal device adjusts the symbol configured in the first frequency domain position in the first PUCCH where X symbols are located to the second frequency domain position.
  • the terminal equipment adjusts the frequency domain position where the X symbols are located from the first frequency domain position to the second frequency domain position; so that the frequency domain position of the X symbols is the same as that of the previous frequency hopping part of the X symbols
  • the frequency domain positions are the same, so that the X symbols can multiplex the DMRS transmitted on the previous frequency hopping part, thereby avoiding the problem that the X symbols cannot be decoded.
  • FIG. 16 shows a schematic diagram of a method for transmitting an uplink control channel according to an embodiment of the present application;
  • the first time slot is an uplink time slot
  • the first PUCCH of a transmission where the X symbols are located is located in the uplink time slot and the uplink time slot In the adjacent next time slot, that is, including the 13th and 14th symbols in the uplink time slot and the 1st to 12th symbols in the next time slot of the uplink time slot, wherein X symbols include the uplink time slot
  • the position is adjusted to the second frequency domain position, and the terminal equipment adjusts the frequency domain position of the 6-12th symbol in the next time slot adjacent to the uplink time slot from the second frequency domain position to the first frequency domain position;
  • the frequency domain positions of the 13th and 14th symbols in the uplink time slot are the same as the frequency domain positions of the 6th to 12th symbols in the uplink time slot, so that the 13th and 14th symbols in the uplink time slot can be
  • the DMRS transmitted on the 9th symbol in the uplink time slot is multiplexed.
  • the above-mentioned terminal device transmitting the first PUCCH on X symbols may include: the terminal device transmitting the first PUCCH of L* length on X symbols, where L* is less than L, or It is called L truncation length.
  • the terminal device can For the existing PUCCH resource configuration information, configure the first PUCCH of L* length on X symbols, and the first PUCCH of L* length can be transmitted together with the first PUCCH of the existing configured length of L, so that it does not affect the existing PUCCH.
  • the resources of the X symbols are used to improve resource utilization and coverage.
  • FIG. 17 shows a schematic diagram of an uplink control channel transmission method according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the terminal device can enable frequency hopping on X symbols according to the configuration or instruction information.
  • the X symbols can be divided into a first frequency hopping part and a second frequency hopping part, X
  • the first frequency hopping part of symbols includes symbols
  • the second frequency hopping portion of the X symbols includes symbol.
  • the above-mentioned terminal device transmitting the first PUCCH on X symbols may include: the terminal device transmitting the first PUCCH on X symbols and some uplink symbols or idle symbols in the second time slot; Wherein, the first time slot is adjacent to the second time slot.
  • the terminal device may determine available symbols in the second time slot based on the existing PUCCH resource configuration information, where the available symbols refer to the uplink symbols or idle symbols of the first PUCCH that are not transmitted in the second time slot , the terminal device transmits the first PUCCH of L* length on X symbols and some uplink symbols or idle symbols in the second time slot, that is, the first PUCCH of L* length can cross the time slot boundary, thereby effectively avoiding X
  • the DMRS may be missing on the symbol, causing the problem of inability to decode.
  • the resources of X symbols and some uplink symbols or idle symbols in the second time slot can be fully utilized without affecting the PUCCH multiplexing in the existing configuration. Improve resource utilization and increase coverage.
  • FIG. 18 shows a schematic diagram of an uplink control channel transmission method according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the 1st to 2nd symbols in the next time slot of the first time slot are available, in order not to affect the PUCCH multiplexing in the existing configuration, and to make full use of the X symbols and the available symbols in the next time slot of the first time slot.
  • the terminal device can enable frequency hopping on X symbols and some uplink symbols or idle symbols in the second time slot according to the configuration or instruction information.
  • a PUCCH can be divided into a first frequency hopping part and a second frequency hopping part, and the first frequency hopping part of X symbols includes symbols, the second frequency hopping portion of the X symbols includes symbol.
  • FIG. 19 shows a flowchart of a method for transmitting an uplink control channel according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the method can be applied to a scenario of transmitting PUCCH in a Type-B manner.
  • the method may include the following step:
  • Step 1901 The terminal device receives configuration information or indication information from the network device, the configuration information or indication information is used to configure or instruct the terminal device to send the first PUCCH, the transmission length of the first PUCCH is L symbols, and the number of transmissions of the first PUCCH is is N, where N is an integer greater than or equal to 1, and L is an integer greater than or equal to 1.
  • the first PUCCH may include: UCI and DMRS; the format of the first PUCCH may be format 3 or format 4, and the value of L is any integer greater than or equal to 4 and less than or equal to 14.
  • Step 1902 The terminal device transmits the DMRS on X symbols according to the preset processing mode; the X symbols are located in the first time slot, and the X symbols are used to transmit the first PUCCH.
  • the first PUCCH needs to be transmitted across time slots, and at this time, according to a preset processing method, the DMRS is transmitted on X symbols, so as to avoid a situation that cannot be decoded.
  • the first time slot may include 14 symbols, and the first time slot may be an uplink time slot, a special time slot, or other time slot including uplink symbols, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • the terminal device transmits the first PUCCH on symbols other than X symbols based on the configuration information or the indication information.
  • the network device can measure the UCI-bearing symbols according to the DMRS of the first PUCCH. Then divide the signal received by the symbol carrying the UCI by the corresponding channel information obtained by measurement and decode it to obtain the uplink control information.
  • the X symbols do not include symbols carrying DMRS, the X symbols may have no corresponding DMRS demodulation channel, and the situation cannot be decoded.
  • the terminal device transmits the DMRS on the X symbols, thereby effectively avoiding The DMRS may be missing on the X symbols, causing the problem of inability to decode.
  • the X symbols are used to carry the DMRS to enhance the detection performance of the DMRS, thereby improving the coverage.
  • the above-mentioned terminal equipment transmitting DMRS on X symbols may include: the terminal equipment only transmits DMRS on X symbols, in other words, the terminal equipment only transmits additional DMRS through X symbols.
  • the Y symbols do not include the symbols carrying DMRS, but, In the next time slot or the previous time slot, Y symbols have corresponding DMRS demodulation, which do not belong to the X symbols in this implementation.
  • the Y symbols are the 13th and 14th symbols of the special time slot (the two symbols shown in the circle in Figure 4), since these two symbols are in the next time slot The DMRS on the 2nd symbol of is demodulated, so these Y symbols do not belong to the X symbols in this implementation.
  • the terminal device is configured to send the first PUCCH according to the configuration information or the instruction information.
  • the format of the first PUCCH is format 3 or format 4, and the X symbols of the first time slot do not include symbols that carry DMRS.
  • the terminal device can determine that the first PUCCH is not transmitted on the X symbols , this will result in wasting the resources of the X symbols.
  • the terminal device configures the X symbols with additional DMRSs, so that the terminal device configures the X symbols as symbols that carry DMRS, that is, The DMRS is transmitted in X symbols; thus, the channel measurement performance of the DMRS can be enhanced jointly by the X symbols and the DMRS on the frequency hopping part before the X symbols.
  • the terminal device configures DMRS on X symbols, as shown in Figure 20(b), the terminal device configures DMRS on the 13th and 14th symbols of the first time slot, and the network device receives the first time slot.
  • the DMRS can be used to jointly demodulate the first PUCCH at the frequency hopping position with the DMRS on the second symbol in the first slot to enhance the channel measurement performance of the DMRS.
  • the terminal device may transmit the DMRS on at least one symbol in the X symbols according to the configuration or indication information, and the frequency domain position of the at least one symbol may be the same as the frequency domain position of other symbols near the X symbols.
  • the DMRS transmitted on the at least one symbol can demodulate the information of these other symbols, thereby enhancing the channel measurement performance of the DMRS.
  • the terminal device can perform frequency hopping on X symbols transmit DMRS, where the first frequency hopping portion of the X symbols includes symbols, the second frequency hopping portion of the X symbols includes symbol.
  • the mathematical notation Indicates round down, mathematical notation Indicates rounding up, for example, X 3, then
  • the number of symbols in the first frequency hopping part and the second frequency hopping part of X symbols is rounded up or down to configure, so that the X symbols can be fully utilized to configure additional DMRS, so that the number of symbols in the first frequency hopping part and the second frequency hopping part of the X symbols can be configured by rounding up or down.
  • Other symbols in the same frequency domain position where the first frequency hopping part is located use the DMRS of the first frequency hopping part, and at the same time, other symbols in the same frequency domain position as the second frequency hopping part of the X symbols use the DMRS of the second frequency hopping part , to enhance the detection performance of DMRS and improve the coverage.
  • the first frequency hopping part of X symbols may be located before the second frequency hopping part of X symbols, and the first frequency hopping part of X symbols may also be located after the second frequency hopping part of X symbols.
  • the terminal device may enable frequency hopping on X symbols according to configuration or indication information, and according to different frequency hopping positions, the X symbols may be divided into a first frequency hopping part and a second frequency hopping part part, the first hopping part of X symbols includes symbols, the second frequency hopping portion of the X symbols includes symbol.
  • FIG. 21 is an example.
  • FIG. 21 shows a schematic diagram of a method for transmitting an uplink control channel according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 21 shows that a terminal device configures X symbols in the above-mentioned FIG. 20 in a frequency hopping manner.
  • DMRS in Figure 21 (a) and Figure 20 (b)
  • X 2
  • the first frequency hopping part of X symbols includes 1 symbol
  • the second frequency hopping part of X symbols includes 1 symbol. If the first frequency hopping part is located before the second frequency hopping part, then the 13th frequency in the first time slot symbol is the first frequency hopping part of X symbols, and the 14th symbol in the first time slot is the first frequency hopping part of X symbols.
  • the frequency domain position where the first frequency hopping part of the X symbols is located is configured to be the same as the frequency hopping part where the 1st to 5th symbols in the first time slot are located.
  • the frequency domain position where the second frequency hopping part is located is configured to be the same as the frequency hopping part where the 6th to 12th symbols in the first time slot are located; in this way, after receiving the 13th symbol in the first time slot, the network device can Use the DMRS transmitted on the symbol to demodulate the information transmitted on the 1st to 5th symbols in the first time slot. Similarly, after receiving the 14th symbol in the first time slot, the network device can use the information transmitted on the symbol. DMRS demodulates the information transmitted on symbols 6-12 in the first slot.
  • the frequency domain position where the first frequency hopping part of the X symbols is located is configured to be the same as the frequency hopping part where the 6th to 12th symbols in the first time slot are located.
  • the frequency domain position where the second frequency hopping part is located is configured to be the same as the frequency hopping part where the 1st to 5th symbols in the first time slot are located; in this way, after receiving the 13th symbol in the first time slot, the network device can Use the DMRS transmitted on the symbol to demodulate the information transmitted on the 6-12th symbol in the first time slot; similarly, after receiving the 14th symbol in the first time slot, the network device can use the information transmitted on the symbol DMRS demodulates the information transmitted on symbols 1-5 in the first time slot.
  • the terminal device when the Type-B mode is used to transmit the first PUCCH, the terminal device transmits the DMRS on X symbols, and the network device receives the symbol carrying the DMRS on the X symbols, thereby effectively avoiding the possibility of the X symbols on the
  • the lack of DMRS causes the problem of inability to decode, and at the same time, the X symbols are used to carry the DMRS to enhance the detection performance of the DMRS, thereby improving the coverage.
  • the terminal device can configure the DMRS on X symbols based on the existing PUCCH resource configuration information, so as to use the X symbols to carry the DMRS, enhance the detection performance of the DMRS, thereby improving the coverage, without affecting the existing
  • the utilization of frequency domain resources is improved.
  • FIG. 22 shows a schematic diagram of a method for transmitting an uplink control channel according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the 10,X symbols include the 11th to 14th symbols of the first time slot.
  • the first PUCCH is configured in one time slot, and the format of the first PUCCH is format 3 or format 4.
  • the terminal The DMRS is configured on the 11th to 14th symbols of a slot.
  • the terminal device can enable frequency hopping on X symbols according to the configuration or instruction information.
  • the X symbols can be divided into the first frequency hopping part and the first frequency hopping part.
  • the second frequency hopping part, the first frequency hopping part of the X symbols includes symbols, the second frequency hopping portion of the X symbols includes symbol.
  • the above-mentioned terminal equipment transmits DMRS on X symbols, which may include: the terminal equipment transmits DMRS on X symbols and some uplink symbols or idle symbols in the second time slot; wherein the first The time slot is adjacent to the second time slot.
  • the idle symbol refers to a flexible and variable symbol, that is, it can be used to transmit downlink signals or uplink signals.
  • the terminal device may determine the available symbols in the second time slot based on the existing PUCCH resource configuration information, where the available symbols refer to the uplink symbols or idle symbols of the first PUCCH that are not transmitted in the second time slot , the terminal equipment transmits the DMRS on the X symbols and some uplink symbols or idle symbols in the second time slot, thereby effectively avoiding the possible lack of DMRS on the X symbols, resulting in the problem of inability to decode.
  • resources of X symbols and some uplink symbols or idle symbols in the second time slot are fully utilized to improve resource utilization and coverage.
  • FIG. 23 shows a schematic diagram of an uplink control channel transmission method according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the 10,X symbols include the 11th to 14th symbols of the first time slot.
  • the third time slot is the same as the first time slot.
  • the next uplink time slot adjacent to the time slot, that is, the first PUCCH is configured in the third time slot, and the format of the first PUCCH is format 3 or format 4.
  • X is not fully utilized. symbols and the resources of the available symbols in the third time slot, the terminal device configures the DMRS on the 11-14th symbols of the first time slot and the 1-2th symbols of the third time slot.
  • the terminal device may enable frequency hopping on X symbols and some uplink symbols or idle symbols in the second time slot according to the configuration or indication information.
  • FIG. 24 shows a flowchart of a method for transmitting an uplink control channel according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the method can be applied to a scenario where PUCCH is transmitted in a Type-B manner.
  • the method may include the following step:
  • Step 2401 The terminal device receives configuration information or indication information from the network device, the configuration information or indication information is used to configure or instruct the terminal device to send the first PUCCH, the transmission length of the first PUCCH is L symbols, and the number of transmissions of the first PUCCH is is N, N is an integer greater than or equal to 1, and L is an integer greater than or equal to 1;
  • the first PUCCH may include: UCI and DMRS; the format of the first PUCCH may be format 3 or format 4, and the value of L is any integer greater than or equal to 4 and less than or equal to 14.
  • Step 2402 The terminal device transmits the second PUCCH on X symbols according to the preset processing mode; the X symbols are located in the first time slot, and the X symbols are used for transmitting the second PUCCH.
  • the first PUCCH needs to be transmitted across time slots, and at this time, the second PUCCH can be transmitted on X symbols according to a preset processing method, so as to avoid the situation that cannot be decoded.
  • the first time slot may include 14 symbols, and the first time slot may be an uplink time slot, a special time slot, or other time slots including uplink symbols, which are not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • the terminal device is configured or instructed to transmit the first PUCCH on symbols other than X symbols based on the configuration information or the indication information.
  • the network device may measure the value of the The channel information on the symbol bearing the UCI is divided by the corresponding channel information measured and obtained by dividing the signal received by the symbol bearing the UCI, and decoding is performed to obtain the UCI.
  • the X symbols do not include symbols bearing DMRS, the X symbols may have no corresponding DMRS demodulation channel, and the decoding cannot be performed.
  • the second PUCCH is transmitted, and the transmission of the second PUCCH will not occupy the time domain resources of the first PUCCH, that is, the first PUCCH can be normally transmitted on other symbols according to the configuration or indication information. PUCCH resources, thereby improving the utilization of frequency domain resources without affecting the PUCCH multiplexing in the existing configuration.
  • the terminal device transmits the second PUCCH only on X symbols; or, the terminal device transmits the second PUCCH on X symbols and some uplink symbols or idle symbols in the second time slot.
  • the X symbols do not include symbols carrying DMRS, the X symbols may have no corresponding DMRS demodulation channel, and the decoding cannot be performed.
  • the terminal device only transmits the second PUCCH on the X symbols, and the The second PUCCH is transmitted on X symbols, and the transmission of the second PUCCH will not occupy the time domain resources of the first PUCCH, that is, the first PUCCH can be normally transmitted on other symbols according to the configuration or indication information.
  • the configuration is configured to schedule additional PUCCH resources, so as not to affect the PUCCH multiplexing in the existing configuration, while improving the frequency domain resource utilization; or, based on the existing PUCCH resource configuration information, the terminal device can determine the available PUCCH resources in the second time slot.
  • the available symbols refer to the uplink symbols or idle symbols of the first PUCCH that are not transmitted in the second time slot, and the terminal device transmits the second PUCCH on X symbols and part of the uplink symbols or idle symbols in the second time slot, thereby It effectively avoids the problem that the DMRS may be missing on the X symbols, resulting in the problem of inability to decode. At the same time, it can make full use of the X symbols and part of the uplink symbols in the second time slot without affecting the PUCCH multiplexing in the existing configuration. Idle symbol resources, improve resource utilization, and improve coverage.
  • the format of the second PUCCH is format 3 or format 4.
  • X is greater than or equal to 4.
  • the configuration information includes the configuration information in the PUCCH config
  • the indication information includes the indication information in the downlink control information DCI
  • the second PUCCH is configured by the first resource set in the PUCCH config, and is in the downlink control information (Downlink control information, In DCI)
  • the indication information is used to indicate a PUCCH resource configuration in the first resource set.
  • the terminal device may enable or disable the second PUCCH frequency hopping; through the frequency hopping configured by the RRC, the terminal device may choose to enable or disable the second PUCCH frequency hopping.
  • the length of the second PUCCH may include L' symbols.
  • the terminal device enables frequency hopping of the second PUCCH, the first frequency hopping part includes symbols, the second frequency hopping portion of the X symbols includes symbol.
  • the mathematical notation Indicates round down, mathematical notation Indicates rounding up, for example, L' 5, then
  • the terminal device may configure the DMRS on the first frequency hopping part and the second frequency hopping part of the X symbols respectively.
  • the network device configures a first resource set in PUCCH-config, where the first resource set is an additional PUCCH resource set (additional PUCCH resource set), and the first resource set may match the position before and after the second resource set,
  • the second resource set is the configured original resource set.
  • the startingSymbolIndex of a resource in the first resource set is 10 and the length is 4.
  • the network device indicates PDSCH transmission by the DCI, it additionally indicates the resources in the first resource set, and the terminal device uses the PUCCH resources in the two resource sets (possibly including the number of repetitions, etc.).
  • FIG. 25 is an example.
  • FIG. 25 shows a schematic diagram of a method for transmitting an uplink control channel according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 25 (a) shows that when the terminal device does not enable frequency hopping, the second PUCCH is transmitted on X symbols
  • Figure 25 (b) shows that when the terminal device enables frequency hopping, in X symbols
  • the second PUCCH is transmitted.
  • the first time slot is a special time slot
  • the ratio of the first time slot is 6:4:4
  • the X symbols include the 11-14th symbols of the first time slot.
  • the terminal device transmits the second PUCCH on X symbols, specifically, the 12th symbol in the first time slot is the symbol carrying the DMRS, and the 11th and 13th-14th symbols in the first time slot are At the same time, the terminal device transmits the first PUCCH in the next time slot of the first time slot. Specifically, the 1st to 14th symbols in the next time slot of the first time slot transmit the first PUCCH.
  • a PUCCH in which, in (a) of FIG. 25, the terminal device does not enable frequency hopping on the 11th to 14th symbols of the first time slot, and in (b) of FIG. 25, the terminal device is in the first time slot. Frequency hopping is enabled on symbols 11-14 of the slot.
  • FIG. 26 shows a schematic diagram of a method for transmitting an uplink control channel according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the second time slot is the next uplink time slot adjacent to the first time slot, wherein (a) in FIG. 26 shows that the terminal device does not enable frequency hopping, The second PUCCH is transmitted on X symbols and part of uplink symbols in the second time slot.
  • Figure 26 (b) shows that when the terminal device enables frequency hopping, the part in X symbols and the second time slot The second PUCCH is transmitted on the uplink symbols.
  • the first time slot is a special time slot, the ratio of the first time slot is 6:4:4, and the X symbols include the 11-14th symbols of the first time slot.
  • the format of the first PUCCH can be format 3 or format 4
  • the thirteenth symbol in the first time slot is a symbol that carries DMRS
  • the first The 11th-12th and 14th symbols in a time slot are symbols that carry UCI
  • the 1-2 symbols in the second time slot are symbols that carry UCI.
  • the terminal equipment transmits the symbols in the second time slot.
  • a PUCCH specifically, the 3-14th symbol in the second time slot transmits the first PUCCH; in (b) of FIG. 26 , the second PUCCH includes two frequency hopping parts, and the first frequency hopping part includes the first PUCCH.
  • the 11th to 13th symbols of a time slot, the second frequency hopping part includes the 14th symbol of the first time slot and the 1st to 2nd symbols of the second time slot, wherein the 12th symbol of the first time slot is a symbol that bears DMRS, and the first symbol of the second slot is a symbol that bears DMRS.
  • FIG. 27 shows a flowchart of a method for transmitting an uplink control channel according to an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 27 , the method may include:
  • Step 2701 The terminal device receives configuration information or indication information from the network device, the configuration information or indication information is used to configure or instruct the terminal device to send the first PUCCH, the transmission length of the first PUCCH is L symbols, and the number of transmissions of the first PUCCH is is N, where N is an integer greater than or equal to 1, and L is an integer greater than or equal to 1.
  • step 601 in FIG. 6 For this step, reference may be made to step 601 in FIG. 6 , step 1201 in FIG. 12 , step 1901 in FIG. 19 , and step 2401 in FIG. 24 .
  • Step 2702 The terminal device determines X symbols according to the configuration information or indication information, the X symbols are located in the first time slot, and the X symbols are used for transmitting the first PUCCH.
  • Step 2703 When X is less than L, the terminal device determines according to preset conditions that the first PUCCH is not transmitted on X symbols, or the terminal device transmits the first PUCCH on X symbols, or the terminal device transmits the first PUCCH on X symbols. Two PUCCH, or terminal equipment transmits DMRS on X symbols.
  • step 602 in FIG. 6 For this step, reference may be made to step 602 in FIG. 6 , step 1202 in FIG. 12 , step 1902 in FIG. 19 , and step 2402 in FIG. 24 .
  • the terminal device determines not to transmit the first PUCCH on X symbols according to a preset condition, and reference may be made to FIG. 6-11 .
  • the terminal equipment can refer to Figures 25-26 for transmitting the second PUCCH on X symbols;
  • the terminal equipment can refer to Figure 19-24 for transmitting DMRS on X symbols;
  • the terminal device determines that the X symbols in the first time slot do not include symbols bearing DMRS based on the configuration information or the indication information that the transmission length of the first PUCCH is L and the number of transmissions is N. It is possible that the X symbols cannot be decoded.
  • the terminal device determines according to preset conditions that the first PUCCH is not transmitted on the X symbols, or the terminal device transmits the first PUCCH on the X symbols, or the terminal device transmits the X symbols.
  • the second PUCCH, or the terminal device transmits the DMRS on X symbols, so as to solve the problem that the first PUCCH cannot be decoded.
  • the embodiments of the present application also provide the following technical solutions, which can be applied to the communication network architecture shown in FIG. 5 .
  • the terminal device abandons the transmission of part of the symbols
  • the PUCCH symbol at one frequency domain position in the time slot only has the symbol carrying UCI, no DMRS, and the next time slot is a downlink time slot, and the terminal equipment abandons the transmission of the above symbols.
  • Judgment condition 1 Among the available symbols in a time slot, there is only a symbol carrying UCI in a frequency domain position, and there is no DMRS symbol, and there is no DMRS in the frequency domain position in the previous time slot and the next time slot.
  • Judgment condition 2 The interval between the frequency hopping part without DMRS and the next available symbol carrying DMRS exceeds X time slots, and X is greater than or equal to 1.
  • Judgment Condition 3 Define dropping length, as shown in Table 2 above, for PUCCH in PUCCH format 3/4, the number of symbols with different PUCCH lengths and with or without additional DMRS is given.
  • PUCCH length PUCCH length
  • the remaining symbols in a certain frequency hopping position in a time slot are less than or equal to the abandonment length in Table 2
  • the frequency domain position does not transmit PUCCH.
  • PUCCH may enable intra-slot frequency hopping, that is, "frequency hopping” in Table 2. Therefore, if the lengths of the two frequency hopping parts are different, the abandonment lengths may also be different, so that "frequency hopping" appears in the "frequency hopping” column. 1, 1" two values, corresponding to two frequency hopping parts respectively.
  • "0" in Table 2 represents that the length is not abandoned, that is, the transmission of the PUCCH does not need to be abandoned.
  • the proposed judgment condition for abandoning part of PUCCH transmission in Type-B transmission PUCCH effectively avoids the problem of no DMRS.
  • the terminal device if there is no DMRS on the frequency hopping portion of the time slot, the terminal device does not enable current location frequency hopping;
  • the terminal equipment does not enable frequency hopping: as shown in Figure 13 above, when it is judged that there is no DMRS on a frequency hopping part, the terminal equipment makes the frequency hopping by not enabling the frequency hopping of the frequency hopping part.
  • the last frequency hopping part and the previous frequency hopping part may be located in the same PUCCH transmission, or may not be the same PUCCH transmission.
  • the terminal equipment switches the frequency domain: the two frequency domain positions of each PUCCH transmission are switched, as shown in the above FIG. Frequency hopping transmission at each frequency domain position, and frequency hopping transmission at two frequency domain positions pos2 and pos1 respectively in the k+1th time, so that the last two symbols in the previous time slot have no DMRS in the time slot. Use the DMRS of the remaining frequency hopping parts at the same frequency domain location.
  • the solution proposed in this embodiment enables symbols without DMRS to multiplex previously transmitted DMRS symbols, thereby solving the problem of lack of DMRS.
  • the terminal device places the DMRS on the frequency hopping portion of the time slot without the DMRS;
  • the core idea is to place the DMRS on the frequency hopping part without DMRS in the time slot.
  • the effect of this is that the channel measurement performance of the DMRS can be jointly enhanced with the DMRS on the previous frequency hopping part.
  • the frequency hopping part of the PUCCH there is no DMRS in the frequency hopping part of the PUCCH, so that the frequency hopping part may not be able to be demodulated. It is a method to enhance transmission performance.
  • the DMRS is transmitted on this part, and if at least one symbol appears, the at least one DMRS is also located in the same frequency domain position, as shown in (b) of the above-mentioned FIG. 20 .
  • intra-slot hopping is configured on the PUCCH, that is, frequency hopping within the slot, in the case of N symbols (N>1)
  • the DMRS is transmitted according to frequency hopping, and the first DMRS part contains symbols
  • the second DMRS part contains symbols, as shown in Figure 21 above.
  • the technical solution of this embodiment can solve the problem of missing DMRS in the frequency hopping part when Type-B transmits PUCCH, and at the same time effectively use these symbols to carry DMRS, enhance the detection performance of DMRS, and thus improve the coverage.
  • the frequency hopping part without DMRS in the time slot is the same as the frequency domain position of the previous frequency hopping part, so as to reuse the DMRS of the previous frequency hopping part; if more than 2 frequency hopping positions are configured In the case of hopping position, the next DMRS may be located after multiple downlink time slots, so the decoding effect of the remaining symbols placed in the previous frequency hopping part is better.
  • the core idea is that the frequency hopping part without DMRS in the time slot has the same frequency domain position as the previous frequency hopping part, so that the DMRS of the previous frequency hopping part is used for demodulation.
  • next DMRS may be located after multiple downlink time slots, and even the frequency domain positions where these symbols are located have no DMRS, as shown in "Update frequency domain position" in Figure 14 above. "The situation shown earlier.
  • the remaining symbols are configured to be placed in the same frequency domain position of the previous frequency hopping part, so as to maximize the use of the DMRS of the previous frequency hopping part, thereby improving the decoding effect, that is, for frequency hopping in the time slot
  • the frequency domain position is updated to the last frequency hopping position, as shown after "Update frequency domain position" in Figure 14 above.
  • the technical solution of this embodiment updates the frequency domain positions of these symbols, so that the previously transmitted DMRS can be multiplexed; the problem of missing DMRS in the frequency hopping part when Type-B transmits PUCCH can be solved.
  • the location and content of the additional transmission symbols are determined;
  • the number of symbols is less, and the added symbols are used as extra DMRS or L-truncated symbols.
  • Core idea Determine the location and content of additional transmission symbols based on the existing PUCCH resource configuration information, and indicate additional transmission PUCCH transmission resources through indication information.
  • an L' length of PUCCH format 3/4 transmission can be added; optionally, the number of available symbols is greater than or equal to 4; among them, the frequency hopping of L' length can be selected whether to use the frequency hopping configured by RRC.
  • resources in the additional PUCCH resource set are additionally indicated, and the terminal device uses the PUCCH resources in the two resource sets (may include the number of repetitions, etc.).
  • Another implementation manner the number of symbols is small, and the DMRS symbols within the length of L are insufficient to provide, and the terminal equipment abandons the PUCCH transmission on the corresponding symbols.
  • the added extra symbols are used as additional DMRS or L-truncated symbols; the above-mentioned L-truncated PUCCH or extra DMRS may cross the slot boundary.
  • the first DMRS part contains symbols
  • the second DMRS part contains symbol
  • L* in Fig. 18 means L truncation
  • adding DMRS in Fig. 23 means L truncation
  • Another possible situation is to add additional DMRS to the above 6 symbols. If frequency hopping is not used, the above 6 symbols are located in the same frequency domain position. If frequency hopping is enabled, the first DMRS part contains symbols, the second DMRS part contains symbols, as shown in Figure 23 above.
  • the technical solution of this embodiment can solve the problem of missing DMRS in the frequency hopping part when Type-B transmits PUCCH; at the same time, additional PUCCH resources are scheduled based on the existing PUCCH configuration, so that the PUCCH multiplexing in the existing configuration is not affected, and the improved Frequency domain resource utilization.
  • FIG. 28 shows a flowchart of a method for transmitting an uplink control channel according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the method can be applied to a scenario of transmitting PUCCH in a Type-B manner.
  • the method may include the following step:
  • Step 2801 The network device sends configuration information or indication information to the terminal device, where the configuration information or indication information is used to configure or instruct the terminal device to send the first PUCCH, the transmission length of the first PUCCH is L symbols, and the transmission times of the first PUCCH is N, N is an integer greater than or equal to 1, L is an integer greater than or equal to 1; X symbols are located in the first time slot, and the X symbols are used to transmit the first PUCCH;
  • Step 2802 When X is less than L, the network device determines according to a preset condition that the first PUCCH is not received on X symbols, or the network device receives the first PUCCH on X symbols, or the network device receives the first PUCCH on X symbols. Two PUCCH, or the network device receives DMRS on X symbols.
  • the X symbols do not include symbols carrying DMRS.
  • the network device determines not to receive the first PUCCH on X symbols according to a preset condition, which may include: when the frequency domain positions where the X symbols are located are within the first time slot and the second time slot When the frequency domain positions of the symbols carrying the DMRS of X are different, the network device determines that the first PUCCH is not received on the X symbol; wherein the first time slot is adjacent to the second time slot.
  • determining that the network device does not receive the first PUCCH on X symbols according to a preset condition may include: when the interval between the X symbols and the first symbol exceeds a first threshold, the network device determines The first PUCCH is not received on X symbols; wherein, the first symbol is the first symbol that carries the DMRS after the X symbols.
  • the network device determines not to receive the first PUCCH on X symbols according to a preset condition, including: when X is less than or equal to the second threshold, the network device determines not to receive the first PUCCH on X symbols A PUCCH; wherein the second threshold is determined according to at least one of the length L, the DMRS configuration mode, the format of the first PUCCH, and the frequency hopping mode of the first PUCCH.
  • the network device determines not to receive the first PUCCH on X symbols according to a preset condition, including: when the third time slot includes downlink symbols, the network device determines not to receive on X symbols The first PUCCH; wherein the third time slot is adjacent to the first time slot and is located after the first time slot.
  • the network device receives the first PUCCH over X symbols, including:
  • the network device receives the first PUCCH on X symbols according to the frequency domain position where the previous frequency hopping part of the X symbols is located; or, the network device receives the first PUCCH on X symbols according to the frequency domain position where the second symbol is located
  • the configuration information or the indication information is further used to instruct the terminal device not to enable frequency hopping on X symbols.
  • the configuration information or the indication information is further used to instruct the terminal device to adjust the frequency domain position of the frequency hopping part where the X symbols are located to be the same as the frequency domain position of the previous frequency hopping part of the X symbols, And the frequency domain position of the next frequency hopping part of the X symbols is adjusted to be the same as the frequency domain position of the X symbols.
  • the configuration information or the indication information is further used to indicate the length of the second PUCCH.
  • the network device receiving the second PUCCH on X symbols may include: receiving the second PUCCH on X symbols and some uplink symbols or idle symbols in the second time slot; wherein, the first A time slot is adjacent to the second time slot.
  • the network device receiving the DMRS on the X symbols may include: receiving the DMRS on the X symbols and some uplink symbols or idle symbols in the second time slot; wherein the first time slot is the same as the The second time slot is adjacent.
  • the network device receiving the first PUCCH on X symbols may include: the network device receiving the first PUCCH on X symbols and some uplink symbols or idle symbols in the second time slot; wherein , the first time slot is adjacent to the second time slot.
  • the network device receives the DMRS on X symbols, which may include: the network device receives the DMRS transmitted in the frequency hopping manner on the X symbols, wherein the first frequency hopping part of the X symbols includes: symbols, the second frequency hopping portion of the X symbols includes symbol.
  • the transmission length of the first PUCCH configured or indicated by the configuration information or the indication information sent by the network device to the terminal device is L and the number of transmissions is N, so it can be determined that the X symbols in the first time slot do not include A symbol carrying a DMRS, the X symbols may not be decoded, and the network device determines according to preset conditions that the first PUCCH is not received on the X symbols, or the first PUCCH is received on the X symbols, or the X symbols are received.
  • the second PUCCH is received on the TX, or the DMRS is received on the X symbols, so as to solve the problem that the first PUCCH cannot be decoded.
  • FIG. 29 shows a schematic structural diagram of a communication device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication device includes:
  • the first module 2901 is used for a terminal device to receive configuration information or indication information from a network device, where the configuration information or indication information is used to configure or instruct the terminal device to send a first PUCCH, and the transmission length of the first PUCCH is L symbols,
  • the number of times of transmission of the first PUCCH is N, where N is an integer greater than or equal to 1, and L is an integer greater than or equal to 1;
  • the second module 2901 is used for the terminal device to determine X symbols according to the configuration information or the indication information, where the X symbols are located in the first time slot, and the X symbols are used to transmit the first PUCCH;
  • the second module 2901 is further configured to, when X is less than L, the terminal device determines not to transmit the first PUCCH on the X symbols according to a preset condition, or the terminal device transmits the first PUCCH on the X symbols, or the terminal device transmits the first PUCCH on the X symbols.
  • the second PUCCH is transmitted on X symbols, or the terminal device transmits DMRS on X symbols.
  • the X symbols do not include symbols carrying DMRS.
  • the second module is further configured to: when the frequency domain positions where the X symbols are located are different from the frequency domain positions where the DMRS-bearing symbols in the first time slot and the second time slot are located, The terminal device determines not to transmit the first PUCCH on the X symbol; wherein the first time slot is adjacent to the second time slot.
  • the second module is further configured to: when the interval between the X symbols and the first symbol exceeds a first threshold, the terminal device determines not to transmit the first PUCCH on the X symbols;
  • the first symbol is the first symbol that carries the DMRS after the X symbols.
  • the second module is further configured to: when X is less than or equal to the second threshold, the terminal device determines not to transmit the first PUCCH on the X symbols; wherein the second threshold is based on the length L, At least one of the DMRS configuration mode, the format of the first PUCCH, and the frequency hopping mode of the first PUCCH is determined.
  • the second module is further configured to: when the third time slot includes downlink symbols, the terminal device determines not to transmit the first PUCCH on X symbols; wherein the third time slot is the same as the first PUCCH. A slot is adjacent and after the first slot.
  • the second module is further configured to: the terminal device transmits the first PUCCH on the X symbols according to the frequency domain position where the previous frequency hopping part of the X symbols is located; At the frequency domain position where the second symbol is located, the first PUCCH is transmitted on X symbols; wherein the second symbol is adjacent to the X symbols, or the second symbol and the X symbols are spaced within 14 symbols.
  • the second module is further configured to: the terminal device does not enable frequency hopping on X symbols.
  • the second module is further configured to: the terminal device adjusts the frequency domain position of the frequency hopping part where the X symbols are located to be the same as the frequency domain position of the previous frequency hopping part of the X symbols, and Adjust the frequency domain position of the next frequency hopping part of X symbols to be the same as the frequency domain position of X symbols.
  • the second module is further configured to, when the terminal device transmits the second PUCCH on X symbols, the configuration information or the indication information is further configured to indicate the length of the second PUCCH.
  • the second module is further configured to: the terminal device transmits the second PUCCH only on X symbols, or the terminal device transmits the second PUCCH on X symbols and part of uplink symbols or idle in the second time slot A second PUCCH is transmitted on the symbol; wherein the first slot is adjacent to the second slot.
  • the second module is further configured to: the terminal device transmits the DMRS only on X symbols, or the terminal device transmits the DMRS in the X symbols and part of the uplink symbols in the second time slot or is idle The DMRS is transmitted on the symbol; wherein the first time slot is adjacent to the second time slot.
  • the second module is further configured to: the terminal device transmits the first PUCCH on X symbols and some uplink symbols or idle symbols in the second time slot; The two time slots are adjacent.
  • the second module is further configured to: the terminal device transmits the DMRS in a frequency hopping manner over X symbols, wherein the first frequency hopping part of the X symbols includes symbols, the second frequency hopping portion of the X symbols includes symbol.
  • the terminal device determines that the X symbols in the first time slot do not include symbols bearing DMRS, based on the configuration information or the indication information that the transmission length of the first PUCCH is L and the number of transmissions is N. There is a possibility that the number of symbols cannot be decoded.
  • the terminal device determines according to preset conditions that the first PUCCH is not transmitted on the X symbols, or the terminal device transmits the first PUCCH on the X symbols, or the terminal device transmits the first PUCCH on the X symbols. Two PUCCHs, or the terminal device transmits DMRS on X symbols, so as to solve the problem that the first PUCCH cannot be decoded.
  • FIG. 30 shows a schematic structural diagram of a communication device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication device includes:
  • the third module 3001 is used for the network device to send configuration information or indication information to the terminal device, the configuration information or indication information is used to configure or instruct the terminal device to send the first PUCCH, the transmission length of the first PUCCH is L symbols, and the first PUCCH The number of times of transmission is N, where N is an integer greater than or equal to 1, and L is an integer greater than or equal to 1; X symbols are located in the first time slot, and X symbols are used to transmit the first PUCCH;
  • the fourth module 3002 is configured to, when X is less than L, the network device determines according to a preset condition that the first PUCCH is not received on the X symbols, or the network device receives the first PUCCH on the X symbols, or the network device receives the first PUCCH on the X symbols.
  • the second PUCCH is received on the symbol, or the network device receives the DMRS on X symbols.
  • the X symbols do not include symbols carrying DMRS.
  • the fourth module is further configured to: when the frequency domain positions where the X symbols are located are different from the frequency domain positions where the DMRS-bearing symbols in the first time slot and the second time slot are located, The network device determines that the first PUCCH is not received on the X symbol; wherein the first time slot is adjacent to the second time slot.
  • the fourth module is further configured to: when the interval between the X symbols and the first symbol exceeds a first threshold, the network device determines not to receive the first PUCCH on the X symbols; wherein, The first symbol is the first DMRS-bearing symbol located after the X symbols.
  • the fourth module is further configured to: when X is less than or equal to a second threshold, the network device determines not to receive the first PUCCH over X symbols; wherein the second threshold is based on the length L, at least one of the DMRS configuration mode, the format of the first PUCCH, and the frequency hopping mode of the first PUCCH is determined.
  • the fourth module is further configured to: when the third time slot includes downlink symbols, the network device determines not to receive the first PUCCH on X symbols; wherein the third time slot is the same as the first PUCCH. A slot is adjacent and after the first slot.
  • the fourth module is further configured to: the network device receives the first PUCCH on the X symbols according to the frequency domain position where the previous frequency hopping part of the X symbols is located; At the frequency domain position where the second symbol is located, the first PUCCH is received on X symbols; wherein the second symbol is adjacent to the X symbols, or the second symbol and the X symbols are spaced within 14 symbols.
  • the configuration information or the indication information is further used to instruct the terminal device not to enable frequency hopping on X symbols.
  • the configuration information or the indication information is further used to instruct the terminal device to adjust the frequency domain position of the frequency hopping part where the X symbols are located to be the same as the frequency domain position of the previous frequency hopping part of the X symbols, And the frequency domain position of the next frequency hopping part of the X symbols is adjusted to be the same as the frequency domain position of the X symbols.
  • the fourth module is further configured to, when the network device receives the second PUCCH on X symbols, the configuration information or the indication information is further configured to indicate the length of the second PUCCH.
  • the fourth module is further configured to: receive the second PUCCH on X symbols and some uplink symbols or idle symbols in the second time slot; gaps are adjacent.
  • the fourth module is further configured to: receive the DMRS on X symbols and some uplink symbols or idle symbols in the second time slot; wherein the first time slot is the same as the second time slot adjacent.
  • the fourth module is further configured to: the network device receives the first PUCCH on X symbols and some uplink symbols or idle symbols in the second time slot; The two time slots are adjacent.
  • the fourth module is further configured to: the network device receives the DMRS transmitted in the frequency hopping manner on the X symbols, wherein the first frequency hopping part of the X symbols includes symbols, the second frequency hopping portion of the X symbols includes symbol.
  • the transmission length of the first PUCCH configured or indicated by the configuration information or the indication information sent by the network device to the terminal device is L and the number of transmissions is N, so it can be determined that the X symbols in the first time slot do not include A symbol carrying a DMRS, the X symbols may not be decoded, and the network device determines according to preset conditions that the first PUCCH is not received on the X symbols, or the first PUCCH is received on the X symbols, or the X symbols are received.
  • the second PUCCH is received on the TX, or the DMRS is received on the X symbols, so as to solve the problem that the first PUCCH cannot be decoded.
  • FIG. 31 shows a schematic structural diagram of a communication device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication device may include: at least one processor 3101 , a communication line 3102 , a memory 3103 and at least one communication interface 3104 .
  • the processor 3101 may be a general-purpose central processing unit (CPU), a microprocessor, an application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC), or one or more processors for controlling the execution of the programs of the present application. integrated circuit.
  • CPU central processing unit
  • ASIC application-specific integrated circuit
  • Communication line 3102 may include a path to communicate information between the components described above.
  • the communication interface 3104 using any transceiver-like device, is used to communicate with other devices or communication networks, such as Ethernet, RAN, wireless local area networks (WLAN), and the like.
  • devices or communication networks such as Ethernet, RAN, wireless local area networks (WLAN), and the like.
  • Memory 3103 may be read-only memory (ROM) or other types of static storage devices that can store static information and instructions, random access memory (RAM) or other types of information and instructions It can also be an electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (EEPROM), a compact disc read-only memory (CD-ROM) or other optical disk storage, CD-ROM storage (including compact discs, laser discs, optical discs, digital versatile discs, Blu-ray discs, etc.), magnetic disk storage media or other magnetic storage devices, or capable of carrying or storing desired program code in the form of instructions or data structures and capable of being executed by a computer Access any other medium without limitation.
  • the memory may exist independently and be connected to the processor through communication line 3102. The memory can also be integrated with the processor.
  • the memory provided by the embodiments of the present application may generally be non-volatile.
  • the memory 3103 is used for storing computer-executed instructions for executing the solution of the present application, and the execution is controlled by the processor 3101 .
  • the processor 3101 is configured to execute the computer-executed instructions stored in the memory 3103, thereby implementing the methods provided in the foregoing embodiments of the present application.
  • the computer-executed instructions in the embodiment of the present application may also be referred to as application code, which is not specifically limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the processor 3101 may include one or more CPUs, such as CPU0 and CPU1 in FIG. 31 .
  • the communication apparatus may include multiple processors, for example, the processor 3101 and the processor 3107 in FIG. 31 .
  • processors can be a single-core (single-CPU) processor or a multi-core (multi-CPU) processor.
  • a processor herein may refer to one or more devices, circuits, and/or processing cores for processing data (eg, computer program instructions).
  • the communication apparatus may further include an output device 3105 and an input device 3106 .
  • the output device 3105 is in communication with the processor 3101 and can display information in a variety of ways.
  • the output device 3105 may be a liquid crystal display (LCD), a light emitting diode (LED) display device, a cathode ray tube (CRT) display device, or a projector (projector) Wait.
  • Input device 3106 is in communication with processor 3101 and can receive user input in a variety of ways.
  • the input device 3106 may be a mouse, a keyboard, a touch screen device, a sensor device, or the like.
  • the first module 2901 in FIG. 29 may be implemented by the communication interface 3104 in FIG. 31
  • the second module 2901 in FIG. 29 may be implemented by the processor 3101 in FIG. 31 This is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • the third module 3001 in FIG. 30 may be implemented by the communication interface 3104 in FIG. 31
  • the fourth module 3002 in FIG. 31 may be implemented by the processor 3101 in FIG. 31 This is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 32 shows a schematic structural diagram of a chip according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the chip shown in FIG. 32 may be a general-purpose processor or a special-purpose processor.
  • the chip includes processor 3201 .
  • the processor 3201 is configured to support the communication device to execute the technical solutions shown in FIG. 6 , FIG. 12 , FIG. 19 , FIG. 24 , FIG. 27 or FIG. 28 .
  • the chip further includes a transceiver 3202, and the transceiver 3202 is configured to accept the control of the processor 3201 and to support the communication device to perform the above technical solution. 24. The method shown in FIG. 27 or FIG. 28 .
  • the chip shown in FIG. 32 may further include: a storage medium 3203 .
  • the chip shown in FIG. 32 can be implemented using the following circuits or devices: one or more field programmable gate arrays (FPGA), programmable logic devices (PLDs) , controllers, state machines, gate logic, discrete hardware components, any other suitable circuits, or any combination of circuits capable of performing the various functions described throughout this application.
  • FPGA field programmable gate arrays
  • PLDs programmable logic devices
  • controllers state machines
  • gate logic discrete hardware components
  • discrete hardware components any other suitable circuits, or any combination of circuits capable of performing the various functions described throughout this application.
  • Embodiments of the present application provide a non-volatile computer-readable storage medium on which computer program instructions are stored, and when the computer program instructions are executed by a processor, the foregoing technical solutions are implemented.
  • FIG. 6 can be executed. , FIG. 12 , FIG. 19 , FIG. 24 , FIG. 27 or the method shown in FIG. 28 .
  • Embodiments of the present application provide a computer program product, including computer-readable codes, or a non-volatile computer-readable storage medium carrying computer-readable codes, when the computer-readable codes are stored in a processor of an electronic device
  • the processor in the electronic device executes the above technical solution, and exemplarily, the method shown in FIG. 6 , FIG. 12 , FIG. 19 , FIG. 24 , FIG. 27 or FIG. 28 may be executed.
  • a computer-readable storage medium may be a tangible device that can hold and store instructions for use by the instruction execution device.
  • the computer-readable storage medium may be, for example, but not limited to, an electrical storage device, a magnetic storage device, an optical storage device, an electromagnetic storage device, a semiconductor storage device, or any suitable combination of the foregoing.
  • Computer-readable storage media include: portable computer disks, hard disks, random access memory (RAM), read only memory (ROM), erasable programmable read-only memory (Electrically Programmable Read-Only-Memory, EPROM or flash memory), static random access memory (Static Random-Access Memory, SRAM), portable compact disk read-only memory (Compact Disc Read-Only Memory, CD - ROM), Digital Video Disc (DVD), memory sticks, floppy disks, mechanically encoded devices, such as punch cards or raised structures in grooves on which instructions are stored, and any suitable combination of the foregoing .
  • RAM random access memory
  • ROM read only memory
  • EPROM erasable programmable read-only memory
  • EPROM Errically Programmable Read-Only-Memory
  • SRAM static random access memory
  • portable compact disk read-only memory Compact Disc Read-Only Memory
  • CD - ROM Compact Disc Read-Only Memory
  • DVD Digital Video Disc
  • memory sticks floppy disks
  • the computer readable program instructions or code described herein may be downloaded to various computing/processing devices from a computer readable storage medium, or to an external computer or external storage device over a network such as the Internet, a local area network, a wide area network and/or a wireless network.
  • the network may include copper transmission cables, fiber optic transmission, wireless transmission, routers, firewalls, switches, gateway computers, and/or edge servers.
  • a network adapter card or network interface in each computing/processing device receives computer-readable program instructions from a network and forwards the computer-readable program instructions for storage in a computer-readable storage medium in each computing/processing device .
  • the computer program instructions used to perform the operations of the present application may be assembly instructions, Instruction Set Architecture (ISA) instructions, machine instructions, machine-related instructions, microcode, firmware instructions, state setting data, or in one or more source or object code written in any combination of programming languages, including object-oriented programming languages such as Smalltalk, C++, etc., and conventional procedural programming languages such as the "C" language or similar programming languages.
  • the computer readable program instructions may execute entirely on the user's computer, partly on the user's computer, as a stand-alone software package, partly on the user's computer and partly on a remote computer, or entirely on the remote computer or server implement.
  • the remote computer may be connected to the user's computer through any kind of network—including a Local Area Network (LAN) or a Wide Area Network (WAN)—or, may be connected to an external computer (eg, use an internet service provider to connect via the internet).
  • electronic circuits such as programmable logic circuits, Field-Programmable Gate Arrays (FPGA), or Programmable Logic Arrays (Programmable Logic Arrays), are personalized by utilizing state information of computer-readable program instructions.
  • Logic Array, PLA the electronic circuit can execute computer readable program instructions to implement various aspects of the present application.
  • These computer readable program instructions may be provided to a processor of a general purpose computer, special purpose computer or other programmable data processing apparatus to produce a machine that causes the instructions when executed by the processor of the computer or other programmable data processing apparatus , resulting in means for implementing the functions/acts specified in one or more blocks of the flowchart and/or block diagrams.
  • These computer readable program instructions can also be stored in a computer readable storage medium, these instructions cause a computer, programmable data processing apparatus and/or other equipment to operate in a specific manner, so that the computer readable medium on which the instructions are stored includes An article of manufacture comprising instructions for implementing various aspects of the functions/acts specified in one or more blocks of the flowchart and/or block diagrams.
  • Computer readable program instructions can also be loaded onto a computer, other programmable data processing apparatus, or other equipment to cause a series of operational steps to be performed on the computer, other programmable data processing apparatus, or other equipment to produce a computer-implemented process , thereby causing instructions executing on a computer, other programmable data processing apparatus, or other device to implement the functions/acts specified in one or more blocks of the flowcharts and/or block diagrams.
  • Embodiment 1 a method for transmitting an uplink control channel PUCCH, wherein the method includes:
  • the terminal device receives configuration information or indication information from the network device, the configuration information or indication information is used to configure or instruct the terminal device to send the first PUCCH, the transmission length of the first PUCCH is L symbols, and the first PUCCH is L symbols.
  • the number of times of transmission of a PUCCH is N, where N is an integer greater than or equal to 1, and L is an integer greater than or equal to 1;
  • the terminal device determines X symbols according to the configuration information or the indication information, the X symbols are located in the first time slot, and the X symbols are used to transmit the first PUCCH;
  • the terminal device determines not to transmit the first PUCCH on the X symbols according to a preset condition, or the terminal device transmits the first PUCCH on the X symbols, or The terminal device transmits the second PUCCH on the X symbols, or the terminal device transmits the DMRS on the X symbols.
  • Embodiment 2 The method according to Embodiment 1, wherein the X symbols do not include symbols carrying DMRS.
  • Embodiment 3 The method according to Embodiment 1 or Embodiment 2, wherein the terminal device determines not to transmit the first PUCCH on the X symbols according to a preset condition, comprising:
  • the terminal device determines that the X symbol is located on the X symbol not transmitting the first PUCCH;
  • the first time slot is adjacent to the second time slot.
  • Embodiment 4 The method according to any one of Embodiments 1 to 3, wherein the terminal device determines not to transmit the first PUCCH on the X symbols according to a preset condition, comprising:
  • the terminal device determines not to transmit the first PUCCH on the X symbols;
  • the first symbol is the first symbol that bears DMRS after the X symbols.
  • Embodiment 5 The method according to any one of Embodiments 1 to 4, wherein the terminal device determines not to transmit the first PUCCH on the X symbols according to a preset condition, comprising:
  • the terminal device determines not to transmit the first PUCCH on the X symbols;
  • the second threshold is determined according to at least one of the length L, a DMRS configuration mode, a format of the first PUCCH, and a frequency hopping mode of the first PUCCH.
  • Embodiment 6 The method according to any one of Embodiments 1 to 5, wherein the terminal device determines not to transmit the first PUCCH on the X symbols according to a preset condition, comprising:
  • the terminal device determines not to transmit the first PUCCH on the X symbols;
  • the third time slot is adjacent to the first time slot and is located after the first time slot.
  • Embodiment 7 The method according to any one of Embodiments 1 to 6, wherein the terminal device transmits the first PUCCH on the X symbols, comprising:
  • the terminal device transmits the first PUCCH on the X symbols according to the frequency domain position where the previous frequency hopping part of the X symbols is located;
  • the terminal device transmits the first PUCCH on the X symbols according to the frequency domain position where the second symbol is located; wherein the second symbol is adjacent to the X symbols, or the first PUCCH Two symbols are spaced within 14 symbols from the X symbols.
  • Embodiment 8 The method according to any one of Embodiments 1 to 7, wherein, according to the frequency domain position where the previous frequency hopping part of the X symbols is located, the terminal device The first PUCCH is transmitted over symbols, including:
  • the terminal device does not enable frequency hopping on the X symbols.
  • Embodiment 9 The method according to any one of Embodiments 1 to 8, wherein, according to the frequency domain location where the previous frequency hopping part of the X symbols is located, the terminal device The first PUCCH is transmitted over symbols, including:
  • the terminal device adjusts the frequency domain position of the frequency hopping part where the X symbols are located to be the same as the frequency domain position of the previous frequency hopping part of the X symbols, and adjusts the frequency hopping part of the X symbols to the next frequency hopping part.
  • the frequency domain positions of the parts are adjusted to be the same as the frequency domain positions of the X symbols.
  • Embodiment 10 The method according to any one of Embodiments 1 to 9, wherein when the terminal device transmits the second PUCCH on the X symbols, the configuration information or indication The information is also used to indicate the length of the second PUCCH.
  • Embodiment 11 The method according to any one of Embodiments 1 to 10, wherein the terminal device transmits the second PUCCH on the X symbols, comprising:
  • the terminal device transmits the second PUCCH only on X symbols, or the terminal device transmits the second PUCCH on the X symbols and some uplink symbols or idle symbols in the second time slot;
  • the first time slot is adjacent to the second time slot.
  • Embodiment 12 The method according to any one of Embodiments 1 to 11, wherein the terminal device transmits the DMRS on the X symbols, comprising:
  • the terminal device transmits the DMRS only on X symbols, or the terminal device transmits the DMRS on the X symbols and some uplink symbols or idle symbols in the second time slot;
  • the first time slot is adjacent to the second time slot.
  • Embodiment 13 The method according to any one of Embodiments 1 to 12, wherein the terminal device transmits the first PUCCH on the X symbols, comprising:
  • the first time slot is adjacent to the second time slot.
  • Embodiment 14 The method according to any one of Embodiments 1 to 13, wherein the terminal device transmits the DMRS on the X symbols, comprising:
  • the terminal device transmits the DMRS in a frequency hopping manner over the X symbols, wherein the first frequency hopping part of the X symbols includes symbols, the second frequency hopping portion of the X symbols includes symbol.
  • Embodiment 15 A method for transmitting an uplink control channel PUCCH, wherein the method comprises:
  • the network device sends configuration information or indication information to the terminal device, where the configuration information or indication information is used to configure or instruct the terminal device to send the first PUCCH, the transmission length of the first PUCCH is L symbols, and the first PUCCH is L symbols.
  • the number of times of PUCCH transmission is N, where N is an integer greater than or equal to 1, and L is an integer greater than or equal to 1; X symbols are located in the first time slot, and the X symbols are used to transmit the first PUCCH;
  • the network device determines not to receive the first PUCCH on the X symbols according to a preset condition, or the network device receives the first PUCCH on the X symbols, or The network device receives the second PUCCH on the X symbols, or the network device receives the DMRS on the X symbols.
  • Embodiment 16 The method of Embodiment 15, wherein the X symbols do not include symbols carrying DMRS.
  • Embodiment 17 The method according to Embodiment 15 or Embodiment 16, wherein the network device determines not to receive the first PUCCH on the X symbols according to a preset condition, comprising:
  • the network device determines that the X symbol is located on the X symbol not receiving the first PUCCH;
  • the first time slot is adjacent to the second time slot.
  • Embodiment 18 The method according to any one of Embodiments 15 to 17, wherein the network device determines not to receive the first PUCCH on the X symbols according to a preset condition, comprising:
  • the network device determines that the first PUCCH is not received on the X symbols;
  • the first symbol is the first symbol that bears DMRS after the X symbols.
  • Embodiment 19 The method according to any one of Embodiments 15 to 18, wherein the network device determines not to receive the first PUCCH on the X symbols according to a preset condition, comprising:
  • the network device determines not to receive the first PUCCH on the X symbols;
  • the second threshold is determined according to at least one of the length L, a DMRS configuration mode, a format of the first PUCCH, and a frequency hopping mode of the first PUCCH.
  • Embodiment 20 The method according to any one of Embodiments 15 to 19, wherein the network device determines not to receive the first PUCCH on the X symbols according to a preset condition, comprising:
  • the network device determines that the first PUCCH is not received on the X symbols;
  • the third time slot is adjacent to the first time slot and is located after the first time slot.
  • Embodiment 21 The method according to any one of Embodiments 15 to 20, wherein the network device receives the first PUCCH on the X symbols, comprising:
  • the network device receives the first PUCCH on the X symbols according to the frequency domain position where the second symbol is located; wherein the second symbol is adjacent to the X symbols, or the first PUCCH is Two symbols are spaced within 14 symbols from the X symbols.
  • Embodiment 22 The method according to any one of Embodiments 15 to 21, wherein the configuration information or the indication information is further used to instruct the terminal device not to enable jumping on the X symbols. frequency.
  • Embodiment 23 The method according to any one of Embodiment 15 to Embodiment 23, wherein the configuration information or the indication information is further used to instruct the terminal device to convert the frequency hopping part where the X symbols are located.
  • the frequency domain position is adjusted to be the same as the frequency domain position of the previous frequency hopping part of the X symbols, and the frequency domain position of the next frequency hopping part of the X symbols is adjusted to be the same as the frequency domain position of the X symbols.
  • the domain location is the same.
  • Embodiment 24 The method according to any one of Embodiments 15 to 23, wherein when the network device receives the second PUCCH on the X symbols, the configuration information or the indication information is further Used to indicate the length of the second PUCCH.
  • Embodiment 25 The method according to any one of Embodiments 15 to 24, wherein the network device receives the second PUCCH on the X symbols, comprising:
  • the first time slot is adjacent to the second time slot.
  • Embodiment 26 The method according to any one of Embodiments 15 to 25, wherein the network device receives the DMRS on the X symbols, comprising:
  • the first time slot is adjacent to the second time slot.
  • Embodiment 27 The method according to any one of Embodiments 15 to 26, wherein the network device receiving the first PUCCH on the X symbols includes:
  • the first time slot is adjacent to the second time slot.
  • Embodiment 28 The method according to any one of Embodiments 15 to 27, wherein the network device receives the DMRS on the X symbols, comprising:
  • the network device receives the DMRS transmitted in a frequency hopping manner on the X symbols, wherein the first frequency hopping part of the X symbols includes symbols, the second frequency hopping portion of the X symbols includes symbol.
  • Embodiment 29 a communication device, wherein the device comprises:
  • the first module is used for a terminal device to receive configuration information or indication information from a network device, where the configuration information or indication information is used to configure or instruct the terminal device to send a first PUCCH, and the transmission length of the first PUCCH is L symbols, the number of times of transmission of the first PUCCH is N, N is an integer greater than or equal to 1, and L is an integer greater than or equal to 1;
  • a second module configured for the terminal device to determine X symbols according to the configuration information or the indication information, the X symbols are located in the first time slot, and the X symbols are used to transmit the first PUCCH;
  • the second module is further configured to, when X is less than L, determine, according to a preset condition, that the terminal device does not transmit the first PUCCH on the X symbols, or the terminal device transmits the first PUCCH on the X symbols.
  • Embodiment 30 The apparatus of Embodiment 29, wherein the X symbols do not include symbols carrying DMRS.
  • Embodiment 31 The apparatus according to Embodiment 29 or Embodiment 30, wherein the second module is further configured to:
  • the terminal device determines that the X symbol is located on the X symbol not transmitting the first PUCCH;
  • the first time slot is adjacent to the second time slot.
  • Embodiment 32 The apparatus according to any one of Embodiments 29 to 31, wherein the second module is further configured to:
  • the terminal device determines not to transmit the first PUCCH on the X symbols;
  • the first symbol is the first symbol that bears DMRS after the X symbols.
  • Embodiment 33 The apparatus according to any one of Embodiments 29 to 32, wherein the second module is further configured to:
  • the terminal device determines not to transmit the first PUCCH on the X symbols;
  • the second threshold is determined according to at least one of the length L, a DMRS configuration mode, a format of the first PUCCH, and a frequency hopping mode of the first PUCCH.
  • Embodiment 34 The apparatus according to any one of Embodiment 29 to Embodiment 33, wherein the second module is further configured to: when the third time slot includes downlink symbols, the terminal device determines not transmitting the first PUCCH on the X symbols;
  • the third time slot is adjacent to the first time slot and is located after the first time slot.
  • Embodiment 35 The apparatus according to any one of Embodiments 29 to 34, wherein the second module is further configured to: the terminal device hops according to the previous frequency of the X symbols The frequency domain position where the part is located, and the first PUCCH is transmitted on the X symbols;
  • the terminal device transmits the first PUCCH on the X symbols according to the frequency domain position where the second symbol is located; wherein the second symbol is adjacent to the X symbols, or the first PUCCH Two symbols are spaced within 14 symbols from the X symbols.
  • Embodiment 36 The apparatus according to any one of Embodiments 29 to 35, wherein the second module is further configured to: the terminal device does not enable frequency hopping on the X symbols .
  • Embodiment 37 The apparatus according to any one of Embodiment 29 to Embodiment 36, wherein the second module is further configured to: the terminal device converts the frequency of the frequency hopping part where the X symbols are located. The domain position is adjusted to be the same as the frequency domain position of the previous frequency hopping part of the X symbols, and the frequency domain position of the next frequency hopping part of the X symbols is adjusted to be the same as the frequency domain position of the X symbols Same location.
  • Embodiment 38 The apparatus according to any one of Embodiment 29 to Embodiment 37, wherein, when the second module is used for the terminal device to transmit the second PUCCH on the X symbols, The configuration information or the indication information is also used to indicate the length of the second PUCCH.
  • Embodiment 39 The apparatus according to any one of Embodiments 29 to 38, wherein the second module is further configured to:
  • the terminal device transmits the second PUCCH only on X symbols, or the terminal device transmits the second PUCCH on the X symbols and some uplink symbols or idle symbols in the second time slot;
  • the first time slot is adjacent to the second time slot.
  • Embodiment 40 The apparatus according to any one of Embodiments 29 to 39, wherein the second module is further configured to: the terminal device transmits the DMRS only on X symbols, or, The terminal device transmits the DMRS on the X symbols and part of the uplink symbols or idle symbols in the second time slot;
  • the first time slot is adjacent to the second time slot.
  • Embodiment 41 The apparatus according to any one of Embodiments 29 to 20, wherein the second module is further configured to: the terminal equipment is in the X symbols and the second time slot The first PUCCH is transmitted on part of the uplink symbols or idle symbols;
  • the first time slot is adjacent to the second time slot.
  • Embodiment 42 The apparatus according to any one of Embodiment 29 to Embodiment 41, wherein the second module is further configured to: the terminal equipment transmits in a frequency hopping manner on the X symbols DMRS, wherein the first frequency hopping portion of the X symbols includes symbols, the second frequency hopping portion of the X symbols includes symbol.
  • Embodiment 43 A communication device, wherein the device comprises:
  • the third module is used for the network device to send configuration information or indication information to the terminal device, where the configuration information or indication information is used to configure or instruct the terminal device to send the first PUCCH, and the transmission length of the first PUCCH is L symbol, the number of times of transmission of the first PUCCH is N, N is an integer greater than or equal to 1, and L is an integer greater than or equal to 1; X symbols are located in the first time slot, and the X symbols are used for transmitting all the first PUCCH;
  • the fourth module is configured to, when X is less than L, determine, according to a preset condition, that the network device does not receive the first PUCCH on the X symbols, or the network device receives the first PUCCH on the X symbols. the first PUCCH, or the network device receives the second PUCCH on the X symbols, or the network device receives the DMRS on the X symbols.
  • Embodiment 44 The apparatus of Embodiment 43, wherein the X symbols do not include symbols carrying DMRS.
  • Embodiment 45 The apparatus according to Embodiment 43 or Embodiment 44, wherein the fourth module is further configured to:
  • the network device determines that the X symbol is located on the X symbol not receiving the first PUCCH;
  • the first time slot is adjacent to the second time slot.
  • Embodiment 46 The apparatus according to any one of Embodiment 43 to Embodiment 45, wherein the fourth module is further configured to:
  • the network device determines that the first PUCCH is not received on the X symbols;
  • the first symbol is the first symbol that bears DMRS after the X symbols.
  • Embodiment 47 The apparatus according to any one of Embodiment 43 to Embodiment 46, wherein the fourth module is further configured to: when the X is less than or equal to a second threshold, the network device determining that the first PUCCH is not received on the X symbols;
  • the second threshold is determined according to at least one of the length L, a DMRS configuration mode, a format of the first PUCCH, and a frequency hopping mode of the first PUCCH.
  • Embodiment 48 The apparatus according to any one of Embodiment 43 to Embodiment 47, wherein the fourth module is further configured to: when the third time slot includes downlink symbols, the network device determines not receiving the first PUCCH on the X symbols;
  • the third time slot is adjacent to the first time slot and is located after the first time slot.
  • Embodiment 49 The apparatus according to any one of Embodiment 43 to Embodiment 48, wherein the fourth module is further configured to: the network device hops according to the previous frequency of the X symbols The frequency domain position where the part is located, and the first PUCCH is received on the X symbols;
  • the network device receives the first PUCCH on the X symbols according to the frequency domain position where the second symbol is located; wherein the second symbol is adjacent to the X symbols, or the first PUCCH is Two symbols are spaced within 14 symbols from the X symbols.
  • Embodiment 50 The apparatus according to any one of Embodiment 43 to Embodiment 49, wherein the configuration information or the indication information is further used to instruct the terminal device not to enable hopping on the X symbols frequency.
  • Embodiment 51 The apparatus according to any one of Embodiments 43 to 50, wherein the configuration information or the indication information is further used to instruct the terminal device to use the frequency hopping part where the X symbols are located.
  • the frequency domain position is adjusted to be the same as the frequency domain position of the previous frequency hopping part of the X symbols, and the frequency domain position of the next frequency hopping part of the X symbols is adjusted to be the same as the frequency domain position of the X symbols.
  • the domain location is the same.
  • Embodiment 52 The apparatus according to any one of Embodiment 43 to Embodiment 51, wherein, when the fourth module is used for the network device to receive the second PUCCH on the X symbols, The configuration information or the indication information is also used to indicate the length of the second PUCCH.
  • Embodiment 53 The apparatus according to any one of Embodiment 43 to Embodiment 52, wherein the network device receives the second PUCCH on the X symbols, comprising:
  • the first time slot is adjacent to the second time slot.
  • Embodiment 54 The apparatus according to any one of Embodiments 43 to 53, wherein the network device receives the DMRS on the X symbols, comprising:
  • the first time slot is adjacent to the second time slot.
  • Embodiment 55 The apparatus according to any one of Embodiments 43 to 54, wherein the network device receives the first PUCCH on the X symbols, comprising:
  • the first time slot is adjacent to the second time slot.
  • Embodiment 56 The apparatus according to any one of Embodiments 43 to 55, wherein the network device receives the DMRS on the X symbols, comprising:
  • the network device receives the DMRS transmitted in a frequency hopping manner on the X symbols, wherein the first frequency hopping part of the X symbols includes symbols, the second frequency hopping portion of the X symbols includes symbol.
  • a communication device comprising:
  • memory for storing processor-executable instructions
  • the processor is configured to implement the method described in any one of Embodiments 1 to 14 when executing the instructions.
  • Embodiment 58 A non-volatile computer-readable storage medium, wherein the computer-readable storage medium includes computer instructions that, when executed on a computer, cause the computer to perform the steps of Embodiments 1 to 1. The method of any one of Embodiments 14.
  • Embodiment 59 A chip, comprising a processor, when the processor executes an instruction, the processor executes the method described in any one of Embodiments 1 to 14.
  • Embodiment 60 A computer program product comprising instructions, which, when run on a computer, cause the computer to perform the method of any one of embodiments 1 to 14.
  • a communication device comprising:
  • memory for storing processor-executable instructions
  • the processor is configured to implement the method described in any one of Embodiments 15 to 28 when executing the instructions.
  • Embodiment 62 A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium, wherein the computer-readable storage medium includes computer instructions that, when executed on a computer, cause the computer to perform as in Embodiments 15 to 15 The method of any one of Embodiments 28.
  • Embodiment 63 A chip, comprising a processor, when the processor executes an instruction, the processor executes the method according to any one of Embodiments 15 to 28.
  • Embodiment 64 A computer program product comprising instructions, which, when executed on a computer, cause the computer to perform the method of any one of embodiments 15 to 28.
  • each block in the flowchart or block diagrams may represent a module, segment, or portion of instructions, which comprises one or more functions for implementing the specified logical function(s) executable instructions.
  • the functions noted in the blocks may occur out of the order noted in the figures. For example, two blocks in succession may, in fact, be executed substantially concurrently, or the blocks may sometimes be executed in the reverse order, depending upon the functionality involved.
  • each block of the block diagrams and/or flowchart illustrations, and combinations of blocks in the block diagrams and/or flowchart illustrations can be implemented in hardware (eg, circuits or ASICs (Application) that perform the corresponding functions or actions. Specific Integrated Circuit, application-specific integrated circuit)), or can be implemented by a combination of hardware and software, such as firmware.

Abstract

The present application relates to an uplink control channel transmission method and apparatus, storage medium and chip. The method comprises: a terminal device receives configuration information or instruction information, the configuration information or instruction information being used for configuring or instructing the terminal device to send a first PUCCH, the transmission length of the first PUCCH being L symbols, the number of transmissions of the first PUCCH being N, N being an integer greater than or equal to one, and L being an integer greater than or equal to one; the terminal device determines X symbols according to the configuration information or instruction information, the X symbols being located in a first time slot, and the X symbols being used for transmitting the first PUCCH; and when X is less than L, the terminal device determines, according to preset conditions, not to transmit the first PUCCH on the X symbols, or to transmit the first PUCCH on the X symbols, or to transmit a second PUCCH on the X symbols, or to transmit a DMRS on the X symbols, thereby preventing the problem that the X symbols cannot be decoded.

Description

一种上行控制信道的传输方法、装置、存储介质及芯片An uplink control channel transmission method, device, storage medium and chip
本申请要求2020年09月28日提交、申请号为202011054926.0,发明名称为“一种Type-B传输PUCCH的方法”的中国专利申请的优先权,其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。This application claims the priority of the Chinese patent application filed on September 28, 2020, the application number is 202011054926.0, and the invention title is "A method for Type-B transmission of PUCCH", the entire contents of which are incorporated into this application by reference.
本申请要求2020年10月16日提交、申请号为202011111902.4,发明名称为“一种上行控制信道的传输方法、装置、存储介质及芯片”的中国专利申请的优先权,其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。This application claims the priority of the Chinese patent application filed on October 16, 2020, the application number is 202011111902.4, and the invention is titled "A transmission method, device, storage medium and chip for an uplink control channel", the entire contents of which are incorporated by reference in this application.
技术领域technical field
本申请涉及通信技术领域,尤其涉及一种上行控制信道的传输方法、装置、存储介质及芯片。The present application relates to the field of communication technologies, and in particular, to a method, device, storage medium and chip for transmitting an uplink control channel.
背景技术Background technique
在5G新通信协议(New Radio,NR)通信系统中,上行传输一般包含物理上行控制信道(Physical uplink control channel,PUCCH)的传输和物理上行共享信道(Physical uplink shared channel,PUSCH)的传输。其中,PUSCH的传输包括两种方式,一种是传输方式Type-A,另一种是传输方式Type-B,由于传输方式Type-B比传输方式Type-A能够更大限度的利用资源;在5G NR标准中,讨论使用传输方式Type-B传输PUCCH,从而最大限度的利用资源传输PUCCH,提高覆盖范围。In the 5G new communication protocol (New Radio, NR) communication system, the uplink transmission generally includes the transmission of the physical uplink control channel (PUCCH) and the transmission of the physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH). Among them, the transmission of PUSCH includes two modes, one is the transmission mode Type-A, and the other is the transmission mode Type-B, because the transmission mode Type-B can utilize resources to a greater extent than the transmission mode Type-A; In the 5G NR standard, it is discussed to use the transmission method Type-B to transmit PUCCH, so as to maximize the use of resources to transmit PUCCH and improve the coverage.
然而,在PUCCH格式3(format 3)或格式4(format 4)的结构中,解调参考信号(Demodulation Reference Signal,DMRS)一般配置在跳频部分的中间位置,在使用传输方式Type-B传输PUCCH时,可能会出现一个时隙内部分符号上传输PUCCH,而这部分符号没有相应的DMRS解调信道,出现无法译码的问题。However, in the structure of PUCCH format 3 (format 3) or format 4 (format 4), the demodulation reference signal (Demodulation Reference Signal, DMRS) is generally arranged in the middle of the frequency hopping part, and is transmitted using the transmission method Type-B. In the case of PUCCH, PUCCH may be transmitted on some symbols in a time slot, and there is no corresponding DMRS demodulation channel for this part of the symbols, so there is a problem that decoding cannot be performed.
发明内容SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
一种上行控制信道的传输方法、装置、存储介质及芯片。An uplink control channel transmission method, device, storage medium and chip.
第一方面,本申请的实施例提供了一种上行控制信道PUCCH传输方法,所述方法包括:In a first aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a method for transmitting an uplink control channel PUCCH, the method comprising:
终端设备接收来自网络设备的配置信息或指示信息,所述配置信息或指示信息用于配置或指示所述终端设备发送第一PUCCH,所述第一PUCCH的传输长度为L个符号,所述第一PUCCH的传输次数为N,N为大于或等于1的整数,L为大于或等于1的整数;所述终端设备根据所述配置信息或指示信息确定X个符号,所述X个符号位于第一时隙,且所述X个符号用于传输所述第一PUCCH;当X小于L时,所述终端设备根据预设条件确定在所述X个符号上不传输所述第一PUCCH,或者所述终端设备在所述X个符号上传输所述第一PUCCH,或者所述终端设备在所述X个符号上传输第二PUCCH,或者所述终端设备在所述X个符号上传输DMRS。The terminal device receives configuration information or indication information from the network device, the configuration information or indication information is used to configure or instruct the terminal device to send the first PUCCH, the transmission length of the first PUCCH is L symbols, and the first PUCCH is L symbols. The number of times of transmission of a PUCCH is N, where N is an integer greater than or equal to 1, and L is an integer greater than or equal to 1; the terminal device determines X symbols according to the configuration information or indication information, and the X symbols are located in the first a time slot, and the X symbols are used to transmit the first PUCCH; when X is less than L, the terminal device determines not to transmit the first PUCCH on the X symbols according to a preset condition, or The terminal device transmits the first PUCCH on the X symbols, or the terminal device transmits the second PUCCH on the X symbols, or the terminal device transmits the DMRS on the X symbols.
基于上述技术方案,终端设备基于配置信息或指示信息配置或指示的第一PUCCH的传输长度为L、传输次数为N,确定第一时隙内的X个符号不包括承载DMRS的符号,这X个符号存在无法译码的可能,终端设备根据预设条件确定在X个符号上不传输所述第一PUCCH, 或者终端设备在所述X个符号上传输第一PUCCH,或者终端设备在X个符号上传输第二PUCCH,或者终端设备在X个符号上传输DMRS,从而解决传输第一PUCCH可能出现的无法译码的问题。Based on the above technical solution, the terminal device determines that the X symbols in the first time slot do not include symbols bearing DMRS, based on the configuration information or the indication information that the transmission length of the first PUCCH is L and the number of transmissions is N. There is a possibility that the number of symbols cannot be decoded, and the terminal device determines according to preset conditions that the first PUCCH is not transmitted on the X symbols, or the terminal device transmits the first PUCCH on the X symbols, or the terminal device transmits the first PUCCH on the X symbols. The second PUCCH is transmitted on the symbol, or the terminal device transmits the DMRS on X symbols, so as to solve the problem that the first PUCCH cannot be decoded.
根据第一方面的第一种可能的实现方式,所述X个符号不包括承载DMRS的符号。According to a first possible implementation manner of the first aspect, the X symbols do not include symbols bearing DMRS.
基于上述技术方案,对于X个符号,X个符号不包括承载DMRS的符号时,这X个符号存在无法译码的可能,终端设备根据预设条件确定在X个符号上不传输所述第一PUCCH,或者终端设备在所述X个符号上传输第一PUCCH,或者终端设备在X个符号上传输第二PUCCH,或者终端设备在所述X个符号上传输DMRS,从而解决传输第一PUCCH可能出现的无法译码的问题。Based on the above technical solution, for X symbols, when the X symbols do not include the symbols carrying DMRS, the X symbols may not be decoded, and the terminal device determines according to preset conditions not to transmit the first symbol on the X symbols PUCCH, or the terminal device transmits the first PUCCH on the X symbols, or the terminal device transmits the second PUCCH on the X symbols, or the terminal device transmits the DMRS on the X symbols, thereby solving the possibility of transmitting the first PUCCH A problem that cannot be decoded occurs.
根据第一方面,或第一方面的第一种可能的实现方式,在第一方面的第二种可能的实现方式中,所述终端设备根据预设条件确定在所述X个符号上不传输所述第一PUCCH,包括:当所述X个符号所在的频域位置与所述第一时隙及第二时隙内的承载DMRS的符号所在的频域位置不同时,所述终端设备确定在所述X符号上不传输所述第一PUCCH;其中,所述第一时隙与所述第二时隙相邻。According to the first aspect, or the first possible implementation manner of the first aspect, in the second possible implementation manner of the first aspect, the terminal device determines not to transmit on the X symbols according to a preset condition The first PUCCH includes: when the frequency domain positions where the X symbols are located are different from the frequency domain positions where the symbols carrying the DMRS in the first time slot and the second time slot are located, the terminal device determines that The first PUCCH is not transmitted on the X symbol; wherein the first slot is adjacent to the second slot.
基于上述技术方案,终端设备根据配置信息或指示信息可知X个符号不包括承载DMRS的符号,当第一时隙及第二时隙内的承载DMRS的符号所在的频域位置均与X个符号所在的频域位置不同时,可知X个符号附近至少一个时隙的时域范围内,没有相应的DMRS用于解调信道,终端设备确定在X符号上不传输第一PUCCH,从而避免出现这X个符号无法译码的问题。Based on the above technical solution, the terminal device can know, according to the configuration information or the indication information, that the X symbols do not include the DMRS-bearing symbols, and when the frequency domain positions of the DMRS-bearing symbols in the first time slot and the second time slot are the same as the X symbols When the frequency domain positions are different, it can be known that within the time domain range of at least one time slot near X symbols, there is no corresponding DMRS for demodulating the channel, and the terminal equipment determines not to transmit the first PUCCH on the X symbol, so as to avoid this phenomenon. The problem that X symbols cannot be decoded.
根据第一方面,或第一方面的第一种可能的实现方式,在第一方面的第三种可能的实现方式中,所述终端设备根据预设条件确定在所述X个符号上不传输所述第一PUCCH,包括:当所述X个符号与第一符号之间间隔超过第一阈值时,所述终端设备确定在所述X个符号上不传输所述第一PUCCH;其中,所述第一符号为位于所述X个符号之后的第一个承载DMRS的符号。According to the first aspect, or the first possible implementation manner of the first aspect, in a third possible implementation manner of the first aspect, the terminal device determines not to transmit on the X symbols according to a preset condition The first PUCCH includes: when the interval between the X symbols and the first symbol exceeds a first threshold, the terminal device determines not to transmit the first PUCCH on the X symbols; wherein the The first symbol is the first DMRS-bearing symbol located after the X symbols.
基于上述技术方案,终端设备根据配置信息或指示信息可知X个符号不包括承载DMRS的符号,当X个符号与第一符号之间间隔超过第一阈值时,可知X个符号附近在第一阈值的时域范围内,没有相应的DMRS用于解调信道,终端设备确定在X符号上不传输第一PUCCH,从而避免出现这X个符号无法译码的问题。Based on the above technical solution, the terminal device can know that the X symbols do not include symbols carrying DMRS according to the configuration information or the indication information, and when the interval between the X symbols and the first symbol exceeds the first threshold, it can be known that the X symbols are near the first threshold. Within the time domain range of , there is no corresponding DMRS for demodulating the channel, and the terminal device determines not to transmit the first PUCCH on the X symbols, so as to avoid the problem that the X symbols cannot be decoded.
根据第一方面,或第一方面的第一种可能的实现方式,在第一方面的第四种可能的实现方式中,所述终端设备根据预设条件确定在所述X个符号上不传输所述第一PUCCH,包括:当所述X小于或等于第二阈值时,所述终端设备确定在所述X个符号上不传输所述第一PUCCH;其中,所述第二阈值根据所述长度L、DMRS配置方式、所述第一PUCCH的格式以及所述第一PUCCH的跳频方式中的至少其中之一确定。According to the first aspect, or the first possible implementation manner of the first aspect, in a fourth possible implementation manner of the first aspect, the terminal device determines not to transmit on the X symbols according to a preset condition The first PUCCH includes: when the X is less than or equal to a second threshold, the terminal device determines not to transmit the first PUCCH on the X symbols; wherein the second threshold is based on the At least one of the length L, the DMRS configuration mode, the format of the first PUCCH, and the frequency hopping mode of the first PUCCH is determined.
基于上述技术方案,终端设备根据配置信息或指示信息可知X个符号不包括承载DMRS的符号,对于第一PUCCH format 3或第一PUCCH format 4,DMRS通常配置在第一PUCCH各跳频部分的中间时域位置,可知X个符号包括第一PUCCH各跳频部分中靠前的几个符号或靠后的几个符号,当X小于或等于第二阈值时,X的值越小,则X个符号与附近的承载DMRS的符号在时域范围内相隔越远,因此,当X小于或等于第二阈值时,终端设备确定在X个符号上不传输第一PUCCH,从而避免出现这X个符号无法译码的问题。Based on the above technical solutions, the terminal device can know that the X symbols do not include symbols carrying DMRS according to the configuration information or the indication information. For the first PUCCH format 3 or the first PUCCH format 4, the DMRS is usually configured in the middle of each frequency hopping part of the first PUCCH Time domain position, it can be known that the X symbols include the first several symbols or the following several symbols in each frequency hopping part of the first PUCCH. When X is less than or equal to the second threshold, the smaller the value of X, the more The farther the symbol is from the nearby DMRS-bearing symbol in the time domain, therefore, when X is less than or equal to the second threshold, the terminal device determines not to transmit the first PUCCH on X symbols, thereby avoiding the occurrence of these X symbols Unable to decode problem.
根据第一方面,或第一方面的第一种可能的实现方式,在第一方面的第五种可能的实现方式中,所述终端设备根据预设条件确定在所述X个符号上不传输所述第一PUCCH,包括:当第三时隙中包括下行符号时,所述终端设备确定在所述X个符号上不传输所述第一PUCCH;其中,所述第三时隙与所述第一时隙相邻,且位于所述第一时隙之后。According to the first aspect, or the first possible implementation manner of the first aspect, in a fifth possible implementation manner of the first aspect, the terminal device determines not to transmit on the X symbols according to a preset condition The first PUCCH includes: when the third time slot includes downlink symbols, the terminal device determines not to transmit the first PUCCH on the X symbols; wherein the third time slot is the same as the The first time slot is adjacent and after the first time slot.
基于上述技术方案,终端设备根据配置信息或指示信息可知X个符号不包括承载DMRS的符号,下行符号通常被配置在时隙中的第一个符号,当第三时隙中包括下行符号时,对于第一PUCCH format 3或第一PUCCH format 4等,X个符号的时域位置通常位于第一时隙的最后,此时,X个符号的前面几个符号所在的频域位置与X个符号所在的频域位置不同,第三时隙中与X个符号相邻的符号为下行符号,则X个符号附近至少一个符号间隔的时域范围内没有相应的DMRS可用于解调信道,终端设备确定在X个符号上不传输第一PUCCH,从而避免出现这X个符号无法译码的问题。Based on the above technical solution, the terminal device knows that the X symbols do not include symbols bearing DMRS according to the configuration information or the indication information, and the downlink symbols are usually configured in the first symbol in the time slot. When the third time slot includes downlink symbols, For the first PUCCH format 3 or the first PUCCH format 4, etc., the time domain position of the X symbols is usually located at the end of the first time slot. The frequency domain location is different, the symbols adjacent to the X symbols in the third time slot are downlink symbols, then there is no corresponding DMRS in the time domain range of at least one symbol interval near the X symbols that can be used to demodulate the channel. It is determined that the first PUCCH is not transmitted on the X symbols, so as to avoid the problem that the X symbols cannot be decoded.
根据第一方面,或第一方面的第一种可能的实现方式,在第一方面的第六种可能的实现方式中,所述终端设备在所述X个符号上传输所述第一PUCCH,包括:所述终端设备根据所述X个符号的前一跳频部分所在的频域位置,在所述X个符号上传输所述第一PUCCH;或者,所述终端设备根据第二符号所在的频域位置,在所述X个符号上传输所述第一PUCCH;其中,所述第二符号与所述X个符号相邻,或者所述第二符号与所述X个符号间隔在14个符号内。According to the first aspect, or the first possible implementation manner of the first aspect, in a sixth possible implementation manner of the first aspect, the terminal device transmits the first PUCCH on the X symbols, Including: the terminal device transmits the first PUCCH on the X symbols according to the frequency domain position where the previous frequency hopping part of the X symbols is located; or, the terminal device transmits the first PUCCH according to the location of the second symbol Frequency domain position, the first PUCCH is transmitted on the X symbols; wherein the second symbol is adjacent to the X symbols, or the second symbol and the X symbols are separated by 14 symbols within the symbol.
基于上述技术方案,终端设备根据X个符号的前一跳频部分所在的频域位置,在X个符号上传输第一PUCCH;从而使得X个符号可以复用前一跳频部分上传输的DMRS,解决X个符号可能缺失DMRS,造成无法译码的问题;或者,终端设备根据第二符号所在的频域位置,在X个符号上传输第一PUCCH;其中,第二符号与X个符号相邻,或者第二符号与X个符号间隔在14个符号内,由于X个符号不包括承载DMRS的符号,第二符号所在的频域位置配置有相应的DMRS,从而使得X个符号可以复用与第二符号相应的DMRS,解决X个符号可能缺失DMRS,造成可能无法译码的问题。Based on the above technical solution, the terminal device transmits the first PUCCH on the X symbols according to the frequency domain position of the previous frequency hopping part of the X symbols; so that the X symbols can multiplex the DMRS transmitted on the previous frequency hopping part , to solve the problem that X symbols may lack DMRS, resulting in inability to decode; or, the terminal device transmits the first PUCCH on X symbols according to the frequency domain position of the second symbol; adjacent, or the second symbol and the X symbols are spaced within 14 symbols, since the X symbols do not include the symbol carrying the DMRS, the frequency domain position where the second symbol is located is configured with the corresponding DMRS, so that the X symbols can be multiplexed The DMRS corresponding to the second symbol solves the problem that X symbols may lack DMRS, which may cause decoding.
根据第一方面的第六种可能的实现方式,在第一方面的第七种可能的实现方式中,所述终端设备根据所述X个符号的前一跳频部分所在的频域位置,在所述X个符号上传输所述第一PUCCH,包括:所述终端设备在所述X个符号上不使能跳频。According to the sixth possible implementation manner of the first aspect, in the seventh possible implementation manner of the first aspect, the terminal device, according to the frequency domain position where the previous frequency hopping part of the X symbols is located, The transmitting of the first PUCCH on the X symbols includes: the terminal device not enabling frequency hopping on the X symbols.
基于上述技术方案,若终端设备在X个符号上使能跳频,并在这X个符号上发送第一PUCCH,这种情况下,终端设备在这X个符号发送第一PUCCH,网络设备在这X个符号接收到第一PUCCH后,由于X个符号不包括承载DMRS的符号,网络设备无法利用DMRS解调第一PUCCH,造成无法译码的问题,此时,终端设备在这X个符号上不使能跳频,以使X个符号的频域位置与X个符号的前一跳频部分的频域位置相同,从而使得X个符号可以复用前一跳频部分上传输的DMRS,避免出现这X个符号无法译码的问题。Based on the above technical solutions, if the terminal device enables frequency hopping on X symbols and sends the first PUCCH on the X symbols, in this case, the terminal device sends the first PUCCH on the X symbols, and the network device sends the first PUCCH on the X symbols. After the X symbols receive the first PUCCH, since the X symbols do not include the symbols carrying the DMRS, the network device cannot use the DMRS to demodulate the first PUCCH, resulting in the problem of inability to decode. At this time, the terminal device is in the X symbols Do not enable frequency hopping, so that the frequency domain position of the X symbols is the same as the frequency domain position of the previous frequency hopping part of the X symbols, so that the X symbols can multiplex the DMRS transmitted on the previous frequency hopping part, Avoid the problem that these X symbols cannot be decoded.
根据第一方面的第六种可能的实现方式,在第一方面的第八种可能的实现方式中,所述终端设备根据所述X个符号的前一跳频部分所在的频域位置,在所述X个符号上传输所述第一PUCCH,包括:所述终端设备将所述X个符号所在跳频部分的频域位置调整为与所述X个符号的前一跳频部分的频域位置相同,且将所述X个符号的下一跳频部分的频域位置调整为与所述X个符号的频域位置相同。According to the sixth possible implementation manner of the first aspect, in the eighth possible implementation manner of the first aspect, the terminal device, according to the frequency domain position where the previous frequency hopping part of the X symbols is located, Transmitting the first PUCCH on the X symbols includes: adjusting, by the terminal device, the frequency domain position of the frequency hopping part where the X symbols are located to be the same as the frequency domain of the previous frequency hopping part of the X symbols The positions are the same, and the frequency domain position of the next frequency hopping part of the X symbols is adjusted to be the same as the frequency domain position of the X symbols.
基于上述技术方案,X个符号可能缺失DMRS,造成可能无法译码的问题,此时,终端 设备调整X个符号所在的一次传输的第一PUCCH各符号的频域位置,将X个符号所在跳频部分的频域位置调整为与X个符号的前一跳频部分的频域位置相同,且将X个符号的下一跳频部分的频域位置调整为与X个符号的频域位置相同;以使X个符号的频域位置与X个符号的前一跳频部分的频域位置相同,从而使得X个符号可以复用前一跳频部分上传输的DMRS,从而避免出现这X个符号无法译码的问题。Based on the above technical solution, the X symbols may lack DMRS, resulting in the problem that decoding may not be possible. At this time, the terminal device adjusts the frequency domain position of each symbol of the first PUCCH transmitted in one transmission where the X symbols are located, and hops the X symbols The frequency domain position of the frequency part is adjusted to be the same as the frequency domain position of the previous frequency hopping part of X symbols, and the frequency domain position of the next frequency hopping part of X symbols is adjusted to be the same as the frequency domain position of X symbols ; To make the frequency domain position of the X symbols the same as the frequency domain position of the previous frequency hopping part of the X symbols, so that the X symbols can multiplex the DMRS transmitted on the previous frequency hopping part, thereby avoiding the occurrence of these X symbols The problem that the symbol cannot be decoded.
根据第一方面的第九种可能的实现方式,当所述终端设备在所述X个符号上传输所述第二PUCCH时,所述配置信息或指示信息还用于指示所述第二PUCCH的长度。According to a ninth possible implementation manner of the first aspect, when the terminal device transmits the second PUCCH on the X symbols, the configuration information or the indication information is further used to indicate the length.
基于上述技术方案,X个符号可能存在没有相应的DMRS解调信道,出现无法译码的情况,终端设备根据所述配置信息或指示信息,在X个符号上传输第二PUCCH,且第二PUCCH的传输不会占用第一PUCCH的时域资源,即可以根据配置或指示信息在其他符号上正常传输第一PUCCH,这样,基于已有的PUCCH配置进行调度额外PUCCH资源,从而在不影响现有配置中PUCCH复用的同时,提高频域资源利用率。Based on the above technical solutions, X symbols may have no corresponding DMRS demodulation channel and cannot be decoded. The terminal device transmits the second PUCCH on the X symbols according to the configuration information or indication information, and the second PUCCH The transmission will not occupy the time domain resources of the first PUCCH, that is, the first PUCCH can be normally transmitted on other symbols according to the configuration or indication information. In this way, additional PUCCH resources are scheduled based on the existing PUCCH configuration, so that the existing While the PUCCH is multiplexed in the configuration, the utilization rate of frequency domain resources is improved.
根据第一方面,或第一方面的第九种可能的实现方式,在第一方面的第十种可能的实现方式中,所述终端设备在所述X个符号上传输第二PUCCH,包括:所述终端设备仅在所述X个符号上传输所述第二PUCCH;或者,所述终端设备在所述X个符号及第二时隙内的部分上行符号或空闲符号上传输所述第二PUCCH;其中,所述第一时隙与所述第二时隙相邻。According to the first aspect, or the ninth possible implementation manner of the first aspect, in the tenth possible implementation manner of the first aspect, the terminal device transmits the second PUCCH on the X symbols, including: The terminal device transmits the second PUCCH only on the X symbols; or, the terminal device transmits the second PUCCH on the X symbols and some uplink symbols or idle symbols in the second time slot PUCCH; wherein the first time slot is adjacent to the second time slot.
基于上述技术方案,X个符号可能存在没有相应的DMRS解调信道,出现无法译码的情况,终端设备仅在X个符号上传输第二PUCCH,在X个符号上传输第二PUCCH,且第二PUCCH的传输不会占用第一PUCCH的时域资源,即可以根据配置或指示信息在其他符号上正常传输第一PUCCH,这样,基于已有的PUCCH配置进行调度额外PUCCH资源,从而在不影响现有配置中PUCCH复用的同时,提高频域资源利用率;或者,终端设备基于已有的PUCCH资源配置信息,可以确定第二时隙内的可用的符号,该可用的符号指第二时隙内不传输第一PUCCH的上行符号或空闲符号,终端设备在X个符号及第二时隙内的部分上行符号或空闲符号上传输第二PUCCH,从而有效避免了X个符号上可能缺失DMRS,造成无法译码的问题,同时可以在不影响现有配置中PUCCH复用的基础上,充分利用X个符号及第二时隙内的部分上行符号或空闲符号的资源,提高资源利用率,提高覆盖范围。Based on the above technical solutions, X symbols may have no corresponding DMRS demodulation channel, and the decoding cannot be performed. The terminal device only transmits the second PUCCH on the X symbols, and transmits the second PUCCH on the X symbols. The transmission of the second PUCCH will not occupy the time domain resources of the first PUCCH, that is, the first PUCCH can be normally transmitted on other symbols according to the configuration or indication information. In this way, the additional PUCCH resources are scheduled based on the existing PUCCH configuration, so as not to affect the In the existing configuration, PUCCH multiplexing can improve the utilization rate of frequency domain resources; or, based on the existing PUCCH resource configuration information, the terminal device can determine the available symbols in the second time slot, and the available symbols refer to the second time slot. The uplink symbols or idle symbols of the first PUCCH are not transmitted in the slot, and the terminal device transmits the second PUCCH on X symbols and some uplink symbols or idle symbols in the second time slot, thereby effectively avoiding the possible lack of DMRS on the X symbols , causing the problem of inability to decode, and at the same time, on the basis of not affecting the PUCCH multiplexing in the existing configuration, the resources of X symbols and some uplink symbols or idle symbols in the second time slot can be fully utilized to improve resource utilization. Improve coverage.
根据第一方面的第十一种可能的实现方式,所述终端设备在所述X个符号上传输DMRS,包括:所述终端设备仅在X个符号上传输DMRS;或者,所述终端设备在所述X个符号及第二时隙内的部分上行符号或空闲符号上传输DMRS;其中,所述第一时隙与所述第二时隙相邻。According to an eleventh possible implementation manner of the first aspect, the transmitting, by the terminal device, the DMRS on the X symbols includes: the terminal device only transmits the DMRS on the X symbols; The DMRS is transmitted on the X symbols and some uplink symbols or idle symbols in the second time slot; wherein the first time slot is adjacent to the second time slot.
基于上述技术方案,X个符号可能存在没有相应的DMRS解调信道,出现无法译码的情况,终端设备仅在X个符号上传输DMRS,从而有效避免了X个符号上可能缺失DMRS,造成无法译码的问题,同时利用这X个符号承载DMRS,增强DMRS的检测性能,从而提高覆盖范围;或者,终端设备基于已有的PUCCH资源配置信息,可以确定第二时隙内的可用的符号,该可用的符号指第二时隙内不传输第一PUCCH的上行符号或空闲符号,终端设备在X个符号及第二时隙内的部分上行符号或空闲符号上传输DMRS,从而有效避免了X个符号上可能缺失DMRS,造成无法译码的问题,同时可以在不影响现有配置中PUCCH复用的基础上,充分利用X个符号及第二时隙内的部分上行符号或空闲符号的资源,提高资源利用率。Based on the above technical solutions, X symbols may have no corresponding DMRS demodulation channel, and the situation cannot be decoded. The terminal device only transmits DMRS on X symbols, thus effectively avoiding the possibility of missing DMRS on X symbols, resulting in failure to decode. The problem of decoding is to use these X symbols to carry the DMRS at the same time, to enhance the detection performance of the DMRS, thereby improving the coverage; The available symbols refer to the uplink symbols or idle symbols of the first PUCCH that are not transmitted in the second time slot. The terminal device transmits DMRS on X symbols and some uplink symbols or idle symbols in the second time slot, thereby effectively avoiding X symbols. The DMRS may be missing on the number of symbols, causing the problem of inability to decode. At the same time, the resources of the X symbols and some uplink symbols or idle symbols in the second time slot can be fully utilized without affecting the PUCCH multiplexing in the existing configuration. , improve resource utilization.
根据第一方面的第十二种可能的实现方式,所述终端设备在所述X个符号上传输所述第一PUCCH,包括:所述终端设备在所述X个符号及第二时隙内的部分上行符号或空闲符号上传输所述第一PUCCH;其中,所述第一时隙与所述第二时隙相邻。According to a twelfth possible implementation manner of the first aspect, transmitting, by the terminal device, the first PUCCH on the X symbols includes: the terminal device transmits the first PUCCH in the X symbols and the second time slot. The first PUCCH is transmitted on part of the uplink symbols or idle symbols of , wherein the first time slot is adjacent to the second time slot.
基于上述技术方案,终端设备基于已有的PUCCH资源配置信息,可以确定第二时隙内的可用的符号,该可用的符号指第二时隙内不传输第一PUCCH的上行符号或空闲符号,终端设备在X个符号及第二时隙内的部分上行符号或空闲符号上传输第一PUCCH,即第一PUCCH可以跨时隙边界,从而有效避免了X个符号上可能缺失DMRS,造成无法译码的问题,同时可以在不影响现有配置中PUCCH复用的基础上,充分利用X个符号及第二时隙内的部分上行符号或空闲符号的资源,提高资源利用率,提高覆盖范围。Based on the above technical solution, the terminal device can determine the available symbols in the second time slot based on the existing PUCCH resource configuration information, where the available symbols refer to the uplink symbols or idle symbols of the first PUCCH that are not transmitted in the second time slot, The terminal device transmits the first PUCCH on the X symbols and some uplink symbols or idle symbols in the second time slot, that is, the first PUCCH can cross the time slot boundary, thus effectively avoiding the possibility of missing DMRS on the X symbols, resulting in inability to decode At the same time, without affecting the PUCCH multiplexing in the existing configuration, the resources of X symbols and some uplink symbols or idle symbols in the second time slot can be fully utilized to improve resource utilization and coverage.
根据第一方面,或第一方面的第十一种可能的实现方式,在第一方面的第十三种可能的实现方式中,所述终端设备在所述X个符号上传输DMRS,包括:所述终端设备在所述X个符号上以跳频方式传输DMRS,其中,所述X个符号的第一跳频部分包括
Figure PCTCN2021115721-appb-000001
个符号,所述X个符号的第二跳频部分包括
Figure PCTCN2021115721-appb-000002
个符号。
According to the first aspect, or the eleventh possible implementation manner of the first aspect, in the thirteenth possible implementation manner of the first aspect, the terminal device transmits the DMRS on the X symbols, including: The terminal device transmits the DMRS in a frequency hopping manner over the X symbols, wherein the first frequency hopping part of the X symbols includes
Figure PCTCN2021115721-appb-000001
symbols, the second frequency hopping portion of the X symbols includes
Figure PCTCN2021115721-appb-000002
symbol.
基于上述技术方案,将X个符号的第一跳频部分和第二跳频部分中符号数量上取整或下取整配置,从而可以充分利用该X个符号配置额外的DMRS,使得与X个符号的第一跳频部分所在频域位置相同的其他符号利用第一跳频部分的DMRS,同时,与X个符号的第二跳频部分所在频域位置相同的其他符号利用第二跳频部分的DMRS,增强DMRS的检测性能,提高覆盖范围。Based on the above technical solution, the number of symbols in the first frequency hopping part and the second frequency hopping part of the X symbols is rounded up or down to configure, so that the X symbols can be fully used to configure additional DMRSs, so that the X symbols are used to configure additional DMRSs. Other symbols with the same frequency domain position as the first frequency hopping part of the symbol use the DMRS of the first frequency hopping part, and at the same time, other symbols with the same frequency domain position as the second frequency hopping part of the X symbols use the second frequency hopping part DMRS, enhance the detection performance of DMRS and improve the coverage.
第二方面,本申请的实施例提供了一种通信装置,包括:处理器;用于存储处理器可执行指令的存储器;其中,所述处理器被配置为执行所述指令时实现上述第一方面或者第一方面的多种可能的实现方式中的一种或几种的上行控制信道的传输方法。In a second aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a communication device, including: a processor; a memory for storing instructions executable by the processor; wherein the processor is configured to implement the above-mentioned first when executing the instructions Aspect or one or more transmission methods of uplink control channels in multiple possible implementation manners of the first aspect.
基于上述技术方案,终端设备基于配置信息或指示信息配置或指示的第一PUCCH的传输长度为L、传输次数为N,确定第一时隙内的X个符号不包括承载DMRS的符号,这X个符号存在无法译码的可能,终端设备根据预设条件确定在X个符号上不传输第一PUCCH,或者终端设备在所述X个符号上传输第一PUCCH,或者终端设备在X个符号上传输第二PUCCH,或者终端设备在所述X个符号上传输DMRS,从而解决传输第一PUCCH可能出现的无法译码的问题。Based on the above technical solution, the terminal device determines that the X symbols in the first time slot do not include symbols bearing DMRS, based on the configuration information or the indication information that the transmission length of the first PUCCH is L and the number of transmissions is N. There is a possibility that the number of symbols cannot be decoded. The terminal device determines according to preset conditions that the first PUCCH is not transmitted on the X symbols, or the terminal device transmits the first PUCCH on the X symbols, or the terminal device transmits the first PUCCH on the X symbols. The second PUCCH is transmitted, or the terminal device transmits the DMRS on the X symbols, so as to solve the problem that the first PUCCH cannot be decoded.
第三方面,本申请的实施例提供了一种非易失性计算机可读存储介质,所述计算机可读存储介质包括计算机指令,当所述计算机指令在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行上述第一方面或者第一方面的多种可能的实现方式中的一种或几种的上行控制信道的传输方法。In a third aspect, embodiments of the present application provide a non-volatile computer-readable storage medium, where the computer-readable storage medium includes computer instructions, which, when the computer instructions are executed on a computer, cause the computer to execute the above-mentioned first step. An aspect or one or more of the multiple possible implementation manners of the first aspect is an uplink control channel transmission method.
基于上述技术方案,终端设备基于配置信息或指示信息配置或指示的第一PUCCH的传输长度为L、传输次数为N,确定第一时隙内的X个符号不包括承载DMRS的符号,这X个符号存在无法译码的可能,终端设备根据预设条件确定在X个符号上不传输第一PUCCH,或者终端设备在X个符号上传输第一PUCCH,或者终端设备在X个符号上传输第二PUCCH,或者终端设备在X个符号上传输DMRS,从而解决传输第一PUCCH可能出现的无法译码的问题。Based on the above technical solution, the terminal device determines that the X symbols in the first time slot do not include symbols bearing DMRS, based on the configuration information or the indication information that the transmission length of the first PUCCH is L and the number of transmissions is N. There is a possibility that the number of symbols cannot be decoded. The terminal device determines according to preset conditions that the first PUCCH is not transmitted on the X symbols, or the terminal device transmits the first PUCCH on the X symbols, or the terminal device transmits the first PUCCH on the X symbols. Two PUCCHs, or the terminal device transmits DMRS on X symbols, so as to solve the problem that the first PUCCH cannot be decoded.
第四方面,本申请的实施例提供了一种芯片,包括处理器,当所述处理器执行指令时,所述处理器执行上述第一方面或者第一方面的多种可能的实现方式中的一种或几种的上行控制信道的传输方法。In a fourth aspect, embodiments of the present application provide a chip, including a processor, when the processor executes an instruction, the processor executes the first aspect or one of the various possible implementations of the first aspect. One or more transmission methods for uplink control channels.
基于上述技术方案,终端设备基于配置信息或指示信息配置或指示的第一PUCCH的传 输长度为L、传输次数为N,确定第一时隙内的X个符号不包括承载DMRS的符号,这X个符号存在无法译码的可能,终端设备根据预设条件确定在X个符号上不传输第一PUCCH,或者终端设备在X个符号上传输第一PUCCH,或者终端设备在X个符号上传输第二PUCCH,或者终端设备在所述X个符号上传输DMRS,从而解决传输第一PUCCH可能出现的无法译码的问题。Based on the above technical solution, the terminal device determines that the X symbols in the first time slot do not include symbols bearing DMRS, based on the configuration information or the indication information that the transmission length of the first PUCCH is L and the number of transmissions is N. There is a possibility that the number of symbols cannot be decoded. The terminal device determines according to preset conditions that the first PUCCH is not transmitted on the X symbols, or the terminal device transmits the first PUCCH on the X symbols, or the terminal device transmits the first PUCCH on the X symbols. Two PUCCHs, or the terminal device transmits the DMRS on the X symbols, so as to solve the problem that the first PUCCH cannot be decoded.
第五方面,本申请的实施例提供了一种计算机程序产品,包括计算机可读代码,或者承载有计算机可读代码的非易失性计算机可读存储介质,当所述计算机可读代码在通信装置中运行时,所述通信装置中的处理器执行上述第一方面或者第一方面的多种可能的实现方式中的一种或几种的上行控制信道的传输方法。In a fifth aspect, embodiments of the present application provide a computer program product, comprising computer-readable codes, or a non-volatile computer-readable storage medium carrying computer-readable codes, when the computer-readable codes are in communication When running in the device, the processor in the communication device executes the first aspect or one or more of the uplink control channel transmission methods in the multiple possible implementation manners of the first aspect.
基于上述技术方案,终端设备基于配置信息或指示信息配置或指示的第一PUCCH的传输长度为L、传输次数为N,确定第一时隙内的X个符号不包括承载DMRS的符号,这X个符号存在无法译码的可能,终端设备根据预设条件确定在X个符号上不传输第一PUCCH,或者终端设备在X个符号上传输第一PUCCH,或者终端设备在X个符号上传输第二PUCCH,或者终端设备在X个符号上传输DMRS,从而解决传输第一PUCCH可能出现的无法译码的问题。Based on the above technical solution, the terminal device determines that the X symbols in the first time slot do not include symbols bearing DMRS, based on the configuration information or the indication information that the transmission length of the first PUCCH is L and the number of transmissions is N. There is a possibility that the number of symbols cannot be decoded. The terminal device determines according to preset conditions that the first PUCCH is not transmitted on the X symbols, or the terminal device transmits the first PUCCH on the X symbols, or the terminal device transmits the first PUCCH on the X symbols. Two PUCCHs, or the terminal device transmits DMRS on X symbols, so as to solve the problem that the first PUCCH cannot be decoded.
本申请的这些和其他方面在以下(多个)实施例的描述中会更加简明易懂。These and other aspects of the present application will be more clearly understood in the following description of the embodiment(s).
附图说明Description of drawings
包含在说明书中并且构成说明书的一部分的附图与说明书一起示出了本申请的示例性实施例、特征和方面,并且用于解释本申请的原理。The accompanying drawings, which are incorporated in and constitute a part of the specification, illustrate exemplary embodiments, features and aspects of the application and together with the description, serve to explain the principles of the application.
图1示出相关技术中一种以Type-B的方式传输PUSCH的示意图。FIG. 1 shows a schematic diagram of transmitting PUSCH in a Type-B manner in the related art.
图2示出相关技术中一种以Type-B的方式传输PUCCH的示意图。FIG. 2 shows a schematic diagram of transmitting PUCCH in a Type-B manner in the related art.
图3示出相关技术中一种以Type-B的方式传输PUCCH的示意图。FIG. 3 shows a schematic diagram of transmitting PUCCH in a Type-B manner in the related art.
图4示出相关技术中一种以Type-B的方式传输PUCCH的示意图。FIG. 4 shows a schematic diagram of PUCCH transmission in a Type-B manner in the related art.
图5示出根据本申请一实施例的通信网络架构的示意图。FIG. 5 shows a schematic diagram of a communication network architecture according to an embodiment of the present application.
图6示出根据本申请一实施例的一种上行控制信道的传输方法的流程图。FIG. 6 shows a flowchart of a method for transmitting an uplink control channel according to an embodiment of the present application.
图7示出根据本申请一实施例的一种上行控制信道的传输方法的示意图。FIG. 7 shows a schematic diagram of a method for transmitting an uplink control channel according to an embodiment of the present application.
图8示出根据本申请一实施例的一种上行控制信道的传输方法的示意图。FIG. 8 shows a schematic diagram of a method for transmitting an uplink control channel according to an embodiment of the present application.
图9示出根据本申请一实施例的一种上行控制信道的传输方法的示意图。FIG. 9 shows a schematic diagram of a method for transmitting an uplink control channel according to an embodiment of the present application.
图10示出根据本申请一实施例的一种上行控制信道的传输方法的示意图。FIG. 10 shows a schematic diagram of a method for transmitting an uplink control channel according to an embodiment of the present application.
图11示出根据本申请一实施例的一种上行控制信道的传输方法的示意图。FIG. 11 shows a schematic diagram of a method for transmitting an uplink control channel according to an embodiment of the present application.
图12示出根据本申请一实施例的一种上行控制信道的传输方法的流程图。FIG. 12 shows a flowchart of a method for transmitting an uplink control channel according to an embodiment of the present application.
图13示出根据本申请一实施例的一种上行控制信道的传输方法的示意图。FIG. 13 shows a schematic diagram of a method for transmitting an uplink control channel according to an embodiment of the present application.
图14示出根据本申请一实施例的一种上行控制信道的传输方法的示意图。FIG. 14 shows a schematic diagram of a method for transmitting an uplink control channel according to an embodiment of the present application.
图15示出根据本申请一实施例的一种上行控制信道的传输方法的示意图。FIG. 15 shows a schematic diagram of a method for transmitting an uplink control channel according to an embodiment of the present application.
图16示出根据本申请一实施例的一种上行控制信道的传输方法的示意图。FIG. 16 shows a schematic diagram of a method for transmitting an uplink control channel according to an embodiment of the present application.
图17示出根据本申请一实施例的一种上行控制信道的传输方法的示意图。FIG. 17 shows a schematic diagram of a method for transmitting an uplink control channel according to an embodiment of the present application.
图18示出根据本申请一实施例的一种上行控制信道的传输方法的示意图。FIG. 18 shows a schematic diagram of a method for transmitting an uplink control channel according to an embodiment of the present application.
图19示出根据本申请一实施例的一种上行控制信道的传输方法的流程图。FIG. 19 shows a flowchart of a method for transmitting an uplink control channel according to an embodiment of the present application.
图20示出根据本申请一实施例的一种上行控制信道的传输方法的示意图。FIG. 20 shows a schematic diagram of a method for transmitting an uplink control channel according to an embodiment of the present application.
图21示出根据本申请一实施例的一种上行控制信道的传输方法的示意图。FIG. 21 shows a schematic diagram of a method for transmitting an uplink control channel according to an embodiment of the present application.
图22示出根据本申请一实施例的一种上行控制信道的传输方法的示意图。FIG. 22 shows a schematic diagram of a method for transmitting an uplink control channel according to an embodiment of the present application.
图23示出根据本申请一实施例的一种上行控制信道的传输方法的示意图。FIG. 23 shows a schematic diagram of a method for transmitting an uplink control channel according to an embodiment of the present application.
图24示出根据本申请一实施例的一种上行控制信道的传输方法的流程图。FIG. 24 shows a flowchart of a method for transmitting an uplink control channel according to an embodiment of the present application.
图25示出根据本申请一实施例的一种上行控制信道的传输方法的示意图。FIG. 25 shows a schematic diagram of a method for transmitting an uplink control channel according to an embodiment of the present application.
图26示出根据本申请一实施例的一种上行控制信道的传输方法的示意图。FIG. 26 shows a schematic diagram of a method for transmitting an uplink control channel according to an embodiment of the present application.
图27示出根据本申请一实施例的一种上行控制信道的传输方法的流程图。FIG. 27 shows a flowchart of a method for transmitting an uplink control channel according to an embodiment of the present application.
图28示出根据本申请一实施例的一种上行控制信道的传输方法的流程图。FIG. 28 shows a flowchart of a method for transmitting an uplink control channel according to an embodiment of the present application.
图29示出根据本申请一实施例的一种通信装置的结构示意图。FIG. 29 shows a schematic structural diagram of a communication device according to an embodiment of the present application.
图30示出根据本申请一实施例的一种通信装置的结构示意图。FIG. 30 shows a schematic structural diagram of a communication device according to an embodiment of the present application.
图31示出根据本申请一实施例的一种通信装置的结构示意图。FIG. 31 shows a schematic structural diagram of a communication device according to an embodiment of the present application.
图32示出根据本申请一实施例的一种芯片的结构示意图。FIG. 32 shows a schematic structural diagram of a chip according to an embodiment of the present application.
具体实施方式detailed description
以下将参考附图详细说明本申请的各种示例性实施例、特征和方面。附图中相同的附图标记表示功能相同或相似的元件。尽管在附图中示出了实施例的各种方面,但是除非特别指出,不必按比例绘制附图。Various exemplary embodiments, features and aspects of the present application will be described in detail below with reference to the accompanying drawings. The same reference numbers in the figures denote elements that have the same or similar functions. While various aspects of the embodiments are shown in the drawings, the drawings are not necessarily drawn to scale unless otherwise indicated.
在这里专用的词“示例性”意为“用作例子、实施例或说明性”。这里作为“示例性”所说明的任何实施例不必解释为优于或好于其它实施例。The word "exemplary" is used exclusively herein to mean "serving as an example, embodiment, or illustration." Any embodiment described herein as "exemplary" is not necessarily to be construed as preferred or advantageous over other embodiments.
另外,为了更好的说明本申请,在下文的具体实施方式中给出了众多的具体细节。本领域技术人员应当理解,没有某些具体细节,本申请同样可以实施。在一些实例中,对于本领域技术人员熟知的方法、手段、元件和电路未作详细描述,以便于凸显本申请的主旨。In addition, in order to better illustrate the present application, numerous specific details are given in the following detailed description. It should be understood by those skilled in the art that the present application may be practiced without certain specific details. In some instances, methods, means, components and circuits well known to those skilled in the art have not been described in detail so as not to obscure the subject matter of the present application.
为了更好的理解的本申请实施例的技术方案,首先介绍以下技术点:In order to better understand the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application, the following technical points are first introduced:
一、关于5G NR1. About 5G NR
5G NR是在第三代合作伙伴计划(3rd Generation Partnership Project,3GPP)组织中新近提出的一个课题,位于标准14(release 14,Rel14)中。在过去一段时间中,3GPP组织提出的长期演进(Long Term Evolution,LTE)标准已经被全世界广泛使用,被称作4G通信技术。例如,中国移动、中国联通、中国电信,都分别采用了4G LTE频分双工(Frequency Division Duplex,FDD)模式和时分双工(Time Division Duplex,TDD)模式的传输技术,并为广大用户提供了高速便捷的移动网络服务。5G NR is a newly proposed topic in the 3rd Generation Partnership Project (3GPP) organization, which is located in Standard 14 (release 14, Rel14). In the past period of time, the Long Term Evolution (Long Term Evolution, LTE) standard proposed by the 3GPP organization has been widely used all over the world, and is called 4G communication technology. For example, China Mobile, China Unicom, and China Telecom have adopted the 4G LTE Frequency Division Duplex (FDD) mode and Time Division Duplex (TDD) mode of transmission technology respectively, and provide users with High-speed and convenient mobile network service.
而随着新一代5G技术进入讨论阶段,原先4G LTE里已经达到的系统结构和接入流程是否继续采纳?一方面,由于通信系统是后项兼容的,所以后来研发的新技术倾向于兼容之前已经标准化的技术;而另一方面,由于4G LTE已经存在了大量的现有设计,如果为了达到兼容,必然要牺牲掉5G的很多灵活度,从而降低性能。所以,目前在3GPP组织中对于两个方向并行研究,其中,不考虑后向兼容的技术讨论组,被称为5G NR。As the new generation of 5G technology enters the discussion stage, will the system structure and access process that have been achieved in the original 4G LTE continue to be adopted? On the one hand, since the communication system is backward compatible, new technologies developed later tend to be compatible with previously standardized technologies; on the other hand, since 4G LTE already has a large number of existing designs, in order to achieve compatibility, it must be A lot of the flexibility of 5G is sacrificed, which reduces performance. Therefore, currently in the 3GPP organization, two directions are being studied in parallel. Among them, the technical discussion group that does not consider backward compatibility is called 5G NR.
二、关于覆盖增强2. About coverage enhancement
在通信系统中,存在网络设备到终端设备的下行传输和终端设备到网络设备的上行传输,由于网络设备成本相对较高,下行传输的覆盖范围一般会高于上行传输的覆盖范围。由于终 端设备成本限制因素,只能使用较廉价的功率放大器,其功率上限也相对网络设备要低,因此,目前覆盖增强的研究主要集中于如何提高上行传输的覆盖范围。In a communication system, there are downlink transmission from network equipment to terminal equipment and uplink transmission from terminal equipment to network equipment. Due to the relatively high cost of network equipment, the coverage of downlink transmission is generally higher than that of uplink transmission. Due to the cost limitation of terminal equipment, only cheaper power amplifiers can be used, and its power upper limit is also lower than that of network equipment. Therefore, the current coverage enhancement research mainly focuses on how to improve the coverage of uplink transmission.
上行传输一般包含PUCCH传输和PUSCH传输,其中PUCCH属于控制信道,覆盖范围相对较广,PUSCH属于数据信道,传输信息量大,覆盖范围相对较近,因此,如何提高PUSCH的覆盖范围是更加紧迫的问题。Uplink transmission generally includes PUCCH transmission and PUSCH transmission. Among them, PUCCH belongs to the control channel and has a relatively wide coverage. PUSCH belongs to the data channel, with a large amount of transmission information and relatively close coverage. Therefore, it is more urgent to improve the coverage of PUSCH. question.
三、关于PUSCH传输3. About PUSCH transmission
在5G NR标准中,PUSCH传输可以包括两种传输方式,又称映射方式;一种是Type-A,另一种是Type-B,每种传输方式的指示信息均包括起始符号(标识为S)、长度(标识为L),以及S+L的可能值范围,表1示出了PUSCH时域资源分配,如表1所示,表1中标识S表示起始符号在一个时隙内的编号,其中,S的取值从0开始,即一个时隙内第一个符号的编号为0,L表示PUSCH的长度,即PUSCH所占用的符号数量,S+L表示起始符号与PUSCH的长度之和的可能值范围。In the 5G NR standard, PUSCH transmission can include two transmission modes, also known as mapping modes; one is Type-A, the other is Type-B, and the indication information of each transmission mode includes a start symbol (identified as S), length (identified as L), and the possible value range of S+L, Table 1 shows the PUSCH time domain resource allocation, as shown in Table 1, the symbol S in Table 1 indicates that the start symbol is in a time slot where the value of S starts from 0, that is, the number of the first symbol in a time slot is 0, L represents the length of the PUSCH, that is, the number of symbols occupied by the PUSCH, and S+L represents the start symbol and the PUSCH The range of possible values for the sum of the lengths of .
表1-PUSCH时域资源分配表Table 1-PUSCH time domain resource allocation table
Figure PCTCN2021115721-appb-000003
Figure PCTCN2021115721-appb-000003
(1)以Type-B的方式传输PUSCH:(1) Transmit PUSCH in Type-B mode:
例如,图1示出相关技术中一种以Type-B的方式传输PUSCH的示意图。如图1所示,在第一个时隙及第二个时隙传输PUSCH,第一个时隙及第二个时隙均包括14个符号,其中,第一个时隙包括6个下行符号、4个空闲符号、4个上行符号,其中,上行符号指用于上行传输的符号;下行信号指用于下行传输的符号;空闲符号,又称灵活符号,或间隔信号,可以位于上行信号与下行信号之间。第二个时隙至少包括连续的10个上行符号,且第一个时隙的上行符号与第二个时隙的上行符号相邻。若取S=10,L=14,即从第一个时隙中第11个符号开始,持续14个符号,由于第一个时隙的符号数为14,因此持续的14个符号在上述第一个时隙内占用4个符号,在第二个时隙内占用10个符号,这10个符号为第二个时隙起始的第1个符号到第10个符号。For example, FIG. 1 shows a schematic diagram of transmitting PUSCH in a Type-B manner in the related art. As shown in FIG. 1 , the PUSCH is transmitted in the first time slot and the second time slot, and both the first time slot and the second time slot include 14 symbols, wherein the first time slot includes 6 downlink symbols , 4 idle symbols, and 4 uplink symbols, where the uplink symbol refers to the symbol used for uplink transmission; the downlink signal refers to the symbol used for downlink transmission; the idle symbol, also known as the flexible symbol, or the interval signal, can be located between the uplink signal and the between downstream signals. The second time slot includes at least 10 consecutive upstream symbols, and the upstream symbols of the first time slot are adjacent to the upstream symbols of the second time slot. If S=10, L=14, that is, it starts from the 11th symbol in the first time slot and lasts for 14 symbols. Since the number of symbols in the first time slot is 14, the last 14 symbols are in the above-mentioned 14th symbol. 4 symbols are occupied in one time slot, and 10 symbols are occupied in the second time slot, and these 10 symbols are the 1st symbol to the 10th symbol at the beginning of the second time slot.
另外,在以Type-B的方式传输PUSCH中,可以配置PUSCH的传输次数中,在5G NR标准中引入了参数-重复传输次数(number Of Repetitions-r16),该参数一共有8个可配置值,由3比特(bit)指示,上述3bit的配置值依次对应{n1,n2,n3,n4,n7,n8,n12,n16},其中,n1表明PUSCH传输1次,n16表明PUSCH传输16次;PUSCH传输次数越多,可以纳入更多的符号,覆盖性能越好。相对应的,从第一个时隙的标识S的符号开始,在L*numberOfRepetitions-r16的符号范围内,所有可用的符号均用于PUSCH的重复传输,即可以让PUSCH的一次传输跨时隙,进而可以最大限度的利用资源。In addition, in the transmission of PUSCH in the way of Type-B, the number of PUSCH transmissions can be configured, and the parameter-number of repetitions-r16 is introduced in the 5G NR standard. This parameter has a total of 8 configurable values. , indicated by 3 bits (bit), the configuration values of the above 3 bits correspond to {n1, n2, n3, n4, n7, n8, n12, n16} in turn, where n1 indicates 1 PUSCH transmission, and n16 indicates 16 PUSCH transmissions; The more PUSCH transmission times, the more symbols can be included, and the better the coverage performance. Correspondingly, starting from the symbol of the identifier S of the first time slot, within the symbol range of L*numberOfRepetitions-r16, all available symbols are used for the repeated transmission of PUSCH, that is, a transmission of PUSCH can be made across time slots. , so as to maximize the use of resources.
(2)以Type-A的方式传输PUSCH:(2) Transmit PUSCH in Type-A mode:
与上述Type-B的方式可以让PUSCH的一次传输跨时隙不同,在以Type-A的方式传输 PUSCH时,由上述表1可知,Type-A的S+L是小于或等于14的,即PUSCH的一次传输限制在了一个时隙内,以Type-A的方式传输PUSCH不存在一次传输跨时隙的情况。相应的,当配置了以Type-A的方式多次传输PUSCH时,终端设备会对范围内的每个时隙进行检测,当某个时隙内标识S的符号以及该标识S的符号之后的L-1个符号均能用于传输PUSCH,即某个时隙内标识S的符号以及该标识S的符号之后的L-1个符号均未被其他传输占用,或者某个时隙内标识S的符号以及该标识S的符号之后的L-1个符号均不是下行符号,则可以在该时隙内进行PUSCH的这次传输,否则放弃该时隙内PUSCH的这次传输,继续判断其他时隙是否满足条件。Different from the above-mentioned Type-B method, which allows one transmission of PUSCH to span time slots, when PUSCH is transmitted in the Type-A method, it can be seen from the above Table 1 that the S+L of Type-A is less than or equal to 14, that is, One transmission of PUSCH is limited to one time slot, and there is no situation that one transmission spans time slots when PUSCH is transmitted in a Type-A manner. Correspondingly, when the PUSCH is configured to transmit PUSCH multiple times in the manner of Type-A, the terminal device will detect each time slot within the range. All L-1 symbols can be used to transmit PUSCH, that is, the symbol identifying S in a certain time slot and the L-1 symbols after the symbol identifying S are not occupied by other transmissions, or the symbol S in a certain time slot is not occupied by other transmissions. The symbol of S and the L-1 symbols after the symbol that identifies S are not downlink symbols, then this transmission of PUSCH can be performed in this time slot, otherwise this transmission of PUSCH in this time slot is abandoned, and the judgment of other times is continued. Whether the gap satisfies the condition.
四、关于PUCCH传输4. About PUCCH transmission
在5G NR标准中,引入了PUCCH的传输方式,在无线电资源控制(Radio Resource Control,RRC)中配置PUCCH资源包含以下三个参数:时隙数量(Number of Slots,nrofSlots)、符号数量(Number of symbols,nrofSymbols)、起始符号索引(startingSymbolIndex)。其中,nrofSlots表示PUCCH可配置的重复传输次数,包括2次、4次或者8次;nrofSymbols表示PUCCH的一次传输所占用的符号数,nrofSymbols可以类比成表1中的L,本申请实施例中为了表达简略也采用L标识,即采用L表示参数nrofSymbols;startingSymbolIndex表示一个时隙内PUCCH起始符号的编号,从0开始,其中,0表示该时隙内第一个符号,startingSymbolIndex与上述表1中的S功能相同。In the 5G NR standard, the PUCCH transmission method is introduced, and the configuration of PUCCH resources in Radio Resource Control (RRC) includes the following three parameters: the number of slots (Number of Slots, nrofSlots), the number of symbols (Number of Slots) symbols, nrofSymbols), starting symbol index (startingSymbolIndex). Among them, nrofSlots represents the number of configurable repeated transmissions of PUCCH, including 2, 4 or 8 times; nrofSymbols represents the number of symbols occupied by one transmission of PUCCH, and nrofSymbols can be analogous to L in Table 1. In this embodiment of the present application, in order to The abbreviated expression also uses the L mark, that is, L is used to represent the parameter nrofSymbols; startingSymbolIndex represents the number of the PUCCH starting symbol in a time slot, starting from 0, where 0 represents the first symbol in the time slot, and the startingSymbolIndex is the same as that in Table 1 above. The S function is the same.
其中,PUCCH的重复传输使用的是与上述以type A的方式传输PUSCH相同的判断方式,即在一个时隙内,startingSymbolIndex所标识的起始符号以及包括该起始符号及该起始符号之后的共nrofSymbols个符号均为能用于传输PUCCH的时候,即某个时隙内startingSymbolIndex所标识的起始符号以及包括该起始符号及之后的共nrofSymbols个符号均未被其他传输占用,或者某个时隙内startingSymbolIndex所标识的起始符号以及包括该起始符号及之后的共nrofSymbols个符号均不是下行符号,则可以在该时隙内进行PUCCH的这次传输,否则,放弃该时隙内PUCCH的这次传输。Among them, the repeated transmission of PUCCH uses the same judgment method as the above-mentioned transmission of PUSCH in the mode of type A, that is, in a time slot, the starting symbol identified by startingSymbolIndex and the starting symbol and the starting symbol after the starting symbol are used. When a total of nrofSymbols symbols can be used to transmit PUCCH, that is, the starting symbol identified by startingSymbolIndex in a certain time slot and the total nrofSymbols symbols including the starting symbol and the following are not occupied by other transmissions, or a certain If the start symbol identified by startingSymbolIndex in the time slot and the nrofSymbols symbols including the start symbol and the following are not downlink symbols, the PUCCH transmission can be performed in this time slot, otherwise, the PUCCH in this time slot is abandoned of this transmission.
针对上述在5G NR版本16(Release 16,Rel16)中提出的以Type-B的方式传输PUSCH,Type-B的传输方式比Type-A的传输方式能够更大限度的利用资源。Type-A的传输方式中只能在固定的时域位置上传输,如果该时域位置上的符号不可用,则这次传输被放弃,而Type-B的传输方式可以尽可能的利用所有的可用符号传输PUSCH。因此,许多公司考虑使用Type-B的方式传输PUCCH,从而最大限度的利用上行符号传输PUCCH,进而提高PUCCH的覆盖范围。For the above-mentioned transmission of PUSCH in Type-B mode proposed in 5G NR Release 16 (Release 16, Rel16), Type-B transmission mode can utilize resources to a greater extent than Type-A transmission mode. The Type-A transmission method can only transmit at a fixed time domain position. If the symbol at the time domain position is unavailable, the transmission is abandoned, while the Type-B transmission method can use all the symbols as much as possible. The PUSCH may be transmitted in symbols. Therefore, many companies consider using the Type-B method to transmit PUCCH, so as to maximize the use of uplink symbols to transmit PUCCH, thereby improving the coverage of PUCCH.
PUSCH在传输时,会在第一符号上配置DMRS。然而PUCCH format 3或format 4的结构中,DMRS一般配置在PUCCH跳频部分的中间位置。因此,如果采用现有Type-B的传输方式传输PUCCH format 3或format 4,在某些长度下,传输PUCCH的前几个符号(如前3个符号)都没有DMRS的相关配置。如果PUCCH在该时隙中的传输中仅有上述几个符号,而下一个时隙中存在下行符号,这就导致一段时域范围内没有可用的符号承载DMRS,即上述几个符号没有相应的DMRS解调信道,则这几个符号可能出现无法译码的问题。When the PUSCH is being transmitted, a DMRS will be configured on the first symbol. However, in the structure of PUCCH format 3 or format 4, the DMRS is generally configured in the middle of the PUCCH frequency hopping part. Therefore, if the existing Type-B transmission mode is used to transmit PUCCH format 3 or format 4, under certain lengths, the first few symbols (such as the first 3 symbols) of the transmitted PUCCH do not have the relevant configuration of DMRS. If there are only the above-mentioned symbols in the transmission of the PUCCH in this time slot, and there are downlink symbols in the next time slot, this results in that there are no available symbols to carry DMRS in a certain time domain, that is, the above-mentioned symbols do not have corresponding If the DMRS demodulates the channel, there may be a problem that these symbols cannot be decoded.
下面以常用的DDDSU时隙配比为例对相关技术中使用Type-B的方式传输PUCCH存在的一些符号没有相应的DMRS解调信道,则这些符号可能出现无法译码的问题进行说明,其中,D表示下行时隙、S表示特殊时隙、U表示上行时隙,下行时隙可以包括14个下行符号, 上行时隙可以包括14个上行符号,特殊时隙用于下行到上行的转换,特殊时隙可以包括14个符号,其中,特殊时隙中包括的14个符号中可以包括上行符号、下行符号及空闲符号。如果在某个上行时隙出现了没有DMRS的PUCCH的跳频部分,需要间隔长达3~4个时隙后才有可用的上行符号用于传输PUCCH,这么长的间隔,前后的DMRS均难以提供较高的检测性能。The following takes the commonly used DDDSU time slot ratio as an example to illustrate the problem that some symbols in the PUCCH using Type-B transmission in the related art do not have a corresponding DMRS demodulation channel, and these symbols may not be decoded. D represents downlink time slot, S represents special time slot, U represents uplink time slot, downlink time slot can include 14 downlink symbols, uplink time slot can include 14 uplink symbols, special time slot is used for downlink to uplink conversion, special The time slot may include 14 symbols, wherein the 14 symbols included in the special time slot may include uplink symbols, downlink symbols and idle symbols. If there is a frequency hopping part of PUCCH without DMRS in a certain uplink time slot, it takes 3 to 4 time slots before the available uplink symbols can be used to transmit PUCCH. With such a long interval, it is difficult for the DMRS before and after. Provides high detection performance.
结合图2对相关技术中采用Type-B的方式传输PUCCH存在的技术问题进行举例说明,图2示出相关技术中一种以Type-B的方式传输PUCCH的示意图,如图2所示,特殊时隙的配比为10:2:2,即特殊时隙包括10个下行符号、2个空闲符号及2个上行符号,startingSymbolIndex=12,即起始符号为特殊时隙的第13个符号,L=14,即PUCCH的一次传输的长度为14个符号,传输的PUCCH的格式为format 3或format 4,PUCCH包括两个跳频部分,每个跳频部分占用7个上行符号,DMRS配置在每个跳频部分的第4个符号上。With reference to Fig. 2, an example is given to illustrate the technical problems existing in the transmission of PUCCH by using Type-B in the related art. Fig. 2 shows a schematic diagram of transmitting PUCCH by Type-B in the related art. As shown in Fig. 2, a special The ratio of time slots is 10:2:2, that is, the special time slot includes 10 downlink symbols, 2 idle symbols and 2 uplink symbols, startingSymbolIndex=12, that is, the starting symbol is the 13th symbol of the special time slot, L=14, that is, the length of one transmission of PUCCH is 14 symbols, the format of the transmitted PUCCH is format 3 or format 4, PUCCH includes two frequency hopping parts, each frequency hopping part occupies 7 uplink symbols, DMRS is configured in On the 4th symbol of each frequency hopping part.
如图2所示,在PUCCH的一次传输的中,占用特殊时隙的第13-14个符号以及上行时隙的第1-12个符号,在PUCCH的下一次传输中,占用该上行时隙剩余的两个符号(图2中圆圈中的两个符号),即该上行时隙的第13-14个符号,DMRS没有配置在该上行时隙的第13个和/或第14个符号上,由于与该上行时隙相邻的后3个时隙均为下行时隙,直到接下来的第4个时隙才会出现用于传输PUCCH的上行符号,该PUCCH的下一次传输的第一个DMRS配置在了该第4个时隙的上行符号上,可以看出,该上行时隙的第13-14个符号所在时域位置附近没有DMRS供其解调使用,此时会出现上行时隙中的第13-14个符号无法被译码的问题。As shown in Figure 2, in one transmission of PUCCH, the 13-14th symbol of the special time slot and the 1-12th symbol of the uplink time slot are occupied. In the next transmission of PUCCH, the uplink time slot is occupied. The remaining two symbols (the two symbols in the circle in Figure 2), that is, the 13th to 14th symbols of the uplink time slot, the DMRS is not configured on the 13th and/or the 14th symbol of the uplink time slot , since the last three time slots adjacent to the uplink time slot are all downlink time slots, the uplink symbol used to transmit the PUCCH will not appear until the next fourth time slot, and the first time slot of the next transmission of the PUCCH will appear. The DMRS is configured on the uplink symbol of the fourth time slot. It can be seen that there is no DMRS for demodulation near the time domain position of the 13th to 14th symbols of the uplink time slot. The problem that the 13-14th symbols in the slot cannot be decoded.
结合图3对相关技术中采用Type-B的方式传输PUCCH存在的技术问题进行举例说明,图3示出相关技术中一种以Type-B的方式传输PUCCH的示意图,如图3所示,特殊时隙的配比为6:4:4,即特殊时隙包括6个下行符号、4个空闲符号及4个上行符号,startsymbolIndex=9,即起始符号为特殊时隙的第10个符号,L=12,即PUCCH的一次传输的长度为12个符号,传输的PUCCH的格式为format 3或format 4,PUCCH包括两个跳频部分,第一跳频部分占用1个空闲符号及5个上行符号,第二跳频部分占用6个上行符号,DMRS配置在每个跳频部分的第3个符号上。The technical problems existing in the transmission of PUCCH by using Type-B in the related art are illustrated with reference to FIG. 3 . FIG. 3 shows a schematic diagram of transmitting PUCCH in Type-B in the related art. As shown in FIG. 3 , the special The ratio of the time slots is 6:4:4, that is, the special time slot includes 6 downlink symbols, 4 idle symbols and 4 uplink symbols, startsymbolIndex=9, that is, the start symbol is the 10th symbol of the special time slot, L=12, that is, the length of one transmission of PUCCH is 12 symbols, the format of the transmitted PUCCH is format 3 or format 4, PUCCH includes two frequency hopping parts, the first frequency hopping part occupies 1 idle symbol and 5 uplinks symbol, the second frequency hopping part occupies 6 uplink symbols, and the DMRS is configured on the third symbol of each frequency hopping part.
如图3所示,在PUCCH的一次传输中,占用特殊时隙的第10-14个符号以及上行时隙的第1-7个符号,在PUCCH的下一次传输中,占用该上行时隙剩余的7个符号,即该上行时隙的第8-14个符号,其中,该下一次传输的PUCCH的第一跳频部分占用了该上行时隙的第8-13个符号,下一次传输的PUCCH的第二跳频部分占用了该上行时隙的第14个符号(图3中圆圈中的一个符号),DMRS没有配置在该上行时隙的第14个符号上;由于与该上行时隙相邻的后3个时隙均为下行时隙,直到接下来的第4个时隙才会出现用于传输PUCCH的上行符号,并配置了时隙内跳频,该PUCCH的下一次传输的第二跳频部分中第一个DMRS配置在了该第4个时隙的上行符号上,可以看出,在该上行时隙的第14个符号所在时域位置附近没有DMRS供其解调使用,此时会出现上行时隙中的第14个符号无法译码的问题。As shown in Figure 3, in one transmission of PUCCH, the 10th to 14th symbols of the special time slot and the 1st to 7th symbols of the uplink time slot are occupied. In the next transmission of PUCCH, the remainder of the uplink time slot is occupied. 7 symbols, that is, the 8-14th symbol of the uplink time slot, wherein the first frequency hopping part of the PUCCH in the next transmission occupies the 8th-13th symbol of the uplink time slot, and the next transmission The second frequency hopping part of the PUCCH occupies the 14th symbol of the uplink time slot (a symbol in the circle in Figure 3), and the DMRS is not configured on the 14th symbol of the uplink time slot; The last three adjacent time slots are all downlink time slots, and the uplink symbol for PUCCH transmission will not appear until the next fourth time slot, and the frequency hopping in the time slot is configured. The first DMRS in the second frequency hopping part is configured on the uplink symbol of the 4th time slot. It can be seen that there is no DMRS for demodulation near the time domain position of the 14th symbol of the uplink time slot. , the problem that the 14th symbol in the uplink time slot cannot be decoded occurs at this time.
结合图4对相关技术中采用Type-B的方式传输PUCCH存在的技术问题进行举例说明,图4示出相关技术中一种以Type-B的方式传输PUCCH的示意图,如图4所示,特殊时隙的配比为10:2:2,即特殊时隙包括10个下行符号、2个空闲符号及2个上行符号,startsymbolIndex=12,即起始符号为特殊时隙的第13个符号,L=14,即PUCCH的一次传输的 长度为14个符号,传输的PUCCH的格式为format 3或format 4,DMRS配置在PUCCH的第4个符号及第11个符号,在图4的情形中,PUCCH一次传输的内部没有配置跳频,在进行PUCCH的下一次传输时配置了跳频,图4中的与上述图2和图3均不同的另一种跳频方式,该跳频方式中,配置传输PUCCH时每14个符号跳频一次。With reference to Figure 4, the technical problems existing in the transmission of PUCCH using Type-B in the related art are exemplified. Figure 4 shows a schematic diagram of transmitting PUCCH in Type-B in the related art. The ratio of the time slots is 10:2:2, that is, the special time slot includes 10 downlink symbols, 2 idle symbols and 2 uplink symbols, startsymbolIndex=12, that is, the start symbol is the 13th symbol of the special time slot, L=14, that is, the length of one transmission of PUCCH is 14 symbols, the format of the transmitted PUCCH is format 3 or format 4, and the DMRS is configured on the 4th symbol and the 11th symbol of the PUCCH. In the situation of FIG. 4, No frequency hopping is configured in one transmission of PUCCH, and frequency hopping is configured in the next transmission of PUCCH. In FIG. 4, another frequency hopping mode is different from that in FIG. 2 and FIG. 3. In this frequency hopping mode, Frequency hopping once every 14 symbols is configured to transmit PUCCH.
如图4所示,在PUCCH的一次传输中,占用特殊时隙的第13-14个符号以及上行时隙的第1-12个符号,在PUCCH的下一次传输中,占用该上行时隙剩余的两个符号(图4中圆圈中的两个符号),即该上行时隙的第13-14个符号,DMRS没有配置在该上行时隙的第13个和/或第14个符号上;由于与该上行时隙相邻的下一个时隙中为下行时隙,可以看出,该上行时隙的第13-14个符号所在时域位置附近没有DMRS供其解调使用,由于图4中PUCCH配置每14个符号跳频一次,即在该上行时隙的第13-14个符号前面的至少14个符号所在的频域位置与该上行时隙的第13-14个符号所在的频域位置不同,相对于图2和图3中的场景,图4中的上行时隙中的第13-14个符号甚至没有前面的DMRS来参考,此时的上行时隙中的第13-14个符号属于完全无法译码的情况。As shown in Figure 4, in one transmission of PUCCH, the 13th to 14th symbols of the special time slot and the 1st to 12th symbols of the uplink time slot are occupied. In the next transmission of PUCCH, the remainder of the uplink time slot is occupied. The two symbols of (the two symbols in the circle in FIG. 4 ), that is, the 13th-14th symbols of the uplink time slot, and the DMRS is not configured on the 13th and/or the 14th symbol of the uplink time slot; Since the next time slot adjacent to the uplink time slot is a downlink time slot, it can be seen that there is no DMRS near the time domain position where the 13th to 14th symbols of this uplink time slot are located for its demodulation. In the PUCCH configuration, the frequency is hopped once every 14 symbols, that is, the frequency domain position of at least 14 symbols before the 13th to 14th symbols of the uplink time slot is the same as the frequency of the 13th to 14th symbols of the uplink time slot. The domain positions are different. Compared with the scenarios in Figure 2 and Figure 3, the 13th-14th symbols in the uplink time slot in Figure 4 do not even have the previous DMRS to refer to, and the 13th-14th symbols in the uplink time slot at this time symbols are completely undecipherable.
需要说明的是,本申请实施例以DDDSU时隙配比为例对相关技术中使用Type-B的方式传输PUCCH存在的上述技术问题进行说明,对其他时隙配比下存在的相同或相似问题不再赘述;可以理解的是,本申请实施例中以下技术方案依旧可以解决采用其他时隙配比的情况下,使用Type-B的方式传输PUCCH存在的部分符号上没有相应的DMRS解调信道,出现无法译码的问题。It should be noted that the embodiments of the present application take the DDDSU time slot allocation as an example to illustrate the above-mentioned technical problems existing in the related art using Type-B transmission of PUCCH, and the same or similar problems existing in other time slot allocations It is not repeated; it can be understood that the following technical solutions in the embodiments of the present application can still solve the problem that there is no corresponding DMRS demodulation channel on the part of the symbols where the PUCCH is transmitted in the Type-B manner when other time slot ratios are adopted. , there is a problem that cannot be decoded.
为了解决相关技术中采用Type-B的方式传输PUCCH时,在部分符号上没有相应的DMRS解调信道,出现无法译码的问题,本申请实施例提出了如下技术方案。其具体内容可参见下文。In order to solve the problem that there is no corresponding DMRS demodulation channel on some symbols when the PUCCH is transmitted in a Type-B manner in the related art, and thus cannot be decoded, the embodiments of the present application propose the following technical solutions. Its specific content can be found below.
为了更好地理解本申请实施例公开的技术方案,对本申请实施例使用的通信网络架构进行描述。图5示出根据本申请一实施例的通信网络架构的示意图,如图5所述,该通信网络架构可以包括:终端设备501和网络设备502,终端设备501和网络设备502之间可以通过无线网络连接。终端设备501发送给网络设备502的信号传输被称为上行传输,网络设备502发送给终端设备501的信号传输被称为下行传输。其中,上行传输主要包括两类信号传输,一类是PUCCH的信号传输,承载的是上行控制信息(Uplink control information,UCI);另一类是PUSCH的信号传输,承载的是上行数据和/或上行控制信息,主要包含了与控制有关的信息,比如回复确认(Acknowledge,ACK)或否定确认(Negative Acknowledgement,NACK),或者传输上行信道状态信息,或者承载调度请求等。需要说明的是,图5仅为一个网络架构示意图,本申请实施例中对通信网络架构中网络设备的数量、终端设备的数量不作限定。In order to better understand the technical solutions disclosed in the embodiments of the present application, the communication network architecture used in the embodiments of the present application is described. FIG. 5 shows a schematic diagram of a communication network architecture according to an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 5 , the communication network architecture may include: a terminal device 501 and a network device 502 , and the terminal device 501 and the network device 502 may communicate with each other through wireless Internet connection. The signal transmission sent by the terminal device 501 to the network device 502 is called uplink transmission, and the signal transmission sent by the network device 502 to the terminal device 501 is called downlink transmission. Among them, uplink transmission mainly includes two types of signal transmission, one is PUCCH signal transmission, which carries uplink control information (Uplink control information, UCI); the other is PUSCH signal transmission, which carries uplink data and/or The uplink control information mainly includes control-related information, such as acknowledgement (Acknowledge, ACK) or negative acknowledgement (Negative Acknowledgement, NACK), or transmission of uplink channel state information, or bearer scheduling requests, etc. It should be noted that FIG. 5 is only a schematic diagram of a network architecture, and the number of network devices and the number of terminal devices in the communication network architecture are not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
本申请实施例提供的技术方案可以应用于各种通信系统,例如,采用第5G NR的通信系统,未来演进系统或者多种通信融合系统等等。考虑Uu(UTRAN-to-UE)空口传输,无线通信的双方包括网络设备和终端设备;考虑SL空口传输,无线通信的收发端都是终端设备。本申请实施例提供的技术方案可以应用于多种应用场景,例如,机器对机器(machine to machine,M2M)、宏微通信、增强型移动互联网(enhanced mobile broadband,eMBB)、超高可靠超低时延通信(ultra-reliable & low latency communication,uRLLC)以及海量物联网通信(massive machine type communication,mMTC)等场景。The technical solutions provided in the embodiments of this application can be applied to various communication systems, for example, a communication system using the 5G NR, a future evolution system, or a variety of communication fusion systems, and so on. Considering Uu (UTRAN-to-UE) air interface transmission, both sides of wireless communication include network equipment and terminal equipment; considering SL air interface transmission, both transceivers of wireless communication are terminal equipment. The technical solutions provided in the embodiments of this application can be applied to various application scenarios, for example, machine to machine (M2M), macro-micro communication, enhanced mobile broadband (eMBB), ultra-reliable and ultra-low Delay communication (ultra-reliable & low latency communication, uRLLC) and massive IoT communication (massive machine type communication, mMTC) and other scenarios.
在图5中,终端设备501可以是一种具有无线收发功能的设备。终端设备可以是静止的, 也可以是移动的;终端设备可以被部署在陆地上,包括室内或室外、手持或车载;也可以被部署在水面上(如轮船等);还可以被部署在空中(例如飞机、气球和卫星上等)。终端设备可以是用户设备(user equipment,UE)。其中,UE包括具有无线通信功能的手持式设备、车辆、车载设备、可穿戴设备或计算设备。示例性地,UE可以是手机(mobile phone)、平板电脑或带无线收发功能的电脑。终端设备还可以是虚拟现实(virtual reality,VR)终端设备、增强现实(augmented reality,AR)终端设备、工业控制中的无线终端、无人驾驶中的无线终端、远程医疗中的无线终端、智能电网中的无线终端、智慧城市(smart city)中的无线终端、智慧家庭(smart home)中的无线终端等等。本申请实施例中,用于实现终端的功能的装置可以是终端设备,也可以是能够支持终端设备实现该功能的装置,例如芯片系统。本申请实施例中,芯片系统可以由芯片构成,也可以包括芯片和其他分立器件。In FIG. 5 , the terminal device 501 may be a device with a wireless transceiving function. Terminal equipment can be stationary or mobile; terminal equipment can be deployed on land, including indoor or outdoor, hand-held or vehicle-mounted; it can also be deployed on water (such as ships, etc.); it can also be deployed in the air (eg airplanes, balloons, and satellites, etc.). The terminal equipment may be user equipment (user equipment, UE). The UE includes a handheld device, a vehicle, an in-vehicle device, a wearable device or a computing device with a wireless communication function. Exemplarily, the UE may be a mobile phone, a tablet computer, or a computer with a wireless transceiver function. The terminal device may also be a virtual reality (VR) terminal device, an augmented reality (AR) terminal device, a wireless terminal in industrial control, a wireless terminal in unmanned driving, a wireless terminal in telemedicine, intelligent Wireless terminals in power grids, wireless terminals in smart cities, wireless terminals in smart homes, and so on. In this embodiment of the present application, the apparatus for implementing the function of the terminal may be a terminal device, or may be an apparatus capable of supporting the terminal device to implement the function, such as a chip system. In this embodiment of the present application, the chip system may be composed of chips, or may include chips and other discrete devices.
在图5中,网络设备502可以是无线通信的基站或基站控制器等。例如,所述基站可以包括各种类型的基站,例如:微基站(也称为小站),宏基站,中继站,接入点等,网络设备在传统UMTS/LTE(Universal Mobile Telecommunications System,通用移动通信系统/Long Term Evolution,长期演进)无线通信系统中可以是传统宏基站eNB(evolved node B),在HetNet(Heterogeneous Network,异构网络)场景下可以是微基站eNB,在分布式基站场景可以是基带处理单元BBU(Base Band Unit,基带单元)和射频单元RRU(Remote Radio Unit,射频拉远单元),在CRAN(Cloud Radio Access Netowrk,云无线接入网)场景下可以是基带池BBU pool和射频单元RRU,在未来无线通信系统中可以是gNB。本申请实施例中,用于实现网络设备的功能的装置可以是网络设备,也可以是能够支持网络设备实现该功能的装置,例如芯片系统。In FIG. 5, the network device 502 may be a base station or a base station controller or the like for wireless communication. For example, the base station may include various types of base stations, such as: micro base station (also called small cell), macro base station, relay station, access point, etc., network equipment in traditional UMTS/LTE (Universal Mobile Telecommunications System, Universal Mobile Communication system/Long Term Evolution) wireless communication system can be a traditional macro base station eNB (evolved node B), in a HetNet (Heterogeneous Network, heterogeneous network) scenario, it can be a micro base station eNB, in a distributed base station scenario, it can be It is the baseband processing unit BBU (Base Band Unit, baseband unit) and the radio frequency unit RRU (Remote Radio Unit, radio frequency remote unit), in the CRAN (Cloud Radio Access Netowrk, cloud wireless access network) scenario can be the baseband pool BBU pool. and the radio frequency unit RRU, which may be a gNB in future wireless communication systems. In this embodiment of the present application, the apparatus for implementing the function of the network device may be the network device, or may be an apparatus capable of supporting the network device to implement the function, such as a chip system.
图6示出根据本申请一实施例的一种上行控制信道的传输方法的流程图,该方法可以应用于以Type-B的方式传输PUCCH的场景,如图6所示,该方法可以包括以下步骤:FIG. 6 shows a flowchart of a method for transmitting an uplink control channel according to an embodiment of the present application. The method can be applied to a scenario where PUCCH is transmitted in a Type-B manner. As shown in FIG. 6 , the method may include the following step:
步骤601、终端设备接收来自网络设备的配置信息或指示信息,配置信息或指示信息用于配置或指示终端设备发送第一PUCCH,第一PUCCH的传输长度为L个符号,第一PUCCH的传输次数为N,N为大于或等于1的整数,L为大于或等于1的整数;Step 601, the terminal device receives configuration information or indication information from the network device, the configuration information or the indication information is used to configure or instruct the terminal device to send the first PUCCH, the transmission length of the first PUCCH is L symbols, and the number of transmissions of the first PUCCH is is N, N is an integer greater than or equal to 1, and L is an integer greater than or equal to 1;
可选的,第一PUCCH的格式可以为format 3或format 4,L的取值为大于或等于4且小于或等于14的任一整数。Optionally, the format of the first PUCCH may be format 3 or format 4, and the value of L is any integer greater than or equal to 4 and less than or equal to 14.
步骤602、终端设备根据预设条件确定是否在X个符号上传输第一PUCCH;X个符号位于第一时隙,且X个符号用于传输第一PUCCH。Step 602: The terminal device determines whether to transmit the first PUCCH on X symbols according to a preset condition; the X symbols are located in the first time slot, and the X symbols are used to transmit the first PUCCH.
示例性的,当X小于L时,则第一PUCCH需要跨时隙传输,此时可以根据预设条件,确定是否在X个符号上传输第一PUCCH,从而避免无法译码的情况。Exemplarily, when X is less than L, the first PUCCH needs to be transmitted across time slots, and at this time, it can be determined whether to transmit the first PUCCH on X symbols according to a preset condition, so as to avoid the situation that cannot be decoded.
其中,第一时隙可以包括14个符号,第一时隙可以为上行时隙,也可以为特殊时隙,还可以为包括上行符号的其他时隙,本申请实施例对此不作限制。可选的,终端设备基于配置信息或指示信息用于配置或指示在除X个符号外的其他符号上传输第一PUCCH,网络设备接收到第一PUCCH后,可以根据第一PUCCH的DMRS,测量承载UCI的符号上的信道信息,然后用承载UCI的符号接收到的信号除以测量得到的对应的信道信息并进行译码,从而得到上行控制信息。The first time slot may include 14 symbols, and the first time slot may be an uplink time slot, a special time slot, or other time slot including uplink symbols, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application. Optionally, the terminal device is configured or instructed to transmit the first PUCCH on symbols other than X symbols based on the configuration information or the indication information. After receiving the first PUCCH, the network device may measure the value of the The channel information on the symbol carrying the UCI is then divided by the corresponding channel information measured and obtained by dividing the signal received by the symbol carrying the UCI and decoding, so as to obtain the uplink control information.
可以理解的是,X个符号是一个时隙内,用来传输第一PUCCH的所有符号,且不包括承载DRMS的符号;例如上述图2所示的,X个符号为上行时隙的第13个和第14个符号(图 2中圆圈中所示的两个符号)。为了方便描述,后续各实施例所指的X个符号与本实施例X个符号的定义相同。It can be understood that the X symbols are used to transmit all the symbols of the first PUCCH in one time slot, and do not include the symbols that carry DRMS; for example, as shown in FIG. 2 above, the X symbols are the 13th symbol of the uplink time slot. and 14th symbols (two symbols shown in circles in Figure 2). For the convenience of description, the definitions of the X symbols referred to in the subsequent embodiments are the same as the definitions of the X symbols in this embodiment.
本申请实施例中,终端设备基于配置信息或指示信息在X个符号传输第一PUCCH时,可知X个符号不包括承载DMRS的符号,则X个符号可能存在没有相应的DMRS解调信道,出现无法译码的情况,终端设备根据预设条件确定在X个符号上不传输第一PUCCH,从而避免了这X个符号无法译码的情况。In the embodiment of the present application, when the terminal device transmits the first PUCCH in X symbols based on the configuration information or the indication information, it can be known that the X symbols do not include symbols carrying DMRS, then the X symbols may have no corresponding DMRS demodulation channel, and there may be In the case of inability to decode, the terminal device determines not to transmit the first PUCCH on X symbols according to a preset condition, thereby avoiding the situation that the X symbols cannot be decoded.
可选的,终端设备根据配置信息或指示信息确定X个符号;示例性的,终端设备可以根据第一PUCCH的传输长度L、起始符号及传输次数N等确定X个符号。例如,以上述图2中传输的PUCCH为第一PUCCH来说明,第一PUCCH的传输长度L=14,起始符号为特殊时隙的第13个符号,传输次数为N=2,第一PUCCH的第一次传输占用特殊时隙内的第13-14个符号以及上行时隙的第1-12个符号,第一PUCCH的第一次传输占用上行时隙内的第13-14个符号以及该上行时隙之后的12个上行符号;若取该特殊时隙为第一时隙,则,X个符号即为该特殊时隙内的第13-14个符号,若取该上行时隙为第一时隙,则,X个符号即为该上行时隙内的第13-14个符号。Optionally, the terminal device determines X symbols according to configuration information or indication information; exemplarily, the terminal device may determine X symbols according to the transmission length L of the first PUCCH, the start symbol, and the number of transmissions N. For example, taking the PUCCH transmitted in the above-mentioned FIG. 2 as the first PUCCH, the transmission length of the first PUCCH is L=14, the start symbol is the thirteenth symbol of the special time slot, the number of transmissions is N=2, and the first PUCCH is The first transmission of the first PUCCH occupies the 13-14th symbol in the special time slot and the 1-12th symbol in the uplink time slot, and the first transmission of the first PUCCH occupies the 13th-14th symbol in the uplink time slot and The 12 uplink symbols after the uplink time slot; if the special time slot is taken as the first time slot, then X symbols are the 13th to 14th symbols in the special time slot, and if the uplink time slot is taken as In the first time slot, the X symbols are the 13th to 14th symbols in the uplink time slot.
可选的,终端设备可以配置第一PUCCH使能跳频,也可以不使能跳频,其中,第一PUCCH使能跳频的含义为:根据预先定义的方式,第一PUCCH在时域上分为两个部分时域长度,即两个跳频部分,每个跳频部分在不同的频域资源上传输;例如,第一PUCCH的时域长度L为14个符号,当第一PUCCH跳频时,这14个符号的第一PUCCH会被分为长度均为7个符号的两个跳频部分,这两个长度均为7个符号的跳频部分分别在不同的频域位置上传输。其中,频域位置可以是一个或多个资源块(resource block,RB),也可以是一个或多个资源单元(resource element,RE),也可以是一个或多个载波/小区,也可以是一个或多个部分带宽(bandwidth part,BWP),也可以是一个或多个载波上的一个或多个BWP上的一个或多个RB,也可以是一个或多个载波上的一个或多个BWP上的一个或多个RB上的一个或多个RE。Optionally, the terminal device may configure the first PUCCH to enable frequency hopping, or not to enable frequency hopping, where the meaning of enabling frequency hopping for the first PUCCH is: according to a predefined manner, the first PUCCH is in the time domain. It is divided into two parts of time domain length, that is, two frequency hopping parts, and each frequency hopping part is transmitted on different frequency domain resources; for example, the time domain length L of the first PUCCH is 14 symbols, when the first PUCCH hops During frequency, the first PUCCH of the 14 symbols will be divided into two frequency hopping parts with a length of 7 symbols, and the two frequency hopping parts with a length of 7 symbols are respectively transmitted in different frequency domain positions . The frequency domain location may be one or more resource blocks (RBs), one or more resource elements (REs), one or more carriers/cells, or One or more bandwidth parts (BWP), which can also be one or more RBs on one or more BWPs on one or more carriers, or one or more RBs on one or more carriers One or more REs on one or more RBs on the BWP.
下面结合附图,对图6中实施例中步骤602终端设备根据预设条件确定是否在X个符号上传输第一PUCCH的技术方案进行进一步说明。The technical solution for determining whether to transmit the first PUCCH on X symbols according to a preset condition in step 602 in the embodiment in FIG. 6 will be further described below with reference to the technical solution.
在一种可能的实现方式中,当X个符号所在的频域位置与第一时隙及第二时隙内的任一承载DMRS的符号所在的频域位置不同时,终端设备确定在X符号上不传输第一PUCCH;其中,第一时隙与第二时隙相邻。In a possible implementation manner, when the frequency domain position where the X symbols are located is different from the frequency domain position where any DMRS-bearing symbol in the first time slot and the second time slot is located, the terminal device determines that the X symbol is located in the frequency domain position. The first PUCCH is not transmitted; wherein the first time slot is adjacent to the second time slot.
其中,第二时隙可以为第一时隙的前一个时隙,也可以为第一时隙的后一个时隙,还可以同时包括第一时隙的前一个时隙和第一时隙的后一个时隙。第一时隙的前一个时隙可以包括下行时隙、上行时隙、特殊时隙中的任意一个,第一时隙的后一个时隙可以包括下行时隙、上行时隙、特殊时隙中的任意一个;例如,第一时隙可以为上行时隙,与该一个时隙相邻的上一个时隙可以为特殊时隙,与该一个时隙相邻的下一个时隙可以为下行时隙。Wherein, the second time slot may be a time slot before the first time slot, or may be a time slot after the first time slot, and may also include both the time slot before the first time slot and the time slot of the first time slot. the next time slot. The previous time slot of the first time slot may include any one of the downlink time slot, the uplink time slot, and the special time slot, and the time slot after the first time slot may include the downlink time slot, the uplink time slot, and the special time slot. For example, the first time slot can be an uplink time slot, the previous time slot adjacent to this one time slot can be a special time slot, and the next time slot adjacent to this one time slot can be a downlink time slot gap.
本申请实施例中,终端设备根据配置信息或指示信息可知X个符号不包括承载DMRS的符号,当第一时隙及第二时隙内的承载DMRS的符号所在的频域位置均与X个符号所在的频域位置不同时,可知X个符号附近至少一个时隙的时域范围内,没有相应的DMRS用于解调信道,终端设备确定在X符号上不传输第一PUCCH,从而避免出现这X个符号无法译码的问题。In the embodiment of the present application, the terminal device knows, according to the configuration information or the indication information, that the X symbols do not include the symbols carrying DMRS, and when the frequency domain positions of the symbols carrying DMRS in the first time slot and the second time slot are the same as the X symbols When the frequency domain positions of the symbols are different, it can be known that within the time domain range of at least one time slot near the X symbols, there is no corresponding DMRS for demodulating the channel, and the terminal equipment determines not to transmit the first PUCCH on the X symbols, so as to avoid the occurrence of The problem that the X symbols cannot be decoded.
示例性地,X个符号均为承载UCI的符号,第一时隙为上行时隙,在X个符号所在的该 上行时隙中除X个符号之外的其他符号所在的频域位置均与X个符号所在的频域位置不同;该上行时隙的上一个时隙是特殊时隙,且该特殊时隙中的上行符号所在的频域位置均与X个符号所在的频域位置不同;该上行时隙的下一个时隙是下行时隙;此时,这X个符号所在的上行时隙及与该上行时隙相邻的特殊时隙和下行时隙内,X个符号所在的频域位置中不包括DMRS,终端设备确定在X符号上不传输所述第一PUCCH。Exemplarily, the X symbols are symbols that carry UCI, the first time slot is an uplink time slot, and the frequency domain positions of the other symbols except the X symbols in the uplink time slot where the X symbols are located are the same as the one. The frequency domain positions of the X symbols are different; the previous time slot of the uplink time slot is a special time slot, and the frequency domain positions of the uplink symbols in the special time slot are all different from the frequency domain positions of the X symbols; The next time slot of the uplink time slot is the downlink time slot; at this time, in the uplink time slot where the X symbols are located, the special time slot and the downlink time slot adjacent to the uplink time slot, the frequency where the X symbols are located The domain location does not include DMRS, and the terminal device determines not to transmit the first PUCCH on the X symbol.
举例来说,下面以上述图4中跳频方式配置为每14个符号跳频一次的场景进行说明。图7示出根据本申请一实施例的一种上行控制信道的传输方法的示意图;如图7所示,第一时隙所在的一个时隙为上行时隙,该上行时隙的上一个时隙为特殊时隙,该上行时隙的下一个时隙是下行时隙;其中,特殊时隙的配比为10:2:2,startsymbolIndex=12,,L=14,传输的第一PUCCH的格式为format 3或format 4,DMRS配置在一次传输的第一PUCCH的第4个符号及第11个符号;X个符号包括该上行时隙内第13和第14个符号,且该第13和第14个符号均为承载UCI的符号;该上行时隙内第1-12个符号所在的频域位置与第13和第14个符号所在的频域位置不同;该特殊时隙内的两个上行符号为承载UCI的符号,且所在的频域位置与上行时隙内第13和第14个符号不同;在图7中的特殊时隙、上行时隙及下行时隙内,该上行时隙内第13和第14个符号所在的频域位置不包括DMRS,此时,该上行时隙内第13和第14个符号没有相应的DMRS解调信道,终端设备确定在该上行时隙内的第13和第14个符号上不传输第一PUCCH。For example, the following description will be given by taking a scenario in which the frequency hopping manner in FIG. 4 is configured as frequency hopping once every 14 symbols. FIG. 7 shows a schematic diagram of a method for transmitting an uplink control channel according to an embodiment of the present application; as shown in FIG. 7 , a time slot where the first time slot is located is an uplink time slot, and the last time slot of the uplink time slot is an uplink time slot. The slot is a special time slot, and the next time slot of the uplink time slot is a downlink time slot; wherein, the ratio of the special time slot is 10:2:2, startsymbolIndex=12, L=14, and the first PUCCH of the transmission is The format is format 3 or format 4, and the DMRS is configured in the 4th symbol and the 11th symbol of the first PUCCH transmitted once; the X symbols include the 13th and 14th symbols in the uplink time slot, and the 13th and 14th symbols The 14th symbol is the symbol carrying UCI; the frequency domain positions of the 1-12th symbols in this uplink time slot are different from the frequency domain positions of the 13th and 14th symbols; The uplink symbol is the symbol that carries UCI, and its frequency domain position is different from the 13th and 14th symbols in the uplink time slot; in the special time slot, uplink time slot and downlink time slot in Figure 7, the uplink time slot The 13th and 14th symbols in the frequency domain do not include DMRS. At this time, the 13th and 14th symbols in the uplink time slot do not have corresponding DMRS demodulation channels. The first PUCCH is not transmitted on the 13th and 14th symbols.
在一种可能的实现方式中,当X个符号与第一符号之间间隔超过第一阈值时,终端设备确定在X个符号上不传输所述第一PUCCH;其中,第一符号为位于所述X个符号之后的第一个承载DMRS的符号。In a possible implementation manner, when the interval between the X symbols and the first symbol exceeds a first threshold, the terminal device determines not to transmit the first PUCCH on the X symbols; wherein the first symbol is located in the The first symbol after the X symbols carries the DMRS.
其中,第一阈值可以为M个时隙,其中,M为大于或等于1的整数;例如,M取2,则第一阈值为2个时隙,在X个符号与第一符号之间间隔超过2个时隙的情况下,终端设备确定在X个符号上不传输第一PUCCH。示例性地,当X的取值大于等于2时,可以在X个符号中任一符号与第一符号之间间隔超过2个时隙的情况下,或者在X个符号中最后一个符号与第一符号之间间隔超过2个时隙的情况下,终端设备确定在X个符号上不传输第一PUCCH。可以理解的是,第一阈值可以是预定义的,也可以是由基站配置的。本申请实施例对第一阈值的确定方式不做限定。The first threshold may be M time slots, where M is an integer greater than or equal to 1; for example, if M is 2, the first threshold is 2 time slots, and the interval between X symbols and the first symbol In the case of more than 2 time slots, the terminal device determines not to transmit the first PUCCH on X symbols. Exemplarily, when the value of X is greater than or equal to 2, in the case that the interval between any one of the X symbols and the first symbol is more than 2 time slots, or when the last symbol of the X symbols is the same as the first symbol. When the interval between one symbol exceeds 2 time slots, the terminal device determines not to transmit the first PUCCH on X symbols. It can be understood that the first threshold may be predefined or configured by the base station. This embodiment of the present application does not limit the manner of determining the first threshold.
本申请实施例中,终端设备根据配置信息或指示信息可知X个符号不包括承载DMRS的符号,当X个符号与第一符号之间间隔超过第一阈值时,可知X个符号附近在第一阈值的时域范围内,没有相应的DMRS用于解调信道,终端设备确定在X符号上不传输第一PUCCH,从而避免出现这X个符号无法译码的问题。In this embodiment of the present application, the terminal device knows, according to the configuration information or the indication information, that the X symbols do not include symbols carrying DMRS, and when the interval between the X symbols and the first symbol exceeds the first threshold, it can be known that the X symbols are near the first symbol Within the time domain range of the threshold, there is no corresponding DMRS for demodulating the channel, and the terminal device determines not to transmit the first PUCCH on the X symbols, thereby avoiding the problem that the X symbols cannot be decoded.
举例来说,图8示出根据本申请一实施例的一种上行控制信道的传输方法的示意图,如图8所示,设第一阈值为2个时隙,第一时隙为上行时隙,下一承载DMRS的符号所在的时隙为特殊时隙,其中,特殊时隙的配比为6:4:4,L=12,传输的第一PUCCH的格式为format 3或format 4,第一PUCCH包括两个跳频部分,DMRS配置在每个跳频部分的第3个符号上;X个符号包括该上行时隙的第14个符号,且该第14个符号为承载UCI的符号,该上行时隙的相邻的后面三个时隙均为下行时隙,第四个时隙为特殊时隙,该特殊时隙的第11个符号即为下一承载DMRS的符号,此时,该特殊时隙的第11个符号与上行时隙的第14个符号间隔为3个下行时隙和10个符号,间隔大于2个时隙,此时,上行时隙的第14个符号没有相应 的DMRS解调信道,终端设备确定在该上行时隙内的第14个符号上不传输第一PUCCH。For example, FIG. 8 shows a schematic diagram of a method for transmitting an uplink control channel according to an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 8 , the first threshold is set to be 2 time slots, and the first time slot is an uplink time slot , the time slot where the symbol carrying the DMRS is located is a special time slot, wherein the ratio of the special time slot is 6:4:4, L=12, the format of the first PUCCH transmitted is format 3 or format 4, and the first PUCCH is format 3 or format 4. A PUCCH includes two frequency hopping parts, and the DMRS is configured on the 3rd symbol of each frequency hopping part; the X symbols include the 14th symbol of the uplink time slot, and the 14th symbol is a symbol carrying UCI, The next three adjacent time slots of the uplink time slot are all downlink time slots, the fourth time slot is a special time slot, and the 11th symbol of the special time slot is the next symbol that carries the DMRS. At this time, The interval between the 11th symbol of the special time slot and the 14th symbol of the uplink time slot is 3 downlink time slots and 10 symbols, and the interval is greater than 2 time slots. At this time, the 14th symbol of the uplink time slot has no corresponding DMRS demodulation channel, the terminal equipment determines not to transmit the first PUCCH on the 14th symbol in the uplink time slot.
在一种可能的实现方式中,当X小于或等于第二阈值时,终端设备确定在X个符号上不传输第一PUCCH;其中,第二阈值根据长度L、DMRS配置方式、第一PUCCH格式以及第一PUCCH的跳频方式中的至少其中之一确定。In a possible implementation manner, when X is less than or equal to the second threshold, the terminal device determines not to transmit the first PUCCH on X symbols; wherein the second threshold is based on the length L, the DMRS configuration, the first PUCCH format and at least one of the frequency hopping modes of the first PUCCH is determined.
可以理解的是,第二阈值可以是预定义的,也可以是由基站配置的。本申请实施例对第二阈值的确定方式不做限定。It can be understood that, the second threshold may be predefined or configured by the base station. This embodiment of the present application does not limit the manner of determining the second threshold.
本申请实施例中,第二阈值可以根据第一PUCCH长度L、DMRS配置方式、第一PUCCH格式以及第一PUCCH的跳频方式中的至少其中之一确定,其中,第一PUCCH格式可以包括format 3或format 4,第一PUCCH长度L可以包括第一PUCCH的不同格式对应的长度,例如,第一PUCCH format 3的长度或第一PUCCH format 4的长度;DMRS配置方式可以包括额外DMRS和无额外DMRS,第一PUCCH的跳频方式可以包括时隙内跳频和时隙内不跳频。In this embodiment of the present application, the second threshold may be determined according to at least one of the first PUCCH length L, the DMRS configuration mode, the first PUCCH format, and the frequency hopping mode of the first PUCCH, where the first PUCCH format may include format 3 or format 4, the first PUCCH length L may include lengths corresponding to different formats of the first PUCCH, for example, the length of the first PUCCH format 3 or the length of the first PUCCH format 4; the DMRS configuration mode may include additional DMRS and no additional For DMRS, the frequency hopping manner of the first PUCCH may include frequency hopping within a time slot and no frequency hopping within a time slot.
本申请实施例中,终端设备根据配置信息或指示信息可知X个符号不包括承载DMRS的符号,对于第一PUCCH format 3或第一PUCCH format 4,DMRS通常配置在第一PUCCH各跳频部分的中间时域位置,可知X个符号包括第一PUCCH各跳频部分中靠前的几个符号或靠后的几个符号,当X小于或等于第二阈值时,X的值越小,则X个符号与附近的承载DMRS的符号在时域范围内相隔越远,因此,当X小于或等于第二阈值时,终端设备确定在X个符号上不传输第一PUCCH,,从而避免出现这X个符号无法译码的问题。In this embodiment of the present application, the terminal device knows, according to the configuration information or the indication information, that the X symbols do not include the symbols that carry the DMRS. For the first PUCCH format 3 or the first PUCCH format 4, the DMRS is usually configured in each frequency hopping part of the first PUCCH. In the middle time domain position, it can be known that the X symbols include the first several symbols or the following several symbols in each frequency hopping part of the first PUCCH. When X is less than or equal to the second threshold, the smaller the value of X is, the smaller the value of X is. Therefore, when X is less than or equal to the second threshold, the terminal device determines not to transmit the first PUCCH on X symbols, so as to avoid the occurrence of X symbols A symbol cannot be decoded.
示例性地,针对第一PUCCH format 3和第一PUCCH format 4,给出了这两种格式中不同第一PUCCH长度,额外DMRS和无额外DMRS两种DMRS配置方式,以及两种跳频方式下第二阈值的数值,如表2所示。表2中“PUCCH长度”表示第一PUCCH format 3和format4不同的长度数值,具体取值为4-14的整数;“无额外DMRS”表示第一PUCCH中未配置额外DMRS,“额外DMRS”表示第一PUCCH中配置额外DMRS,“不跳频”表示第一PUCCH不使能跳频,“跳频”表示第一PUCCH使能跳频。表2中“0”表示第二阈值取值为0,代表的无需放弃第一PUCCH的传输。Exemplarily, for the first PUCCH format 3 and the first PUCCH format 4, different first PUCCH lengths in these two formats, two DMRS configuration modes with additional DMRS and no additional DMRS, and two frequency hopping modes are given. The value of the second threshold is shown in Table 2. In Table 2, "PUCCH length" indicates the length value of the first PUCCH format 3 and format 4 different, and the specific value is an integer from 4 to 14; "no additional DMRS" indicates that no additional DMRS is configured in the first PUCCH, and "additional DMRS" indicates that An additional DMRS is configured in the first PUCCH, "No frequency hopping" indicates that frequency hopping is not enabled on the first PUCCH, and "frequency hopping" indicates that frequency hopping is enabled for the first PUCCH. "0" in Table 2 indicates that the second threshold value is 0, which means that the transmission of the first PUCCH does not need to be abandoned.
表2-第一PUCCH format 3和format 4中第二阈值取值Table 2 - The second threshold value in the first PUCCH format 3 and format 4
Figure PCTCN2021115721-appb-000004
Figure PCTCN2021115721-appb-000004
Figure PCTCN2021115721-appb-000005
Figure PCTCN2021115721-appb-000005
需要说明的是,第一PUCCH可能使能时隙内跳频,因此,如果第一PUCCH的两个跳频部分长度不同,可能第二阈值的数值也不同,从而在表2中的“跳频”列出现“1,1”等两个数值,分别对应两个跳频部分。It should be noted that the first PUCCH may enable intra-slot frequency hopping. Therefore, if the lengths of the two frequency hopping parts of the first PUCCH are different, the value of the second threshold may also be different. ” column appears “1, 1” and other values, corresponding to the two frequency hopping parts respectively.
本申请实施例中,X个符号不包括承载DMRS的符号,当第一PUCCH的长度L及第一PUCCH格式满足表2中某一PUCCH长度时,根据DMRS配置方式及跳频方式确定第二阈值的具体数值,在X的数值小于或等于第二阈值的情况下,这X个符号没有相应的DMRS解调信道,终端设备确定在X符号上不传输第一PUCCH,从而避免出现这X个符号无法译码的问题。In this embodiment of the present application, the X symbols do not include symbols bearing DMRS, and when the length L of the first PUCCH and the format of the first PUCCH satisfy a certain PUCCH length in Table 2, the second threshold is determined according to the DMRS configuration mode and the frequency hopping mode When the value of X is less than or equal to the second threshold, the X symbols do not have a corresponding DMRS demodulation channel, and the terminal device determines not to transmit the first PUCCH on the X symbols, so as to avoid the occurrence of these X symbols Unable to decode problem.
举例来说,图9示出根据本申请一实施例的一种上行控制信道的传输方法的示意图,如图9所示,L=14、startsymbolIndex=12,传输的第一PUCCH的格式为format 3或format 4,第一PUCCH使能时隙内跳频,DMRS配置方式为无额外DMRS;X个符号包括上行时隙的第13和第14个符号,即X的数值为2,且该第13和第14个符号均为承载UCI的符号;通过查表2可得,第二阈值的取值为3,由于X的数值小于第二阈值,终端设备确定在该上行时隙的第13和第14个符号上不传输第一PUCCH。For example, FIG. 9 shows a schematic diagram of a method for transmitting an uplink control channel according to an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 9 , L=14, startsymbolIndex=12, and the format of the first PUCCH transmitted is format 3 Or format 4, the first PUCCH enables frequency hopping in the time slot, and the DMRS configuration mode is no additional DMRS; the X symbols include the 13th and 14th symbols of the uplink time slot, that is, the value of X is 2, and the 13th symbol and the 14th symbol are symbols that carry UCI; by looking up Table 2, the value of the second threshold is 3. Since the value of X is less than the second threshold, the terminal equipment determines that the 13th and The first PUCCH is not transmitted over 14 symbols.
在一种可能的实现方式中,在上述步骤603中,当第三时隙中包括下行符号时,终端设备确定在X个符号上不传输第一PUCCH;其中,第三时隙与第一时隙相邻,且位于第一时隙之后。In a possible implementation manner, in the above step 603, when the third time slot includes downlink symbols, the terminal device determines not to transmit the first PUCCH on X symbols; wherein the third time slot is the same as the first time slot. The slots are adjacent and after the first slot.
其中,第三时隙可以包括下行时隙或特殊时隙,还可以为包括下行符号的其他时隙。The third time slot may include a downlink time slot or a special time slot, and may also be another time slot including downlink symbols.
本申请实施例中,终端设备根据配置信息或指示信息可知X个符号不包括承载DMRS的符号,下行符号通常被配置在时隙中的第一个符号,当第三时隙中包括下行符号时,对于第一PUCCH format 3或第一PUCCH format 4,X个符号的时域位置通常位于第一时隙的最后,此时,X个符号的前面几个符号所在的频域位置与X个符号所在的频域位置不同,第三时隙中与X个符号相邻的符号为下行符号,则X个符号附近至少一个符号间隔的时域范围内没有相应的DMRS可用于解调信道,终端设备确定在X个符号上不传输第一PUCCH,从而避免出现这X个符号无法译码的问题。In this embodiment of the present application, the terminal device knows, according to the configuration information or the indication information, that the X symbols do not include symbols bearing DMRS, and the downlink symbols are usually configured in the first symbol in the time slot, and when the third time slot includes downlink symbols , for the first PUCCH format 3 or the first PUCCH format 4, the time domain position of the X symbols is usually located at the end of the first time slot. The frequency domain location is different, the symbols adjacent to the X symbols in the third time slot are downlink symbols, then there is no corresponding DMRS in the time domain range of at least one symbol interval near the X symbols that can be used to demodulate the channel. It is determined that the first PUCCH is not transmitted on the X symbols, so as to avoid the problem that the X symbols cannot be decoded.
可选的,当下行符号为第三时隙中最后一个或几个符号时,终端设备根据第三时隙中该下行符号前的可用符号数量,判断X个符号与第三时隙内的可用符号是否符合配置信息或指示信息配置或指示的第一PUCCH长度L,若符合,则可以在X个符号上传输第一PUCCH。Optionally, when the downlink symbol is the last one or several symbols in the third time slot, the terminal device determines the number of X symbols and the available symbols in the third time slot according to the number of available symbols in the third time slot before the downlink symbol. Whether the symbol conforms to the first PUCCH length L configured or indicated by the configuration information or the indication information, if so, the first PUCCH can be transmitted on X symbols.
举例来说,图10示出根据本申请一实施例的一种上行控制信道的传输方法的示意图,如图10所示,特殊时隙的配比为10:2:2,startsymbolIndex=12,L=14,传输的第一PUCCH的格式为format 3或format 4,第一PUCCH包括两个跳频部分,每个跳频部分占用7个上行符号,DMRS配置在每个跳频部分的第4个符号上;第一时隙为上行时隙,X个符号包括该上行时隙内第13和第14个符号,该上行时隙的下一个时隙为下行时隙,即在该上行时隙的下一时隙中包括下行符号,此时,该上行时隙内第13和第14个符号没有相应的DMRS解调信 道,终端设备确定在该上行时隙内的第13和第14个符号上不传输第一PUCCH。For example, FIG. 10 shows a schematic diagram of a method for transmitting an uplink control channel according to an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 10 , the ratio of special time slots is 10:2:2, startsymbolIndex=12, L =14, the format of the first PUCCH transmitted is format 3 or format 4, the first PUCCH includes two frequency hopping parts, each frequency hopping part occupies 7 uplink symbols, and the DMRS is configured in the fourth part of each frequency hopping part On the symbol; the first time slot is the uplink time slot, the X symbols include the 13th and 14th symbols in the uplink time slot, and the next time slot of the uplink time slot is the downlink time slot, that is, in the The next time slot includes downlink symbols. At this time, the 13th and 14th symbols in the uplink time slot do not have corresponding DMRS demodulation channels, and the terminal equipment determines that the 13th and 14th symbols in the uplink time slot do not The first PUCCH is transmitted.
在一种可能的实现方式中,终端设备可以基于已有的PUCCH资源配置信息,确定在X个符号上不传输第一PUCCH。In a possible implementation manner, the terminal device may determine, based on the existing PUCCH resource configuration information, not to transmit the first PUCCH on the X symbols.
其中,已有的PUCCH资源配置信息可以包括已经配置在终端设备中的PUCCH。Wherein, the existing PUCCH resource configuration information may include the PUCCH already configured in the terminal device.
本公开实施例中,可以应用于基于已有的PUCCH资源配置信息,考虑利用X个符号的场景,利用X个符号,可以提高资源利用率,然而,若X的值较小,在X个符号根据已有PUCCH资源配置信息配置PUCCH,所配置的X个符号不包括承载DMRS的符号时,考虑到已有的PUCCH存在与其他终端设备的复用,为了避免资源浪费,放弃利用X个符号,即终端设备在X个符号上不传输第一PUCCH。In the embodiment of the present disclosure, it can be applied to a scenario in which X symbols are used based on the existing PUCCH resource configuration information. Using X symbols can improve resource utilization. However, if the value of X is small, the X symbols The PUCCH is configured according to the existing PUCCH resource configuration information. When the configured X symbols do not include symbols carrying DMRS, considering that the existing PUCCH is multiplexed with other terminal equipment, in order to avoid resource waste, the use of X symbols is abandoned. That is, the terminal device does not transmit the first PUCCH on X symbols.
示例性地,对于终端设备已经配置的第一PUCCH format 3或第一PUCCH format4,第一PUCCH中DMRS配置在第三个符号,当X=2时,若基于已有的PUCCH资源配置信息利用X个符号,则在X个符号传输第一PUCCH前两个符号,均为承载UCI的符号,不包括承载DMRS的符号,此时,X个符号仍旧存在不同解调的可能,同时,考虑到已有的PUCCH存在与其他终端设备的复用,为了避免资源浪费,终端设备在X个符号上不传输第一PUCCH。Exemplarily, for the first PUCCH format 3 or the first PUCCH format 4 that has been configured by the terminal device, the DMRS in the first PUCCH is configured in the third symbol, when X=2, if X is used based on the existing PUCCH resource configuration information symbols, then the first two symbols of the first PUCCH are transmitted in X symbols, both of which are symbols that carry UCI, excluding the symbols that carry DMRS. At this time, there is still the possibility of different demodulation of X symbols. Some PUCCHs are multiplexed with other terminal equipments. In order to avoid resource waste, the terminal equipment does not transmit the first PUCCH on X symbols.
结合图11举例来说,图11示出根据本申请一实施例的一种上行控制信道的传输方法的示意图;如图11所示,第一时隙为特殊时隙,X个符号包括第一时隙的第13和第14个符号,第三时隙为上行时隙,其中,配置或指示信息指示第一时隙的配比为10:2:2,startsymbolIndex=12,L=14,在终端设备已有的RRC配置中存在startsymbolIndex=0,L=14的配置,传输的第一PUCCH的格式为format 3或format 4,即在第三时隙中的14个符号中已经配置了第一PUCCH的一次传输,第一PUCCH包括两个跳频部分,每个跳频部分占用7个上行符号,DMRS配置在每个跳频部分的第4个符号上;这种情况下,由于X=2,基于已有的PUCCH资源配置信息在第一时隙的第13和第14个符号上配置第一PUCCH,由于DMRS配置在第一PUCCH每个跳频部分的第4个符号上,此时,第一时隙的第13和第14个符号均为承载UCI的符号,并不包括承载DMRS的符号,第一时隙的第13和第14个符号仍旧存在不同解调的可能,同时,考虑到已有的PUCCH可能存在与其他终端设备的复用,为了避免资源浪费,终端设备在第一时隙的第13和第14个符号不传输第一PUCCH。Taking FIG. 11 as an example, FIG. 11 shows a schematic diagram of a method for transmitting an uplink control channel according to an embodiment of the present application; as shown in FIG. 11 , the first time slot is a special time slot, and the X symbols include the first time slot. The 13th and 14th symbols of the time slot, and the third time slot is an uplink time slot, wherein the configuration or indication information indicates that the ratio of the first time slot is 10:2:2, startsymbolIndex=12, L=14, in There is a configuration of startsymbolIndex=0, L=14 in the existing RRC configuration of the terminal device, and the format of the first PUCCH transmitted is format 3 or format 4, that is, the first PUCCH has been configured in the 14 symbols in the third time slot. In one transmission of PUCCH, the first PUCCH includes two frequency hopping parts, each frequency hopping part occupies 7 uplink symbols, and the DMRS is configured on the 4th symbol of each frequency hopping part; in this case, since X=2 , the first PUCCH is configured on the 13th and 14th symbols of the first time slot based on the existing PUCCH resource configuration information. Since the DMRS is configured on the fourth symbol of each frequency hopping part of the first PUCCH, at this time, The 13th and 14th symbols of the first time slot are symbols that carry UCI, and do not include symbols that carry DMRS. The 13th and 14th symbols of the first time slot still have the possibility of different demodulation. At the same time, consider The existing PUCCH may be multiplexed with other terminal equipment. In order to avoid resource waste, the terminal equipment does not transmit the first PUCCH in the 13th and 14th symbols of the first time slot.
图12示出根据本申请一实施例的一种上行控制信道的传输方法的流程图,该方法可以应用于以Type-B的方式传输PUCCH的场景,如图12所示,该方法可以包括以下步骤:FIG. 12 shows a flowchart of a method for transmitting an uplink control channel according to an embodiment of the present application. The method can be applied to a scenario of transmitting PUCCH in a Type-B manner. As shown in FIG. 12 , the method may include the following step:
步骤1201、终端设备接收来自网络设备的配置信息或指示信息,配置信息或指示信息用于配置或指示终端设备发送第一PUCCH,第一PUCCH的传输长度为L个符号,第一PUCCH的传输次数为N,N为大于或等于1的整数,L为大于或等于1的整数;Step 1201, the terminal device receives configuration information or indication information from the network device, the configuration information or the indication information is used to configure or instruct the terminal device to send the first PUCCH, the transmission length of the first PUCCH is L symbols, and the number of transmissions of the first PUCCH is is N, N is an integer greater than or equal to 1, and L is an integer greater than or equal to 1;
可选的,第一PUCCH可以包括:UCI和DMRS;第一PUCCH的格式可以为format 3或format 4,L的取值为大于等于4小于等于14的任一整数。Optionally, the first PUCCH may include: UCI and DMRS; the format of the first PUCCH may be format 3 or format 4, and the value of L is any integer greater than or equal to 4 and less than or equal to 14.
步骤1202、终端设备根据预设处理方式在X个符号上传输第一PUCCH;X个符号位于第一时隙,且X个符号用于传输第一PUCCH。Step 1202: The terminal device transmits the first PUCCH on X symbols according to a preset processing method; the X symbols are located in the first time slot, and the X symbols are used for transmitting the first PUCCH.
示例性的,当X小于L时,则第一PUCCH需要跨时隙传输,此时可以根据预设处理方式在X个符号上传输第一PUCCH,从而避免无法译码的情况。Exemplarily, when X is less than L, the first PUCCH needs to be transmitted across time slots. In this case, the first PUCCH can be transmitted on X symbols according to a preset processing method, so as to avoid the situation that decoding cannot be performed.
其中,第一时隙可以包括14个符号,第一时隙可以为上行时隙,也可以为特殊时隙,还可以为包括上行符号的其他时隙,本申请实施例对此不作限制。The first time slot may include 14 symbols, and the first time slot may be an uplink time slot, a special time slot, or other time slot including uplink symbols, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
可选的,终端设备基于配置信息或指示信息用于配置或指示在除X个符号外的其他符号上传输第一PUCCH,网络设备接收到第一PUCCH后,可以根据第一PUCCH的DMRS,测量承载UCI的符号上的信道信息,然后用承载UCI的符号接收到的信号除以测量得到的对应的信道信息并进行译码,从而得到UCI。Optionally, the terminal device is configured or instructed to transmit the first PUCCH on symbols other than X symbols based on the configuration information or the indication information. After receiving the first PUCCH, the network device may measure the value of the The channel information on the symbol bearing the UCI is divided by the corresponding channel information measured and obtained by dividing the signal received by the symbol bearing the UCI, and decoding is performed to obtain the UCI.
本公开实施例中,X个符号不包括承载DMRS的符号,X个符号可能存在没有相应的DMRS解调信道,出现无法译码的情况,终端设备通过调整X个符号的频域位置,,从而避免了这X个符号无法译码的情况。In the embodiment of the present disclosure, the X symbols do not include the symbols carrying DMRS, the X symbols may have no corresponding DMRS demodulation channel, and the decoding cannot be performed. The terminal device adjusts the frequency domain positions of the X symbols, thereby The situation where these X symbols cannot be decoded is avoided.
下面结合附图,对图12中实施例中步骤1202终端设备根据预设处理方式在X个符号上传输第一PUCCH的技术方案进行进一步说明。The following further describes the technical solution for the terminal device to transmit the first PUCCH on X symbols according to the preset processing method in step 1202 in the embodiment of FIG. 12 .
在一种可能的实现方式中,终端设备根据X个符号的前一跳频部分所在的频域位置,在X个符号上传输第一PUCCH;或者,终端设备根据第二符号所在的频域位置,在X个符号上传输第一PUCCH;其中,第二符号与X个符号相邻,或者第二符号与X个符号间隔在14个符号内。In a possible implementation manner, the terminal device transmits the first PUCCH on X symbols according to the frequency domain position where the previous frequency hopping part of the X symbols is located; or, the terminal device transmits the first PUCCH according to the frequency domain position where the second symbol is located; , the first PUCCH is transmitted on X symbols; wherein the second symbol is adjacent to the X symbols, or the second symbol and the X symbols are spaced within 14 symbols.
其中,前一跳频部分在时域上位于X个符号之前,前一跳频部分的最后一个符号与X个符号相邻,且前一跳频部分所在的频域位置与X个符号所在的频域位置不同。例如,以上述图2为例,在图2中,X符号为上行时隙的第13-14个符号,前一跳频部分包括上行时隙中第6-12个符号。Wherein, the previous frequency hopping part is located before X symbols in the time domain, the last symbol of the previous frequency hopping part is adjacent to X symbols, and the frequency domain position where the previous frequency hopping part is located is the same as the one where the X symbols are located. The frequency domain location is different. For example, taking the above FIG. 2 as an example, in FIG. 2, the X symbol is the 13-14th symbol of the uplink time slot, and the previous frequency hopping part includes the 6th-12th symbol in the uplink time slot.
其中,前一跳频部分可以与X个符号位于第一PUCCH的同一次传输中,也可以位于第一PUCCH的不同次传输中。Wherein, the previous frequency hopping part and the X symbols may be located in the same transmission of the first PUCCH, or may be located in different transmissions of the first PUCCH.
可选的,前一跳频部分所在的频域位置与X个符号所在的频域位置不同。Optionally, the frequency domain position where the previous frequency hopping part is located is different from the frequency domain position where the X symbols are located.
可选的,第二符号与X个符号相邻,或者第二符号与X个符号间隔在14个符号内,且第二符号所在的频域位置与X个符号所在的频域位置不同。Optionally, the second symbol is adjacent to the X symbols, or the second symbol and the X symbols are spaced within 14 symbols, and the frequency domain position where the second symbol is located is different from the frequency domain location where the X symbols are located.
本申请实施例中,终端设备根据X个符号的前一跳频部分所在的频域位置,在X个符号上传输第一PUCCH;从而使得X个符号可以复用前一跳频部分上传输的DMRS,解决X个符号缺失DMRS,造成无法译码的问题。或者,终端设备根据第二符号所在的频域位置,在X个符号上传输第一PUCCH;其中,第二符号与X个符号相邻,或者第二符号与X个符号间隔在14个符号内,此时,第二符号可以位于X个符号的前几个跳频部分,由于X个符号不包括承载DMRS的符号,第二符号所在频域位置配置有相应的DMRS,从而使得X个符号可以复用与第二符号相应的DMRS,解决X个符号可能缺失DMRS,造成无法译码的问题。In the embodiment of the present application, the terminal device transmits the first PUCCH on the X symbols according to the frequency domain position where the previous frequency hopping part of the X symbols is located; thus, the X symbols can multiplex the data transmitted on the previous frequency hopping part. DMRS, to solve the problem that X symbols are missing DMRS, resulting in inability to decode. Or, the terminal device transmits the first PUCCH on X symbols according to the frequency domain position where the second symbol is located; wherein the second symbol is adjacent to the X symbols, or the second symbol and the X symbols are spaced within 14 symbols , at this time, the second symbol can be located in the first few frequency hopping parts of the X symbols. Since the X symbols do not include the symbol carrying the DMRS, the corresponding DMRS is configured in the frequency domain position of the second symbol, so that the X symbols can be Multiplexing the DMRS corresponding to the second symbol solves the problem that X symbols may lack DMRS, resulting in inability to decode.
在一种可能的实现方式中,配置信息或指示信息还用于指示终端设备在X个符号上不使能跳频。In a possible implementation manner, the configuration information or the indication information is further used to instruct the terminal device not to enable frequency hopping on X symbols.
需要说明的是,如果在一个时隙内,有Y个符号,且Y个符号是该时隙内,用来传输第一PUCCH的所有符号,Y个符号也不包括承载DMRS的符号,但是,在下一个时隙或者上一个时隙,Y个符号有相应的DMRS解调,则不属于本实现方式中的X个符号。如上述图4所示,在图4中,Y个符号为特殊时隙的第13个和第14个符号(图4中圆圈中所示的两个符号),由于这两个符号在下一时隙的第2个符号上的DMRS进行解调,因此这Y个符号不属于该实现方式中的X个符号。It should be noted that if there are Y symbols in a time slot, and the Y symbols are in the time slot, all symbols used to transmit the first PUCCH, the Y symbols do not include the symbols carrying DMRS, but, In the next time slot or the previous time slot, Y symbols have corresponding DMRS demodulation, which do not belong to the X symbols in this implementation manner. As shown in Figure 4 above, in Figure 4, the Y symbols are the 13th and 14th symbols of the special time slot (the two symbols shown in the circle in Figure 4), since these two symbols are in the next time slot The DMRS on the 2nd symbol of is demodulated, so these Y symbols do not belong to the X symbols in this implementation.
上述终端设备根据X个符号的前一跳频部分所在的频域位置,在X个符号上传输第一PUCCH,可以包括:终端设备在X个符号上不使能跳频。其中,“不使能跳频”可以理解为终 端设备配置了跳频,但是不执行该跳频。The above-mentioned terminal device transmitting the first PUCCH on X symbols according to the frequency domain position of the previous frequency hopping part of the X symbols may include: the terminal device does not enable frequency hopping on the X symbols. Among them, "disable frequency hopping" can be understood that the terminal equipment is configured with frequency hopping, but does not perform the frequency hopping.
本申请实施例中,若终端设备在X个符号上使能跳频,并在这X个符号上发送第一PUCCH,这种情况下,终端设备在这X个符号上发送第一PUCCH,网络设备在这X个符号接收到第一PUCCH后,由于X个符号不包括承载DMRS的符号,网络设备无法利用DMRS解调第一PUCCH,造成无法译码的问题,此时,终端设备根据配置信息或指示信息在这X个符号上不使能跳频,以使X个符号的频域位置与X个符号的前一跳频部分的频域位置相同,从而使得X个符号可以复用前一跳频部分上传输的DMRS,避免出现这X个符号无法译码的问题。In this embodiment of the present application, if the terminal device enables frequency hopping on X symbols and sends the first PUCCH on the X symbols, in this case, the terminal device sends the first PUCCH on the X symbols, and the network After the device receives the first PUCCH in the X symbols, since the X symbols do not include the symbols carrying the DMRS, the network device cannot use the DMRS to demodulate the first PUCCH, resulting in the problem of inability to decode. At this time, the terminal device according to the configuration information Or the indication information does not enable frequency hopping on these X symbols, so that the frequency domain position of the X symbols is the same as the frequency domain position of the previous frequency hopping part of the X symbols, so that the X symbols can be multiplexed with the previous one. The DMRS transmitted on the frequency hopping part avoids the problem that the X symbols cannot be decoded.
其中,X个符号的前一跳频部分可以与X个符号位于第一PUCCH的同一次传输中,也可以不位于第一PUCCH的同一次传输中。Wherein, the previous frequency hopping part of the X symbols may be located in the same transmission of the first PUCCH as the X symbols, or may not be located in the same transmission of the first PUCCH.
示例性地,X个符号均为承载UCI的符号,第一时隙为上行时隙,X个符号的前一跳频部分位于该上行时隙内,且该前一跳频部分与X个符号不位于同一次传输的第一PUCCH中,该前一跳频部分上包括承载DMRS的符号,同时,该X个符号相邻的下一个符号为下行符号,此时,这X个符号没有相应的DMRS解调信道,终端设备在这X个符号上不使能跳频,使得该X个符号与前一跳频部分所在的频域位置相同,以使该上行时隙内的X个符号可以复用该上行时隙内的前一跳频部分上传输的DMRS,从而避免出现该上行时隙内这X个符号无法译码的问题。Exemplarily, the X symbols are symbols that carry UCI, the first time slot is an uplink time slot, the previous frequency hopping part of the X symbols is located in the uplink time slot, and the previous frequency hopping part and the X symbols are Not located in the first PUCCH of the same transmission, the previous frequency hopping part includes a symbol carrying DMRS, and at the same time, the next symbol adjacent to the X symbols is a downlink symbol. At this time, the X symbols do not have corresponding symbols. The DMRS demodulates the channel, the terminal equipment does not enable frequency hopping on these X symbols, so that the X symbols are in the same frequency domain position as the previous frequency hopping part, so that the X symbols in the uplink time slot can be repeated. The DMRS transmitted on the previous frequency hopping part in the uplink time slot is used to avoid the problem that the X symbols in the uplink time slot cannot be decoded.
举例来说,图13示出根据本申请一实施例的一种上行控制信道的传输方法的示意图;如图13所示,第一时隙为上行时隙,该上行时隙的上一个时隙为特殊时隙,该X个符号相邻的下一个符号为下行符号;其中,特殊时隙的配比为10:2:2,startsymbolIndex=12,,L=14,传输的第一PUCCH的格式为format 3或format 4,第一PUCCH包括两个跳频部分,每个跳频部分占用7个上行符号,DMRS配置在每个跳频部分的第4个符号上;X个符号包括该上行时隙内第13和第14个符号(图13中圆圈中符号),且该第13和第14个符号均为承载UCI的符号;X个符号的前一跳频部分与第13和第14个符号不位于同一次传输的第一PUCCH中;该前一跳频部分包括该上行时隙内的第6-12个符号,且该上行时隙内的第9个符号为承载DMRS的符号;此时,该上行时隙内第13和第14个符号没有相应的DMRS解调信道,终端设备在该上行时隙内第13和第14个符号上不使能跳频,使得该上行时隙内第13和第14个符号与该上行时隙内第6-12个符号所在的频域位置相同,以使该上行时隙内第13和第14个符号可以复用该上行时隙内第9个符号传输的DMRS。For example, FIG. 13 shows a schematic diagram of a method for transmitting an uplink control channel according to an embodiment of the present application; as shown in FIG. 13 , the first time slot is an uplink time slot, and the previous time slot of the uplink time slot is is a special time slot, and the next symbol adjacent to the X symbols is a downlink symbol; wherein, the ratio of the special time slot is 10:2:2, startsymbolIndex=12, L=14, the format of the first PUCCH transmitted For format 3 or format 4, the first PUCCH includes two frequency hopping parts, each frequency hopping part occupies 7 uplink symbols, and the DMRS is configured on the 4th symbol of each frequency hopping part; when X symbols include the uplink The 13th and 14th symbols in the slot (the symbols in the circles in Figure 13), and the 13th and 14th symbols are symbols that carry UCI; the previous frequency hopping part of X symbols is related to the 13th and 14th The symbol is not located in the first PUCCH of the same transmission; the previous frequency hopping part includes the 6th to 12th symbols in the uplink time slot, and the 9th symbol in the uplink time slot is the symbol carrying the DMRS; this When there is no corresponding DMRS demodulation channel for the 13th and 14th symbols in the uplink time slot, the terminal equipment does not enable frequency hopping on the 13th and 14th symbols in the uplink time slot, so that in the uplink time slot The 13th and 14th symbols are in the same frequency domain position as the 6th to 12th symbols in the upstream time slot, so that the 13th and 14th symbols in the upstream time slot can be multiplexed with the 9th symbol in the upstream time slot. DMRS for symbol transmission.
下面对于第一时隙内配置的跳频位置大于等于2个的场景,终端设备在X个符号上不使能跳频进行说明。The following describes a scenario where there are two or more frequency hopping positions configured in the first time slot, and the terminal device does not enable frequency hopping on X symbols.
需要说明的是,如果在一个时隙内,有Y个符号,且Y个符号是该时隙内,用来传输第一PUCCH的所有符号,Y个符号也不包括承载DMRS的符号,但是,在下一个时隙或者上一个时隙,Y个符号有相应的DMRS解调,则不属于该场景下的X个符号。如上述图4所示,在图4中,Y个符号为特殊时隙的第13个和第14个符号(图4中圆圈中所示的两个符号),由于这两个符号在下一时隙的第2个符号上的DMRS进行解调,因此这Y个符号不属于该实现方式中的X个符号。该场景下,在一个时隙内,至少存在2个跳频位置,对于第一PUCCH的格式为format 3或format4,终端设备根据配置或指示信息指示的第一PUCCH长度L、起始位置、传输次数N,传输第一PUCCH,由于第一PUCCHformat3或format4中,DMRS通 常配置在跳频部分的中间位置上,对于某些L值,每一跳频部分的前3个符号可能存在都没有DMRS的相关配置,此时在X个符号传输第一PUCCH,由于X个符号不包括承载DMRS的符号,下一个承载DMRS的符号可能位于多个下行时隙之后,在第一时隙内配置了大于或等于2个跳频位置的情况下,该X个符号所在的频域位置甚至没有DMRS,这X个符号没有相应的DMRS解调信道;这种情况下,终端设备确定在这X个符号不包括承载DMRS的符号,则终端设备在这X个符号上不使能跳频,以使X个符号的频域位置与X个符号的前一跳频部分的频域位置相同,从而使得X个符号可以复用前一跳频部分上传输的DMRS,避免出现这X个符号无法译码的问题;并最大限度利用该前一跳频部分的DMRS,提高译码效果。It should be noted that if there are Y symbols in a time slot, and the Y symbols are in the time slot, all symbols used to transmit the first PUCCH, the Y symbols do not include the symbols carrying DMRS, but, In the next time slot or the previous time slot, if Y symbols have corresponding DMRS demodulation, they do not belong to X symbols in this scenario. As shown in Figure 4 above, in Figure 4, the Y symbols are the 13th and 14th symbols of the special time slot (the two symbols shown in the circle in Figure 4), since these two symbols are in the next time slot The DMRS on the 2nd symbol of is demodulated, so these Y symbols do not belong to the X symbols in this implementation. In this scenario, in a time slot, there are at least 2 frequency hopping positions, and the format of the first PUCCH is format 3 or format 4. The terminal device indicates the first PUCCH length L, starting position, transmission The number of times N is to transmit the first PUCCH. Because in the first PUCCH format3 or format4, the DMRS is usually configured in the middle of the frequency hopping part. For some L values, the first 3 symbols of each frequency hopping part may exist without DMRS. Related configuration, at this time, the first PUCCH is transmitted in X symbols. Since X symbols do not include symbols bearing DMRS, the next symbol bearing DMRS may be located after multiple downlink time slots. In the case of equal to 2 frequency hopping positions, the frequency domain position where the X symbols are located does not even have DMRS, and the X symbols do not have a corresponding DMRS demodulation channel; in this case, the terminal device determines that the X symbols do not include The symbol carrying the DMRS, the terminal equipment does not enable frequency hopping on these X symbols, so that the frequency domain position of the X symbols is the same as the frequency domain position of the previous frequency hopping part of the X symbols, so that the X symbols The DMRS transmitted on the previous frequency hopping part can be multiplexed to avoid the problem that the X symbols cannot be decoded; and the DMRS of the previous frequency hopping part can be utilized to the maximum extent to improve the decoding effect.
示例性地,X个符号均为承载UCI的符号,第一时隙为上行时隙,在该上行时隙内配置了至少2个跳频位置,X个符号所在的频域位置与该上行时隙内其他符号所在的频域位置均不同,X个符号的前一跳频部分位于该上行时隙内,且该前一跳频部分与X个符号不位于同一次传输的第一PUCCH中,该前一跳频部分上包括承载DMRS的符号,同时,该X个符号相邻的下一个符号为下行符号,此时,这X个符号没有相应的DMRS解调信道,终端设备在这X个符号上不使能跳频,使得该X个符号与前一跳频部分所在的频域位置相同,以使该上行时隙内的X个符号可以复用该上行时隙内的前一跳频部分上传输的DMRS,从而避免出现该上行时隙内这X个符号无法译码的问题,并最大限度利用该前一跳频部分的承载DMRS的符号,提高译码效果。Exemplarily, the X symbols are symbols that carry UCI, the first time slot is an uplink time slot, at least two frequency hopping positions are configured in the uplink time slot, and the frequency domain positions where the X symbols are located are the same as the uplink time slot. The frequency domain positions of other symbols in the slot are different, the previous frequency hopping part of the X symbols is located in the uplink time slot, and the previous frequency hopping part and the X symbols are not located in the first PUCCH of the same transmission, The previous frequency hopping part includes a symbol carrying DMRS, and at the same time, the next symbol adjacent to the X symbols is a downlink symbol. At this time, the X symbols do not have a corresponding DMRS demodulation channel, and the terminal equipment is in the X symbols. The frequency hopping is not enabled on the symbol, so that the X symbols are in the same frequency domain position as the previous frequency hopping part, so that the X symbols in the uplink time slot can reuse the previous frequency hopping in the uplink time slot. Part of the DMRS transmitted on the uplink, thereby avoiding the problem that the X symbols in the uplink time slot cannot be decoded, and maximizing the use of the DMRS-bearing symbols in the previous frequency hopping part to improve the decoding effect.
举例来说,图14示出根据本申请一实施例的一种上行控制信道的传输方法的示意图;如图14所示,为一个时隙内,配置了3个跳频位置的场景,第一时隙为上行时隙,该上行时隙的上一个时隙为特殊时隙,该X个符号相邻的下一个符号为下行符号;其中,特殊时隙的配比为10:2:2,startsymbolIndex=12,L=14,传输的第一PUCCH的格式为format3或format4,第一PUCCH包括两个跳频部分,每个跳频部分占用7个上行符号,DMRS配置在每个跳频部分的第4个符号上;在该上行时隙内配置了3个跳频位置,分别位于该上行时隙的第6个符号和第13个符号,该上行时隙内的第1-5个符号所在的频域位置、该上行时隙内的第6-12个符号所在的频域位置、该上行时隙内第13和第14个符号所在的频域位置互不相同;X个符号包括该上行时隙内第13和第14个符号,且该第13和第14个符号均为承载UCI的符号;X个符号的前一跳频部分与第13和第14个符号不位于同一次传输的第一PUCCH中;该前一跳频部分包括该上行时隙内的第6-12个符号,且该上行时隙内的第9个符号为承载DMRS的符号;此时,该上行时隙内第13和第14个符号没有相应的DMRS解调信道,终端设备在该上行时隙内第13和第14个符号上不使能跳频,使得该上行时隙内第13和第14个符号与该上行时隙内第6-12个符号所在的频域位置相同,以使该上行时隙内第13和第14个符号可以复用该上行时隙内第9个符号传输的DMRS。For example, FIG. 14 shows a schematic diagram of a method for transmitting an uplink control channel according to an embodiment of the present application; as shown in FIG. 14 , in a scenario where three frequency hopping positions are configured in one time slot, the first The time slot is an uplink time slot, the previous time slot of the uplink time slot is a special time slot, and the next symbol adjacent to the X symbols is a downlink symbol; wherein, the special time slot ratio is 10:2:2, startsymbolIndex=12, L=14, the format of the first PUCCH transmitted is format3 or format4, the first PUCCH includes two frequency hopping parts, each frequency hopping part occupies 7 uplink symbols, and the DMRS is configured in each frequency hopping part On the 4th symbol; 3 frequency hopping positions are configured in the uplink time slot, which are respectively located in the 6th symbol and the 13th symbol of the uplink time slot, and the 1st to 5th symbols in the uplink time slot are located The frequency domain positions of the 6th to 12th symbols in the uplink time slot are different from each other, and the frequency domain positions of the 13th and 14th symbols in the uplink time slot are different from each other; X symbols include the uplink time slot. The 13th and 14th symbols in the time slot, and the 13th and 14th symbols are symbols that carry UCI; the previous frequency hopping part of X symbols and the 13th and 14th symbols are not located in the same transmission. In the first PUCCH; the previous frequency hopping part includes the 6th to 12th symbols in the uplink time slot, and the 9th symbol in the uplink time slot is a symbol that carries DMRS; at this time, in the uplink time slot The 13th and 14th symbols do not have corresponding DMRS demodulation channels, and the terminal device does not enable frequency hopping on the 13th and 14th symbols in the uplink time slot, so that the 13th and 14th symbols in the uplink time slot The same frequency domain positions as the 6th to 12th symbols in the uplink time slot are located, so that the 13th and 14th symbols in the uplink time slot can multiplex the DMRS transmitted by the ninth symbol in the uplink time slot.
举例来说,图15示出根据本申请一实施例的一种上行控制信道的传输方法的示意图;如图15所示,为一个时隙内,配置了2个跳频位置的场景,X个符号所在的第一时隙为上行时隙,该上行时隙的上一个时隙为特殊时隙,该上行时隙的下一个时隙是下行时隙;其中,特殊时隙的配比为10:2:2,startsymbolIndex=12,L=14,传输的第一PUCCH的格式为format 3或format 4,DMRS配置在一次传输的第一PUCCH的第4个符号及第11个符号;X个符号包括该上行时隙内第13和第14个符号,且该第13和第14个符号均为承载UCI的符号;该上行时隙内第1-12个符号所在的频域位置与第13和第14个符号所在的频域位置均不同;该 特殊时隙内的两个上行符号为承载UCI的符号,且所在的频域位置与上行时隙内第13和第14个符号不同;在图15中的特殊时隙、上行时隙及下行时隙内,该上行时隙内第13和第14个符号所在的频域位置不包括DMRS,此时,该上行时隙内第13和第14个符号没有相应的DMRS解调信道,终端设备该上行时隙内第13和第14个符号上不使能跳频,使得该上行时隙内第13和第14个符号与该上行时隙内第6-12个符号所在的频域位置相同,以使该上行时隙内第13和第14个符号可以复用该上行时隙内第9个符号传输的DMRS。For example, FIG. 15 shows a schematic diagram of a method for transmitting an uplink control channel according to an embodiment of the present application; as shown in FIG. 15 , it is a scenario in which two frequency hopping positions are configured in one time slot, and X The first time slot where the symbol is located is an uplink time slot, the previous time slot of this uplink time slot is a special time slot, and the next time slot of this uplink time slot is a downlink time slot; among them, the ratio of special time slots is 10 :2:2, startsymbolIndex=12, L=14, the format of the first PUCCH transmitted is format 3 or format 4, and the DMRS is configured on the 4th symbol and the 11th symbol of the first PUCCH transmitted once; X symbols Including the 13th and 14th symbols in the uplink time slot, and the 13th and 14th symbols are symbols that carry UCI; the frequency domain positions of the 13th and 12th symbols in the uplink time slot are the same as the 13th and 14th symbols. The positions of the 14th symbol in the frequency domain are different; the two uplink symbols in this special time slot are symbols that carry UCI, and their frequency domain positions are different from the 13th and 14th symbols in the uplink time slot; in Fig. In the special time slot, uplink time slot and downlink time slot in 15, the frequency domain positions of the 13th and 14th symbols in the uplink time slot do not include DMRS. At this time, the 13th and 14th symbols in the uplink time slot There is no corresponding DMRS demodulation channel for each symbol, and the terminal equipment does not enable frequency hopping on the 13th and 14th symbols in the uplink time slot, so that the 13th and 14th symbols in the uplink time slot are the same as those in the uplink time slot. The positions of the 6th to 12th symbols in the frequency domain are the same, so that the 13th and 14th symbols in the uplink time slot can multiplex the DMRS transmitted by the ninth symbol in the uplink time slot.
在一种可能的实现方式中,配置信息或指示信息还用于指示终端设备将X个符号所在跳频部分的频域位置调整为与X个符号的前一跳频部分的频域位置相同,且将X个符号的下一跳频部分的频域位置调整为与X个符号的频域位置相同。In a possible implementation manner, the configuration information or the indication information is further used to instruct the terminal device to adjust the frequency domain position of the frequency hopping part where the X symbols are located to be the same as the frequency domain position of the previous frequency hopping part of the X symbols, And the frequency domain position of the next frequency hopping part of the X symbols is adjusted to be the same as the frequency domain position of the X symbols.
上述终端设备根据X个符号的前一跳频部分所在的频域位置,在X个符号上传输第一PUCCH,包括:终端设备将X个符号所在跳频部分的频域位置调整为与X个符号的前一跳频部分的频域位置相同,且将X个符号的下一跳频部分的频域位置调整为与X个符号的频域位置相同。The above-mentioned terminal equipment transmits the first PUCCH on the X symbols according to the frequency domain position where the previous frequency hopping part of the X symbols is located, including: the terminal equipment adjusts the frequency domain position of the frequency hopping part where the X symbols are located to The frequency domain position of the previous frequency hopping part of the symbol is the same, and the frequency domain position of the next frequency hopping part of X symbols is adjusted to be the same as the frequency domain position of X symbols.
可选的,X个符号所在跳频部分与下一跳频部分均含有一个承载DMRS的符号或者均含有两个承载DMRS的符号,或者,X个符号所在跳频部分与下一跳频部分可能一个跳频部分含有一个承载DMRS的符号,另一个跳频部分含有两个承载DMRS的符号。Optionally, the frequency hopping part and the next frequency hopping part where the X symbols are located both contain one DMRS-bearing symbol or both contain two DMRS-bearing symbols, or, the frequency hopping part and the next frequency hopping part where the X symbols are located may be. One hopping part contains one DMRS-carrying symbol, and the other hopping part contains two DMRS-carrying symbols.
示例性地,可以将X个符号所在跳频部分的频域位置记为第一频域位置,将X个符号的下一跳频部分的频域位置记为第二频域位置;在X个符号所在的一次传输的第一PUCCH中,当一个符号配置在第一频域位置时,终端设备将该符号的频域位置调整为第二频域位置;当一个符号配置在第二频域位置时,终端设备将该符号的频域位置调整为第一频域位置。Exemplarily, the frequency domain position of the frequency hopping part where the X symbols are located may be denoted as the first frequency domain position, and the frequency domain position of the next frequency hopping part of the X symbols may be denoted as the second frequency domain position; In the first PUCCH of a transmission where the symbol is located, when a symbol is configured in the first frequency domain position, the terminal device adjusts the frequency domain position of the symbol to the second frequency domain position; when a symbol is configured in the second frequency domain position When , the terminal device adjusts the frequency domain position of the symbol to the first frequency domain position.
可选的,X个符号为一个时隙内的最后的X个符号。例如,X=2,即第一时隙内的最后2个符号。Optionally, the X symbols are the last X symbols in a time slot. For example, X=2, the last 2 symbols in the first slot.
本申请实施例中,X个符号不包括承载DMRS的符号,由上述陈述可知,存在X个符号可能缺失DMRS,造成无法译码的问题,因此,终端设备调整X个符号所在的一次传输的第一PUCCH各符号的频域位置,将X个符号所在跳频部分的频域位置调整为与X个符号的前一跳频部分的频域位置相同,且将X个符号的下一跳频部分的频域位置调整为与X个符号的频域位置相同;以使X个符号的频域位置与X个符号的前一跳频部分的频域位置相同,从而使得X个符号可以复用前一跳频部分上传输的DMRS,从而避免出现这X个符号无法译码的问题。In the embodiment of the present application, the X symbols do not include symbols that carry DMRS. It can be seen from the above statement that there is a problem that the X symbols may lack DMRS, resulting in inability to decode. Therefore, the terminal device adjusts the first transmission where the X symbols are located. The frequency domain position of each symbol of a PUCCH, the frequency domain position of the frequency hopping part where the X symbols are located is adjusted to be the same as the frequency domain position of the previous frequency hopping part of the X symbols, and the next frequency hopping part of the X symbols is adjusted. The frequency domain position of the X symbols is adjusted to be the same as the frequency domain position of the X symbols; so that the frequency domain position of the X symbols is the same as the frequency domain position of the previous frequency hopping part of the X symbols, so that the X symbols can be multiplexed before. DMRS transmitted on a frequency hopping part, so as to avoid the problem that the X symbols cannot be decoded.
其中,当第一PUCCH使能跳频时,一次传输的第一PUCCH包括两个跳频部分,即第一跳频部分和第二跳频部分时,第一频域位置可以指第一PUCCH的第一跳频部分所在的频域位置,第二频域位置可以指第一PUCCH的第二跳频部分所在的频域位置。Wherein, when frequency hopping is enabled for the first PUCCH, and the first PUCCH transmitted at one time includes two frequency hopping parts, that is, the first frequency hopping part and the second frequency hopping part, the first frequency domain position may refer to the first frequency domain position of the first PUCCH. The frequency domain location where the first frequency hopping part is located, and the second frequency domain location may refer to the frequency domain location where the second frequency hopping part of the first PUCCH is located.
示例性地,一次传输的第一PUCCH包括两个跳频部分,将前一个跳频部分所在的频域位置记作第一频域位置,后一个跳频部分所在的频域位置记作第一频域位置,X个符号均为承载UCI的符号,第一时隙为上行时隙,且X个符号位于该上行时隙的最后,X个符号所在的频域位置为第一频域位置;该X个符号所在的一次传输的第一PUCCH位于该上行时隙及与该上行时隙相邻的下一时隙中,X个符号的前一跳频部分位于该上行时隙内,且该前一跳频部分与X个符号不位于同一次传输的第一PUCCH中,该前一跳频部分上包括承载DMRS的符号,该前一跳频部分所在的频域位置为第二频域位置;此时,这X个符号没有相应的 DMRS解调信道,终端设备调整X个符号所在的一次传输的第一PUCCH各符号的频域位置,具体地,终端设备将X个符号所在的一次传输的第一PUCCH中配置在第二频域位置的符号调整为第一频域位置,终端设备将X个符号所在的一次传输的第一PUCCH中配置在第一频域位置的符号调整为第二频域位置;其中,终端设备将X个符号所在的频域位置由第一频域位置调整为第二频域位置;以使X个符号的频域位置与X个符号的前一跳频部分的频域位置相同,从而使得X个符号可以复用前一跳频部分上传输的DMRS,从而避免出现这X个符号无法译码的问题。Exemplarily, the first PUCCH transmitted at one time includes two frequency hopping parts, the frequency domain position where the previous frequency hopping part is located is denoted as the first frequency domain position, and the frequency domain position where the latter frequency hopping part is located is denoted as the first frequency domain position. The frequency domain position, the X symbols are all symbols carrying UCI, the first time slot is an uplink time slot, and the X symbols are located at the end of the uplink time slot, and the frequency domain position where the X symbols are located is the first frequency domain position; The first PUCCH of a transmission in which the X symbols are located is located in the upstream time slot and the next time slot adjacent to the upstream time slot, the previous frequency hopping part of the X symbols is located in the upstream time slot, and the previous time slot is located in the upstream time slot. A frequency hopping part and X symbols are not located in the first PUCCH of the same transmission, the previous frequency hopping part includes a symbol bearing DMRS, and the frequency domain position where the previous frequency hopping part is located is the second frequency domain position; At this time, the X symbols do not have a corresponding DMRS demodulation channel, and the terminal device adjusts the frequency domain positions of the first PUCCH symbols of the one transmission where the X symbols are located. The symbol configured in the second frequency domain position in the first PUCCH is adjusted to the first frequency domain position, and the terminal device adjusts the symbol configured in the first frequency domain position in the first PUCCH where X symbols are located to the second frequency domain position. domain position; wherein, the terminal equipment adjusts the frequency domain position where the X symbols are located from the first frequency domain position to the second frequency domain position; so that the frequency domain position of the X symbols is the same as that of the previous frequency hopping part of the X symbols The frequency domain positions are the same, so that the X symbols can multiplex the DMRS transmitted on the previous frequency hopping part, thereby avoiding the problem that the X symbols cannot be decoded.
举例来说,图16示出根据本申请一实施例的一种上行控制信道的传输方法的示意图;如图16所示,第一时隙为上行时隙,该上行时隙的上一个时隙为特殊时隙;其中,特殊时隙的配比为10:2:2,startsymbolIndex=12,,L=14,传输的第一PUCCH的格式为format3或format4,第一PUCCH包括两个跳频部分,每个跳频部分占用7个上行符号,DMRS配置在每个跳频部分的第4个符号上;该X个符号所在的一次传输的第一PUCCH位于该上行时隙及与该上行时隙相邻的下一时隙中,即包括该上行时隙内第13和第14个符号及该上行时隙的下一时隙内的第1-12个符号,其中,X个符号包括该上行时隙内第13和第14个符号,且该第13和第14个符号均为承载UCI的符号,该上行时隙内的第13和第14个符号及该上行时隙相邻的下一时隙内的第1-5个符号所在的频域位置为第一频域位置,该上行时隙相邻的下一时隙内的第6-12个符号所在的频域位置为第二频域位置;X个符号的前一跳频部分与第13和第14个符号不位于同一次传输的第一PUCCH中;该前一跳频部分包括该上行时隙内的第6-12个符号,且该上行时隙内的第9个符号为承载DMRS的符号,该第6-12个符号所在的频域位置为第二频域位置;此时,该上行时隙内第13和第14个符号没有相应的DMRS解调信道,终端设备将该上行时隙内第13和第14个符号及该上行时隙相邻的下一时隙内的第1-5个符号所在的频域位置由第一频域位置调整为第二频域位置,终端设备将上行时隙相邻的下一时隙内的第6-12个符号所在的频域位置由第二频域位置调整为第一频域位置;以使该上行时隙内第13和第14个符号的频域位置与该上行时隙内的第6-12个符号的频域位置相同,从而使得该上行时隙内第13和第14个符号可以复用该上行时隙内的第9个符号上传输的DMRS。For example, FIG. 16 shows a schematic diagram of a method for transmitting an uplink control channel according to an embodiment of the present application; as shown in FIG. 16 , the first time slot is an uplink time slot, and the previous time slot of the uplink time slot is is a special time slot; wherein, the ratio of the special time slot is 10:2:2, startsymbolIndex=12, L=14, the format of the first PUCCH transmitted is format3 or format4, and the first PUCCH includes two frequency hopping parts , each frequency hopping part occupies 7 uplink symbols, and the DMRS is configured on the 4th symbol of each frequency hopping part; the first PUCCH of a transmission where the X symbols are located is located in the uplink time slot and the uplink time slot In the adjacent next time slot, that is, including the 13th and 14th symbols in the uplink time slot and the 1st to 12th symbols in the next time slot of the uplink time slot, wherein X symbols include the uplink time slot The 13th and 14th symbols in the inner time slot, and the 13th and 14th symbols are symbols that carry UCI, the 13th and 14th symbols in the upstream time slot and the next time slot adjacent to the upstream time slot The frequency domain position of the 1st to 5th symbols is the first frequency domain position, and the frequency domain position of the 6th to 12th symbols in the next time slot adjacent to the uplink time slot is the second frequency domain position; X The previous frequency hopping part of the symbol is not located in the first PUCCH of the same transmission as the 13th and 14th symbols; the previous frequency hopping part includes the 6th to 12th symbols in the uplink time slot, and the uplink The 9th symbol in the time slot is the symbol carrying the DMRS, and the frequency domain position where the 6th to 12th symbols are located is the second frequency domain position; at this time, the 13th and 14th symbols in the uplink time slot have no corresponding The DMRS demodulation channel of the terminal equipment, the frequency domain positions of the 13th and 14th symbols in the uplink time slot and the 1st to 5th symbols in the next time slot adjacent to the uplink time slot are determined by the first frequency domain. The position is adjusted to the second frequency domain position, and the terminal equipment adjusts the frequency domain position of the 6-12th symbol in the next time slot adjacent to the uplink time slot from the second frequency domain position to the first frequency domain position; The frequency domain positions of the 13th and 14th symbols in the uplink time slot are the same as the frequency domain positions of the 6th to 12th symbols in the uplink time slot, so that the 13th and 14th symbols in the uplink time slot can be The DMRS transmitted on the 9th symbol in the uplink time slot is multiplexed.
在一种可能的实现方式中,上述终端设备在X个符号上传输第一PUCCH,可以包括:终端设备在X个符号上传输L*长度的第一PUCCH,其中,L*小于L,也可称为L截短长度,换言之,终端设备在X个符号上传输L截短后的第一PUCCH,例如,L=12,X=6,则L*可以取6,即在X个符号上传输时域内前一半第一PUCCH。In a possible implementation manner, the above-mentioned terminal device transmitting the first PUCCH on X symbols may include: the terminal device transmitting the first PUCCH of L* length on X symbols, where L* is less than L, or It is called L truncation length. In other words, the terminal device transmits the L-truncated first PUCCH on X symbols. For example, L=12, X=6, then L* can be taken as 6, that is, it transmits on X symbols The first half of the first PUCCH in the time domain.
本申请实施例中,对于X个符号所在的第一时隙为特殊时隙,且第三时隙为上行时隙,该上行时隙中已经配置了第一PUCCH的场景下,终端设备可以基于已有的PUCCH资源配置信息,在X个符号上配置L*长度的第一PUCCH,这L*长度的第一PUCCH可以与已有配置的L长度的第一PUCCH一同传输,这样在不影响现有配置中PUCCH复用的基础上,利用这X个符号的资源,提高资源利用率,提高覆盖范围。In this embodiment of the present application, for the first time slot where the X symbols are located is a special time slot, and the third time slot is an uplink time slot, in a scenario where the first PUCCH has been configured in the uplink time slot, the terminal device can For the existing PUCCH resource configuration information, configure the first PUCCH of L* length on X symbols, and the first PUCCH of L* length can be transmitted together with the first PUCCH of the existing configured length of L, so that it does not affect the existing PUCCH. On the basis of PUCCH multiplexing in the configuration, the resources of the X symbols are used to improve resource utilization and coverage.
结合图17举例说明,图17示出根据本申请一实施例的一种上行控制信道的传输方法的示意图,第一时隙为特殊时隙,时隙配比为6:4:4,startsymbolIndex=10,X个符号包括第一时隙的第11-14个符号,在已有的RRC配置中存在startsymbolIndex=0,L=14的配置,如图17所示,即在第三时隙配置了第一PUCCH,第一PUCCH的格式为format 3或format4,已有配置的L=14的第一PUCCH占用第三时隙的1-14个符号,为了不影响现有配置中PUCCH 复用,并充分利用X个符号的资源,终端设备基于已有的PUCCH资源配置信息,在第一时隙的第11-14个符号上配置L*=4长度的第一PUCCH,及在第一时隙的第11-14个符号上传输L*=4长度的第一PUCCH。17 is used as an example. FIG. 17 shows a schematic diagram of an uplink control channel transmission method according to an embodiment of the present application. The first time slot is a special time slot, and the time slot ratio is 6:4:4, and startsymbolIndex= 10, X symbols include the 11th to 14th symbols of the first time slot. In the existing RRC configuration, there is a configuration of startsymbolIndex=0, L=14, as shown in Figure 17, that is, the configuration is configured in the third time slot. The first PUCCH, the format of the first PUCCH is format 3 or format 4, and the first PUCCH with L=14 in the existing configuration occupies 1-14 symbols of the third time slot. In order not to affect the PUCCH multiplexing in the existing configuration, and Making full use of the resources of X symbols, the terminal device configures a first PUCCH with a length of L*=4 on the 11-14th symbols of the first time slot based on the existing PUCCH resource configuration information, and The first PUCCH of length L*=4 is transmitted on the 11-14th symbols.
可选的,终端设备可以根据配置或指示信息,在X个符号上使能跳频,根据所在跳频位置的不同,X个符号可以分为第一跳频部分和第二跳频部分,X个符号的第一跳频部分包括
Figure PCTCN2021115721-appb-000006
个符号,X个符号的第二跳频部分包括
Figure PCTCN2021115721-appb-000007
个符号。
Optionally, the terminal device can enable frequency hopping on X symbols according to the configuration or instruction information. According to the different frequency hopping positions, the X symbols can be divided into a first frequency hopping part and a second frequency hopping part, X The first frequency hopping part of symbols includes
Figure PCTCN2021115721-appb-000006
symbols, the second frequency hopping portion of the X symbols includes
Figure PCTCN2021115721-appb-000007
symbol.
在一种可能的实现方式中,上述终端设备在X个符号上传输第一PUCCH,可以包括:终端设备在X个符号及第二时隙内的部分上行符号或空闲符号上传输第一PUCCH;其中,第一时隙与第二时隙相邻。In a possible implementation manner, the above-mentioned terminal device transmitting the first PUCCH on X symbols may include: the terminal device transmitting the first PUCCH on X symbols and some uplink symbols or idle symbols in the second time slot; Wherein, the first time slot is adjacent to the second time slot.
本申请实施例中,终端设备基于已有的PUCCH资源配置信息,可以确定第二时隙内的可用的符号,该可用的符号指第二时隙内不传输第一PUCCH的上行符号或空闲符号,终端设备在X个符号及第二时隙内的部分上行符号或空闲符号上传输L*长度的第一PUCCH,即L*长度的第一PUCCH可以跨时隙边界,从而有效避免了X个符号上可能缺失DMRS,造成无法译码的问题,同时可以在不影响现有配置中PUCCH复用的基础上,充分利用X个符号及第二时隙内的部分上行符号或空闲符号的资源,提高资源利用率,提高覆盖范围。In this embodiment of the present application, the terminal device may determine available symbols in the second time slot based on the existing PUCCH resource configuration information, where the available symbols refer to the uplink symbols or idle symbols of the first PUCCH that are not transmitted in the second time slot , the terminal device transmits the first PUCCH of L* length on X symbols and some uplink symbols or idle symbols in the second time slot, that is, the first PUCCH of L* length can cross the time slot boundary, thereby effectively avoiding X The DMRS may be missing on the symbol, causing the problem of inability to decode. At the same time, the resources of X symbols and some uplink symbols or idle symbols in the second time slot can be fully utilized without affecting the PUCCH multiplexing in the existing configuration. Improve resource utilization and increase coverage.
结合图18举例说明,图18示出根据本申请一实施例的一种上行控制信道的传输方法的示意图,第一时隙为特殊时隙,时隙配比为6:4:4,startsymbolIndex=10,X个符号包括第一时隙的第11-14个符号,在已有的RRC配置中存在startsymbolIndex=2,L=12的配置,如图18所示,即在第一时隙的下一个时隙内配置了第一PUCCH,第一PUCCH的格式为format 3或format4,L=12的第一PUCCH占用第一时隙的下一个时隙内的第3-14个符号,此时,第一时隙的下一个时隙内的第1-2个符号可用,为了不影响现有配置中PUCCH复用,并充分利用X个符号以及第一时隙的下一个时隙内可用符号的资源,终端设备在第一时隙的第11-14个符号及第一时隙的下一个时隙内的第1-2个符号上配置L*=6长度的第一PUCCH。18 is an example. FIG. 18 shows a schematic diagram of an uplink control channel transmission method according to an embodiment of the present application. The first time slot is a special time slot, and the time slot ratio is 6:4:4, and startsymbolIndex= 10, X symbols include the 11th to 14th symbols of the first time slot. In the existing RRC configuration, there is a configuration of startsymbolIndex=2, L=12, as shown in Figure 18, that is, in the lower part of the first time slot. A first PUCCH is configured in a time slot, the format of the first PUCCH is format 3 or format 4, and the first PUCCH with L=12 occupies the 3-14th symbol in the next time slot of the first time slot, at this time, The 1st to 2nd symbols in the next time slot of the first time slot are available, in order not to affect the PUCCH multiplexing in the existing configuration, and to make full use of the X symbols and the available symbols in the next time slot of the first time slot. resource, the terminal device configures the first PUCCH with a length of L*=6 on the 11-14th symbols of the first time slot and the 1-2th symbols in the next time slot of the first time slot.
可选的,终端设备可以根据配置或指示信息,可以在X个符号及第二时隙内的部分上行符号或空闲符号上使能跳频,根据所在跳频位置的不同,L*长度的第一PUCCH可以分为第一跳频部分和第二跳频部分,X个符号的第一跳频部分包括
Figure PCTCN2021115721-appb-000008
个符号,X个符号的第二跳频部分包括
Figure PCTCN2021115721-appb-000009
个符号。
Optionally, the terminal device can enable frequency hopping on X symbols and some uplink symbols or idle symbols in the second time slot according to the configuration or instruction information. A PUCCH can be divided into a first frequency hopping part and a second frequency hopping part, and the first frequency hopping part of X symbols includes
Figure PCTCN2021115721-appb-000008
symbols, the second frequency hopping portion of the X symbols includes
Figure PCTCN2021115721-appb-000009
symbol.
图19示出根据本申请一实施例的一种上行控制信道的传输方法的流程图,该方法可以应用于以Type-B的方式传输PUCCH的场景,如图19所示,该方法可以包括以下步骤:FIG. 19 shows a flowchart of a method for transmitting an uplink control channel according to an embodiment of the present application. The method can be applied to a scenario of transmitting PUCCH in a Type-B manner. As shown in FIG. 19 , the method may include the following step:
步骤1901、终端设备接收来自网络设备的配置信息或指示信息,配置信息或指示信息用于配置或指示终端设备发送第一PUCCH,第一PUCCH的传输长度为L个符号,第一PUCCH的传输次数为N,N为大于或等于1的整数,L为大于或等于1的整数。Step 1901: The terminal device receives configuration information or indication information from the network device, the configuration information or indication information is used to configure or instruct the terminal device to send the first PUCCH, the transmission length of the first PUCCH is L symbols, and the number of transmissions of the first PUCCH is is N, where N is an integer greater than or equal to 1, and L is an integer greater than or equal to 1.
可选的,第一PUCCH可以包括:UCI和DMRS;第一PUCCH的格式可以为format 3或format 4,L的取值为大于等于4小于等于14的任一整数。Optionally, the first PUCCH may include: UCI and DMRS; the format of the first PUCCH may be format 3 or format 4, and the value of L is any integer greater than or equal to 4 and less than or equal to 14.
步骤1902、终端设备根据预设处理方式,在X个符号上传输DMRS;X个符号位于第一时隙,且X个符号用于传输第一PUCCH。Step 1902: The terminal device transmits the DMRS on X symbols according to the preset processing mode; the X symbols are located in the first time slot, and the X symbols are used to transmit the first PUCCH.
示例性的,当X小于L时,则第一PUCCH需要跨时隙传输,此时根据预设处理方式,在X个符号上传输DMRS,从而避免无法译码的情况。其中,第一时隙可以包括14个符号,第一时隙可以为上行时隙,也可以为特殊时隙,还可以为包括上行符号的其他时隙,本申请实施例对此不作限制。Exemplarily, when X is less than L, the first PUCCH needs to be transmitted across time slots, and at this time, according to a preset processing method, the DMRS is transmitted on X symbols, so as to avoid a situation that cannot be decoded. The first time slot may include 14 symbols, and the first time slot may be an uplink time slot, a special time slot, or other time slot including uplink symbols, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
可选的,终端设备基于配置信息或指示信息在除X个符号外的其他符号上传输第一 PUCCH,网络设备接收到第一PUCCH后,可以根据第一PUCCH的DMRS,测量承载UCI的符号上的信道信息,然后用承载UCI的符号接收到的信号除以测量得到的对应的信道信息并进行译码,从而得到上行控制信息。Optionally, the terminal device transmits the first PUCCH on symbols other than X symbols based on the configuration information or the indication information. After receiving the first PUCCH, the network device can measure the UCI-bearing symbols according to the DMRS of the first PUCCH. Then divide the signal received by the symbol carrying the UCI by the corresponding channel information obtained by measurement and decode it to obtain the uplink control information.
本公开实施例中,X个符号不包括承载DMRS的符号,X个符号可能存在没有相应的DMRS解调信道,出现无法译码的情况,终端设备在X个符号上传输DMRS,从而有效避免了X个符号上可能缺失DMRS,造成无法译码的问题,同时利用这X个符号承载DMRS,增强DMRS的检测性能,从而提高覆盖范围。In the embodiment of the present disclosure, the X symbols do not include symbols carrying DMRS, the X symbols may have no corresponding DMRS demodulation channel, and the situation cannot be decoded. The terminal device transmits the DMRS on the X symbols, thereby effectively avoiding The DMRS may be missing on the X symbols, causing the problem of inability to decode. At the same time, the X symbols are used to carry the DMRS to enhance the detection performance of the DMRS, thereby improving the coverage.
下面结合附图,对图19中实施例中步骤1902终端设备根据预设处理方式在X个符号上传输DMRS的技术方案进行进一步说明。The technical solution for transmitting DMRS on X symbols according to a preset processing method by the terminal device in step 1902 in the embodiment in FIG. 19 will be further described below with reference to the accompanying drawings.
在一种可能的实现方式中,上述终端设备在X个符号上传输DMRS,可以包括:终端设备仅在X个符号上传输DMRS,换言之,终端设备仅通过X个符号增加传输额外的DMRS。In a possible implementation manner, the above-mentioned terminal equipment transmitting DMRS on X symbols may include: the terminal equipment only transmits DMRS on X symbols, in other words, the terminal equipment only transmits additional DMRS through X symbols.
需要说明的是,如果在一个时隙内,有Y个符号,且Y个符号是该时隙内,用来传输第一PUCCH的所有符号,Y个符号也不包括承载DMRS的符号,但是,在下一个时隙或者上一个时隙,Y个符号有相应的DMRS解调,则不属于该实现方式中的X个符号。如上述图4所示,在图4中,Y个符号为特殊时隙的第13个和第14个符号(图4中圆圈中所示的两个符号),由于这两个符号在下一时隙的第2个符号上的DMRS进行解调,因此这Y个符号不属于该实现方式中的X个符号。It should be noted that if there are Y symbols in a time slot, and the Y symbols are in the time slot, all symbols used to transmit the first PUCCH, the Y symbols do not include the symbols carrying DMRS, but, In the next time slot or the previous time slot, Y symbols have corresponding DMRS demodulation, which do not belong to the X symbols in this implementation. As shown in Figure 4 above, in Figure 4, the Y symbols are the 13th and 14th symbols of the special time slot (the two symbols shown in the circle in Figure 4), since these two symbols are in the next time slot The DMRS on the 2nd symbol of is demodulated, so these Y symbols do not belong to the X symbols in this implementation.
本申请实施例中,终端设备根据配置信息或指示信息,配置发送第一PUCCH,对于第一PUCCH的格式为format 3或format4,第一时隙的X个符号不包括承载DMRS的符号,若终端设备发送X个符号,可能会出现,网络设备对接收的X个符号上的PUCCH无法解调的问题;同时,根据上述实施例可知,终端设备可以确定在该X个符号上不传输第一PUCCH,这样会导致浪费这X个符号的资源,因此,本公开实施例中,终端设备通过在该X个符号配置额外的DMRS,这样,终端设备将X个符号上配置为承载DMRS的符号,即在X个符号传输DMRS;从而可以利用该X个符号与在该X个符号之前的跳频部分上的DMRS联合增强DMRS的信道测量性能。In the embodiment of the present application, the terminal device is configured to send the first PUCCH according to the configuration information or the instruction information. For the format of the first PUCCH, the format is format 3 or format 4, and the X symbols of the first time slot do not include symbols that carry DMRS. When the device sends X symbols, there may be a problem that the network device cannot demodulate the PUCCH on the received X symbols; at the same time, according to the above embodiment, the terminal device can determine that the first PUCCH is not transmitted on the X symbols , this will result in wasting the resources of the X symbols. Therefore, in the embodiment of the present disclosure, the terminal device configures the X symbols with additional DMRSs, so that the terminal device configures the X symbols as symbols that carry DMRS, that is, The DMRS is transmitted in X symbols; thus, the channel measurement performance of the DMRS can be enhanced jointly by the X symbols and the DMRS on the frequency hopping part before the X symbols.
结合图20举例来说,图20示出根据本申请一实施例的一种上行控制信道的传输方法的示意图,其中,图20(a)第一时隙为上行时隙,该上行时隙的上一个时隙为特殊时隙;其中,特殊时隙的配比为10:2:2,startsymbolIndex=12,,L=14,第一PUCCH的格式为format 3或format4,第一PUCCH包括两个跳频部分,每个跳频部分占用7个上行符号,DMRS配置在每个跳频部分的第4个符号上;X个符号包括该上行时隙内第13和第14个符号(图20(a)中圆圈中符号),且该第13和第14个符号均为承载UCI的符号;X个符号的前一跳频部分与第13和第14个符号不位于同一次传输的第一PUCCH中;该前一跳频部分包括该上行时隙内的第6-12个符号,且该上行时隙内的第9个符号为承载DMRS的符号;此时,该上行时隙内第13和第14个符号没有相应的DMRS解调信道。For example, in conjunction with FIG. 20 , FIG. 20 shows a schematic diagram of a method for transmitting an uplink control channel according to an embodiment of the present application, wherein the first time slot in FIG. 20( a ) is an uplink time slot, and the The last time slot is a special time slot; wherein, the ratio of the special time slot is 10:2:2, startsymbolIndex=12, L=14, the format of the first PUCCH is format 3 or format 4, and the first PUCCH includes two The frequency hopping part, each frequency hopping part occupies 7 uplink symbols, and the DMRS is configured on the 4th symbol of each frequency hopping part; the X symbols include the 13th and 14th symbols in the uplink time slot (Figure 20 ( The symbol in the circle in a)), and the 13th and 14th symbols are symbols that carry UCI; the previous frequency hopping part of X symbols and the 13th and 14th symbols are not located in the first PUCCH of the same transmission in; the previous frequency hopping part includes the 6th to 12th symbols in the uplink time slot, and the ninth symbol in the uplink time slot is a symbol that carries DMRS; at this time, the 13th and 12th symbols in the uplink time slot The 14th symbol has no corresponding DMRS demodulation channel.
这种情况下,终端设备在X个符号上配置DMRS,如图20(b)所示,终端设备在第一时隙的第13和第14个符号上配置DMRS,网络设备接收到第一时隙的第13个符号和第14个符号后,可以利用DMRS与第一时隙中第2个符号上的DMRS联合解调该跳频位置上的第一PUCCH,增强DMRS的信道测量性能。In this case, the terminal device configures DMRS on X symbols, as shown in Figure 20(b), the terminal device configures DMRS on the 13th and 14th symbols of the first time slot, and the network device receives the first time slot. After the 13th symbol and the 14th symbol of the slot, the DMRS can be used to jointly demodulate the first PUCCH at the frequency hopping position with the DMRS on the second symbol in the first slot to enhance the channel measurement performance of the DMRS.
可选的,终端设备可以根据配置或指示信息,在X个符号中的至少一个符号上传输DMRS, 该至少一个符号的频域位置可以与该X个符号附近的其他符号所在的频域位置相同,可以在该至少一个符号上传输的DMRS,解调这些其他符号的信息,从而增强DMRS的信道测量性能。Optionally, the terminal device may transmit the DMRS on at least one symbol in the X symbols according to the configuration or indication information, and the frequency domain position of the at least one symbol may be the same as the frequency domain position of other symbols near the X symbols. , the DMRS transmitted on the at least one symbol can demodulate the information of these other symbols, thereby enhancing the channel measurement performance of the DMRS.
进一步地,当配置配置或指示信息指示第一PUCCH时隙内跳频(intra-slot hopping)时,第一PUCCH配置了时隙内跳频时,终端设备在X个符号上可以以跳频方式传输DMRS,其中,X个符号的第一跳频部分包括
Figure PCTCN2021115721-appb-000010
个符号,X个符号的第二跳频部分包括
Figure PCTCN2021115721-appb-000011
个符号。其中,数学符号
Figure PCTCN2021115721-appb-000012
表示向下取整,数学符号
Figure PCTCN2021115721-appb-000013
表示向上取整,例如,X=3,则
Figure PCTCN2021115721-appb-000014
Further, when the configuration configuration or the indication information indicates intra-slot hopping (intra-slot hopping) of the first PUCCH, when the first PUCCH is configured with intra-slot hopping, the terminal device can perform frequency hopping on X symbols transmit DMRS, where the first frequency hopping portion of the X symbols includes
Figure PCTCN2021115721-appb-000010
symbols, the second frequency hopping portion of the X symbols includes
Figure PCTCN2021115721-appb-000011
symbol. Among them, the mathematical notation
Figure PCTCN2021115721-appb-000012
Indicates round down, mathematical notation
Figure PCTCN2021115721-appb-000013
Indicates rounding up, for example, X=3, then
Figure PCTCN2021115721-appb-000014
这样,将X个符号的第一跳频部分和第二跳频部分中符号数量上取整或下取整配置,从而可以充分利用该X个符号配置额外的DMRS,从而使得与X个符号的第一跳频部分所在频域位置相同的其他符号利用第一跳频部分的DMRS,同时,与X个符号的第二跳频部分所在频域位置相同的其他符号利用第二跳频部分的DMRS,增强DMRS的检测性能,提高覆盖范围。In this way, the number of symbols in the first frequency hopping part and the second frequency hopping part of X symbols is rounded up or down to configure, so that the X symbols can be fully utilized to configure additional DMRS, so that the number of symbols in the first frequency hopping part and the second frequency hopping part of the X symbols can be configured by rounding up or down. Other symbols in the same frequency domain position where the first frequency hopping part is located use the DMRS of the first frequency hopping part, and at the same time, other symbols in the same frequency domain position as the second frequency hopping part of the X symbols use the DMRS of the second frequency hopping part , to enhance the detection performance of DMRS and improve the coverage.
其中,X个符号的第一跳频部分可以位于X个符号的第二跳频部分之前,X个符号的第一跳频部分也可以位于X个符号的第二跳频部分之后。The first frequency hopping part of X symbols may be located before the second frequency hopping part of X symbols, and the first frequency hopping part of X symbols may also be located after the second frequency hopping part of X symbols.
本申请实施例中,终端设备可以根据配置或指示信息,可以在X个符号上使能跳频,根据所在跳频位置的不同,X个符号可以分为第一跳频部分和第二跳频部分,X个符号的第一跳频部分包括
Figure PCTCN2021115721-appb-000015
个符号,X个符号的第二跳频部分包括
Figure PCTCN2021115721-appb-000016
个符号。
In this embodiment of the present application, the terminal device may enable frequency hopping on X symbols according to configuration or indication information, and according to different frequency hopping positions, the X symbols may be divided into a first frequency hopping part and a second frequency hopping part part, the first hopping part of X symbols includes
Figure PCTCN2021115721-appb-000015
symbols, the second frequency hopping portion of the X symbols includes
Figure PCTCN2021115721-appb-000016
symbol.
结合图21举例说明,图21示出根据本申请一实施例的一种上行控制信道的传输方法的示意图,图21示出终端设备以跳频的方式在上述图20中在X个符号上配置DMRS,在图21的(a)和图20的(b)中,X=2,则
Figure PCTCN2021115721-appb-000017
X个符号的第一跳频部分包括1个符号,X个符号的第二跳频部分包括1个符号,设第一跳频部分位于第二跳频部分之前,则第一时隙中第13个符号为X个符号的第一跳频部分,第一时隙中第14个符号为X个符号的第一跳频部分。
21 is an example. FIG. 21 shows a schematic diagram of a method for transmitting an uplink control channel according to an embodiment of the present application. FIG. 21 shows that a terminal device configures X symbols in the above-mentioned FIG. 20 in a frequency hopping manner. DMRS, in Figure 21 (a) and Figure 20 (b), X=2, then
Figure PCTCN2021115721-appb-000017
The first frequency hopping part of X symbols includes 1 symbol, and the second frequency hopping part of X symbols includes 1 symbol. If the first frequency hopping part is located before the second frequency hopping part, then the 13th frequency in the first time slot symbol is the first frequency hopping part of X symbols, and the 14th symbol in the first time slot is the first frequency hopping part of X symbols.
如图21中(a)所示,X个符号的第一跳频部分所在的频域位置配置为与第一时隙内第1-5个符号所在的跳频部分的相同,X个符号的第二跳频部分所在的频域位置配置为与第一时隙内第6-12个符号所在的跳频部分的相同;这样,网络设备接收到第一时隙中第13个符号后,可以利用该符号上传输的DMRS解调第一时隙内第1-5个符号上传输的信息,同理,网络设备接收到第一时隙中第14个符号后,可以利用该符号上传输的DMRS解调第一时隙内第6-12个符号上传输的信息。As shown in (a) of FIG. 21 , the frequency domain position where the first frequency hopping part of the X symbols is located is configured to be the same as the frequency hopping part where the 1st to 5th symbols in the first time slot are located. The frequency domain position where the second frequency hopping part is located is configured to be the same as the frequency hopping part where the 6th to 12th symbols in the first time slot are located; in this way, after receiving the 13th symbol in the first time slot, the network device can Use the DMRS transmitted on the symbol to demodulate the information transmitted on the 1st to 5th symbols in the first time slot. Similarly, after receiving the 14th symbol in the first time slot, the network device can use the information transmitted on the symbol. DMRS demodulates the information transmitted on symbols 6-12 in the first slot.
如图21中(b)所示,X个符号的第一跳频部分所在的频域位置配置为与第一时隙内第6-12个符号所在的跳频部分的相同,X个符号的第二跳频部分所在的频域位置配置为与第一时隙内第1-5个符号所在的跳频部分的相同;这样,网络设备接收到第一时隙中第13个符号后,可以利用该符号上传输的DMRS解调第一时隙内第6-12个符号上传输的信息;同理,网络设备接收到第一时隙中第14个符号后,可以利用该符号上传输的DMRS解调第一时隙内第1-5个符号上传输的信息。As shown in (b) of Figure 21, the frequency domain position where the first frequency hopping part of the X symbols is located is configured to be the same as the frequency hopping part where the 6th to 12th symbols in the first time slot are located. The frequency domain position where the second frequency hopping part is located is configured to be the same as the frequency hopping part where the 1st to 5th symbols in the first time slot are located; in this way, after receiving the 13th symbol in the first time slot, the network device can Use the DMRS transmitted on the symbol to demodulate the information transmitted on the 6-12th symbol in the first time slot; similarly, after receiving the 14th symbol in the first time slot, the network device can use the information transmitted on the symbol DMRS demodulates the information transmitted on symbols 1-5 in the first time slot.
本申请实施例中,在采用Type-B方式传输第一PUCCH时,终端设备在X个符号上传输DMRS,网络设备在X个符号上接收承载DMRS的符号,从而有效避免了X个符号上可能缺失DMRS,造成无法译码的问题,同时利用这X个符号承载DMRS,增强DMRS的检测性能,从而提高覆盖范围。In the embodiment of the present application, when the Type-B mode is used to transmit the first PUCCH, the terminal device transmits the DMRS on X symbols, and the network device receives the symbol carrying the DMRS on the X symbols, thereby effectively avoiding the possibility of the X symbols on the The lack of DMRS causes the problem of inability to decode, and at the same time, the X symbols are used to carry the DMRS to enhance the detection performance of the DMRS, thereby improving the coverage.
进一步地,对于X个符号所在的第一时隙为特殊时隙,且第一时隙的下一个时隙内为上行时隙,该上行时隙中已经配置了长度L=14的第一PUCCH,该场景下,终端设备可以基于 已有的PUCCH资源配置信息,在X个符号上配置DMRS,从而利用这X个符号承载DMRS,增强DMRS的检测性能,从而提高覆盖范围,在不影响现有配置中PUCCH复用的基础上,提高的频域资源利用率。Further, the first time slot where the X symbols are located is a special time slot, and the next time slot of the first time slot is an uplink time slot, and the first PUCCH of length L=14 has been configured in the uplink time slot , in this scenario, the terminal device can configure the DMRS on X symbols based on the existing PUCCH resource configuration information, so as to use the X symbols to carry the DMRS, enhance the detection performance of the DMRS, thereby improving the coverage, without affecting the existing On the basis of PUCCH multiplexing in the configuration, the utilization of frequency domain resources is improved.
结合图22举例说明,图22示出根据本申请一实施例的一种上行控制信道的传输方法的示意图,第一时隙为特殊时隙,时隙配比为6:4:4,startsymbolIndex=10,X个符号包括第一时隙的第11-14个符号,在已有的RRC配置中存在startsymbolIndex=0,L=14的配置,如图22所示,即在第一时隙的下一个时隙内配置了第一PUCCH,第一PUCCH的格式为format 3或format4,为了不影响现有配置中PUCCH复用,并充分利用X个符号的资源,终端设备在该特殊时隙的第一时隙的第11-14个符号上配置DMRS。22 is an example. FIG. 22 shows a schematic diagram of a method for transmitting an uplink control channel according to an embodiment of the present application. The first time slot is a special time slot, and the time slot ratio is 6:4:4, and startsymbolIndex= The 10,X symbols include the 11th to 14th symbols of the first time slot. In the existing RRC configuration, there is a configuration of startsymbolIndex=0, L=14, as shown in Figure 22, that is, in the lower part of the first time slot. The first PUCCH is configured in one time slot, and the format of the first PUCCH is format 3 or format 4. In order not to affect the PUCCH multiplexing in the existing configuration, and to fully utilize the resources of X symbols, the terminal The DMRS is configured on the 11th to 14th symbols of a slot.
可选的,如图22所示,终端设备可以根据配置或指示信息,可以在X个符号上使能跳频,根据所在跳频位置的不同,X个符号可以分为第一跳频部分和第二跳频部分,X个符号的第一跳频部分包括
Figure PCTCN2021115721-appb-000018
个符号,X个符号的第二跳频部分包括
Figure PCTCN2021115721-appb-000019
个符号。
Optionally, as shown in Figure 22, the terminal device can enable frequency hopping on X symbols according to the configuration or instruction information. According to the different frequency hopping positions, the X symbols can be divided into the first frequency hopping part and the first frequency hopping part. The second frequency hopping part, the first frequency hopping part of the X symbols includes
Figure PCTCN2021115721-appb-000018
symbols, the second frequency hopping portion of the X symbols includes
Figure PCTCN2021115721-appb-000019
symbol.
在一种可能的实现方式中,上述终端设备在X个符号上传输DMRS,可以包括:终端设备在X个符号及第二时隙内的部分上行符号或空闲符号上传输DMRS;其中,第一时隙与第二时隙相邻。其中,空闲符号指灵活可变的符号,即可以用于传输下行信号,也可以用于传输上行信号。In a possible implementation manner, the above-mentioned terminal equipment transmits DMRS on X symbols, which may include: the terminal equipment transmits DMRS on X symbols and some uplink symbols or idle symbols in the second time slot; wherein the first The time slot is adjacent to the second time slot. The idle symbol refers to a flexible and variable symbol, that is, it can be used to transmit downlink signals or uplink signals.
本申请实施例中,终端设备基于已有的PUCCH资源配置信息,可以确定第二时隙内的可用的符号,该可用的符号指第二时隙内不传输第一PUCCH的上行符号或空闲符号,终端设备在X个符号及第二时隙内的部分上行符号或空闲符号上传输DMRS,从而有效避免了X个符号上可能缺失DMRS,造成无法译码的问题,同时可以在不影响现有配置中PUCCH复用的基础上,充分利用X个符号及第二时隙内的部分上行符号或空闲符号的资源,提高资源利用率,提高覆盖范围。In the embodiment of the present application, the terminal device may determine the available symbols in the second time slot based on the existing PUCCH resource configuration information, where the available symbols refer to the uplink symbols or idle symbols of the first PUCCH that are not transmitted in the second time slot , the terminal equipment transmits the DMRS on the X symbols and some uplink symbols or idle symbols in the second time slot, thereby effectively avoiding the possible lack of DMRS on the X symbols, resulting in the problem of inability to decode. On the basis of PUCCH multiplexing in the configuration, resources of X symbols and some uplink symbols or idle symbols in the second time slot are fully utilized to improve resource utilization and coverage.
结合图23举例说明,图23示出根据本申请一实施例的一种上行控制信道的传输方法的示意图,第一时隙为特殊时隙,时隙配比为6:4:4,startsymbolIndex=10,X个符号包括第一时隙的第11-14个符号,在已有的RRC配置中存在startsymbolIndex=2,L=12的配置,如图23所示,第三时隙为与第一时隙相邻的下一个上行时隙,即在第三时隙配置了第一PUCCH,第一PUCCH的格式为format 3或format4,为了不影响现有配置中PUCCH复用,并未充分利用X个符号以及第三时隙可用符号的资源,终端设备在该第一时隙的第11-14个符号及第三时隙的第1-2个符号上配置DMRS。23 is an example. FIG. 23 shows a schematic diagram of an uplink control channel transmission method according to an embodiment of the present application. The first time slot is a special time slot, and the time slot ratio is 6:4:4, and startsymbolIndex= The 10,X symbols include the 11th to 14th symbols of the first time slot. In the existing RRC configuration, there is a configuration of startsymbolIndex=2, L=12. As shown in Figure 23, the third time slot is the same as the first time slot. The next uplink time slot adjacent to the time slot, that is, the first PUCCH is configured in the third time slot, and the format of the first PUCCH is format 3 or format 4. In order not to affect the PUCCH multiplexing in the existing configuration, X is not fully utilized. symbols and the resources of the available symbols in the third time slot, the terminal device configures the DMRS on the 11-14th symbols of the first time slot and the 1-2th symbols of the third time slot.
可选的,如图23所示,终端设备可以根据配置或指示信息,可以在X个符号及第二时隙内的部分上行符号或空闲符号上使能跳频。Optionally, as shown in FIG. 23 , the terminal device may enable frequency hopping on X symbols and some uplink symbols or idle symbols in the second time slot according to the configuration or indication information.
图24示出根据本申请一实施例的一种上行控制信道的传输方法的流程图,该方法可以应用于以Type-B的方式传输PUCCH的场景,如图24所示,该方法可以包括以下步骤:FIG. 24 shows a flowchart of a method for transmitting an uplink control channel according to an embodiment of the present application. The method can be applied to a scenario where PUCCH is transmitted in a Type-B manner. As shown in FIG. 24 , the method may include the following step:
步骤2401、终端设备接收来自网络设备的配置信息或指示信息,配置信息或指示信息用于配置或指示终端设备发送第一PUCCH,第一PUCCH的传输长度为L个符号,第一PUCCH的传输次数为N,N为大于或等于1的整数,L为大于或等于1的整数;Step 2401: The terminal device receives configuration information or indication information from the network device, the configuration information or indication information is used to configure or instruct the terminal device to send the first PUCCH, the transmission length of the first PUCCH is L symbols, and the number of transmissions of the first PUCCH is is N, N is an integer greater than or equal to 1, and L is an integer greater than or equal to 1;
可选的,第一PUCCH可以包括:UCI和DMRS;第一PUCCH的格式可以为format 3或format 4,L的取值为大于等于4小于等于14的任一整数。Optionally, the first PUCCH may include: UCI and DMRS; the format of the first PUCCH may be format 3 or format 4, and the value of L is any integer greater than or equal to 4 and less than or equal to 14.
步骤2402、终端设备根据预设处理方式,在X个符号上传输第二PUCCH;X个符号位于第一时隙,且X个符号用于传输第二PUCCH。Step 2402: The terminal device transmits the second PUCCH on X symbols according to the preset processing mode; the X symbols are located in the first time slot, and the X symbols are used for transmitting the second PUCCH.
示例性的,当X小于L时,则第一PUCCH需要跨时隙传输,此时可以根据预设处理方式,在X个符号上传输第二PUCCH,从而避免无法译码的情况。其中,第一时隙可以包括 14个符号,第一时隙可以为上行时隙,也可以为特殊时隙,还可以为包括上行符号的其他时隙,本申请实施例对此不作限制。Exemplarily, when X is less than L, the first PUCCH needs to be transmitted across time slots, and at this time, the second PUCCH can be transmitted on X symbols according to a preset processing method, so as to avoid the situation that cannot be decoded. The first time slot may include 14 symbols, and the first time slot may be an uplink time slot, a special time slot, or other time slots including uplink symbols, which are not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
可选的,终端设备基于配置信息或指示信息用于配置或指示在除X个符号外的其他符号上传输第一PUCCH,网络设备接收到第一PUCCH后,可以根据第一PUCCH的DMRS,测量承载UCI的符号上的信道信息,然后用承载UCI的符号接收到的信号除以测量得到的对应的信道信息并进行译码,从而得到UCI。Optionally, the terminal device is configured or instructed to transmit the first PUCCH on symbols other than X symbols based on the configuration information or the indication information. After receiving the first PUCCH, the network device may measure the value of the The channel information on the symbol bearing the UCI is divided by the corresponding channel information measured and obtained by dividing the signal received by the symbol bearing the UCI, and decoding is performed to obtain the UCI.
本公开实施例中,X个符号不包括承载DMRS的符号,X个符号可能存在没有相应的DMRS解调信道,出现无法译码的情况,终端设备根据配置信息或指示信息,在X个符号上传输第二PUCCH,且第二PUCCH的传输不会占用第一PUCCH的时域资源,即可以根据配置或指示信息在其他符号上正常传输第一PUCCH,这样,基于已有的PUCCH配置进行调度额外PUCCH资源,从而不影响现有配置中PUCCH复用的同时,提高频域资源利用率。In the embodiment of the present disclosure, the X symbols do not include symbols bearing DMRS, the X symbols may have no corresponding DMRS demodulation channel, and the decoding cannot be performed. The second PUCCH is transmitted, and the transmission of the second PUCCH will not occupy the time domain resources of the first PUCCH, that is, the first PUCCH can be normally transmitted on other symbols according to the configuration or indication information. PUCCH resources, thereby improving the utilization of frequency domain resources without affecting the PUCCH multiplexing in the existing configuration.
可选的,终端设备仅在X个符号上传输第二PUCCH;或者,终端设备在X个符号及第二时隙内的部分上行符号或空闲符号上传输第二PUCCH。Optionally, the terminal device transmits the second PUCCH only on X symbols; or, the terminal device transmits the second PUCCH on X symbols and some uplink symbols or idle symbols in the second time slot.
本公开实施例中,X个符号不包括承载DMRS的符号,X个符号可能存在没有相应的DMRS解调信道,出现无法译码的情况,终端设备仅在X个符号上传输第二PUCCH,在X个符号上传输第二PUCCH,且第二PUCCH的传输不会占用第一PUCCH的时域资源,即可以根据配置或指示信息在其他符号上正常传输第一PUCCH,这样,基于已有的PUCCH配置进行调度额外PUCCH资源,从而不影响现有配置中PUCCH复用的同时,提高频域资源利用率;或者,终端设备基于已有的PUCCH资源配置信息,可以确定第二时隙内的可用的符号,该可用的符号指第二时隙内不传输第一PUCCH的上行符号或空闲符号,终端设备在X个符号及第二时隙内的部分上行符号或空闲符号上传输第二PUCCH,从而有效避免了X个符号上可能缺失DMRS,造成无法译码的问题,同时可以在不影响现有配置中PUCCH复用的基础上,充分利用X个符号及第二时隙内的部分上行符号或空闲符号的资源,提高资源利用率,提高覆盖范围。In the embodiment of the present disclosure, the X symbols do not include symbols carrying DMRS, the X symbols may have no corresponding DMRS demodulation channel, and the decoding cannot be performed. The terminal device only transmits the second PUCCH on the X symbols, and the The second PUCCH is transmitted on X symbols, and the transmission of the second PUCCH will not occupy the time domain resources of the first PUCCH, that is, the first PUCCH can be normally transmitted on other symbols according to the configuration or indication information. In this way, based on the existing PUCCH The configuration is configured to schedule additional PUCCH resources, so as not to affect the PUCCH multiplexing in the existing configuration, while improving the frequency domain resource utilization; or, based on the existing PUCCH resource configuration information, the terminal device can determine the available PUCCH resources in the second time slot. The available symbols refer to the uplink symbols or idle symbols of the first PUCCH that are not transmitted in the second time slot, and the terminal device transmits the second PUCCH on X symbols and part of the uplink symbols or idle symbols in the second time slot, thereby It effectively avoids the problem that the DMRS may be missing on the X symbols, resulting in the problem of inability to decode. At the same time, it can make full use of the X symbols and part of the uplink symbols in the second time slot without affecting the PUCCH multiplexing in the existing configuration. Idle symbol resources, improve resource utilization, and improve coverage.
下面结合附图,对图24中实施例中步骤2402终端设备在X个符号上传输第二PUCCH的技术方案进行进一步说明。The technical solution for transmitting the second PUCCH on X symbols by the terminal device in step 2402 in the embodiment in FIG. 24 will be further described below with reference to the accompanying drawings.
可选的,第二PUCCH格式为format3或format 4。Optionally, the format of the second PUCCH is format 3 or format 4.
可选的,X大于等于4。Optionally, X is greater than or equal to 4.
可选的,配置信息包括PUCCH config中的配置信息,指示信息包括下行控制信息DCI中的指示信息,第二PUCCH在PUCCH config中由第一资源集合配置,并在下行控制信息(Downlink control information,DCI)中采用指示信息指示第一资源集合中的一个PUCCH资源配置。Optionally, the configuration information includes the configuration information in the PUCCH config, the indication information includes the indication information in the downlink control information DCI, the second PUCCH is configured by the first resource set in the PUCCH config, and is in the downlink control information (Downlink control information, In DCI), the indication information is used to indicate a PUCCH resource configuration in the first resource set.
可选的,终端设备可以使能或不使能第二PUCCH跳频;通过RRC配置的跳频,终端设备可以选择使能第二PUCCH跳频,也可以选择不使能第二PUCCH跳频。其中,在终端设备不使能第二PUCCH跳频时,第二PUCCH的长度可以包括L’个符号。在终端设备使能第二PUCCH跳频时,第一跳频部分包括
Figure PCTCN2021115721-appb-000020
个符号,X个符号的第二跳频部分包括
Figure PCTCN2021115721-appb-000021
个符号。其中,数学符号
Figure PCTCN2021115721-appb-000022
表示向下取整,数学符号
Figure PCTCN2021115721-appb-000023
表示向上取整,例如,L’=5,则
Figure PCTCN2021115721-appb-000024
Optionally, the terminal device may enable or disable the second PUCCH frequency hopping; through the frequency hopping configured by the RRC, the terminal device may choose to enable or disable the second PUCCH frequency hopping. Wherein, when the terminal device does not enable frequency hopping of the second PUCCH, the length of the second PUCCH may include L' symbols. When the terminal device enables frequency hopping of the second PUCCH, the first frequency hopping part includes
Figure PCTCN2021115721-appb-000020
symbols, the second frequency hopping portion of the X symbols includes
Figure PCTCN2021115721-appb-000021
symbol. Among them, the mathematical notation
Figure PCTCN2021115721-appb-000022
Indicates round down, mathematical notation
Figure PCTCN2021115721-appb-000023
Indicates rounding up, for example, L'=5, then
Figure PCTCN2021115721-appb-000024
可选的,当终端设备在X个符号上使能第二PUCCH跳频时,终端设备可以在X个符号的第一跳频部分和第二跳频部分上分别配置DMRS。Optionally, when the terminal device enables the second PUCCH frequency hopping on X symbols, the terminal device may configure the DMRS on the first frequency hopping part and the second frequency hopping part of the X symbols respectively.
示例性地,网络设备在PUCCH-config中配置第一资源集合,该第一资源集合为额外的PUCCH资源集合(additional PUCCH resource set),该第一资源集合可以与第二资源集合前后位置匹配,其中,第二资源集合为已经配置的原有资源集合,例如,第二资源集合中一个资源为:startingSymbolIndex=0,长度L=14,那么考虑到特殊时隙配比为6:4:4的配置情况下,第一资源集合中一个资源的startingSymbolIndex是10,长度为4。在具体调度时,网络设备由DCI指示PDSCH传输时,额外指示第一资源集合中的资源,终端设备使用两个资源集合中的PUCCH资源(可能含重复次数等)。Exemplarily, the network device configures a first resource set in PUCCH-config, where the first resource set is an additional PUCCH resource set (additional PUCCH resource set), and the first resource set may match the position before and after the second resource set, The second resource set is the configured original resource set. For example, one resource in the second resource set is: startingSymbolIndex=0, length L=14, then considering that the special time slot ratio is 6:4:4 In the case of configuration, the startingSymbolIndex of a resource in the first resource set is 10 and the length is 4. During specific scheduling, when the network device indicates PDSCH transmission by the DCI, it additionally indicates the resources in the first resource set, and the terminal device uses the PUCCH resources in the two resource sets (possibly including the number of repetitions, etc.).
结合图25举例说明,图25示出根据本申请一实施例的一种上行控制信道的传输方法的示意图,该图示出终端设备仅在X个符号上传输第二PUCCH的场景,其中,图25中(a)示出终端设备不使能跳频的情况下,在X个符号上传输第二PUCCH,图25中(b)示出终端设备使能跳频的情况下,在X个符号上传输第二PUCCH。在图25中,第一时隙为特殊时隙,第一时隙的配比为6:4:4,X个符号包括第一时隙的第11-14个符号,在已有的RRC配置中存在第一PUCCH的长度L=14的配置,终端设备根据配置或指示信息,第二PUCCH的长度L’=4,第一PUCCH的格式为format 3或format4,第二PUCCH的格式为format 3或format4,终端设备在X个符号上传输第二PUCCH,具体的,第一时隙中的第12个符号为承载DMRS的符号,第一时隙中的第11和第13-14个符号为承载UCI的符号,同时,终端设备在第一时隙的下一个时隙内内传输第一PUCCH,具体的,在第一时隙的下一个时隙内内的第1-14个符号传输第一PUCCH,其中,在图25中(a)中,终端设备在第一时隙的第11-14个符号上不使能跳频,在图25中(b)中,终端设备在第一时隙的第11-14个符号上使能跳频。25 is an example. FIG. 25 shows a schematic diagram of a method for transmitting an uplink control channel according to an embodiment of the present application. Figure 25 (a) shows that when the terminal device does not enable frequency hopping, the second PUCCH is transmitted on X symbols, and Figure 25 (b) shows that when the terminal device enables frequency hopping, in X symbols The second PUCCH is transmitted. In Figure 25, the first time slot is a special time slot, the ratio of the first time slot is 6:4:4, and the X symbols include the 11-14th symbols of the first time slot. In the existing RRC configuration There is a configuration of the length L=14 of the first PUCCH in the terminal device, according to the configuration or indication information, the length of the second PUCCH L'=4, the format of the first PUCCH is format 3 or format 4, and the format of the second PUCCH is format 3 Or format 4, the terminal device transmits the second PUCCH on X symbols, specifically, the 12th symbol in the first time slot is the symbol carrying the DMRS, and the 11th and 13th-14th symbols in the first time slot are At the same time, the terminal device transmits the first PUCCH in the next time slot of the first time slot. Specifically, the 1st to 14th symbols in the next time slot of the first time slot transmit the first PUCCH. A PUCCH, in which, in (a) of FIG. 25, the terminal device does not enable frequency hopping on the 11th to 14th symbols of the first time slot, and in (b) of FIG. 25, the terminal device is in the first time slot. Frequency hopping is enabled on symbols 11-14 of the slot.
结合图26举例来说,图26示出根据本申请一实施例的一种上行控制信道的传输方法的示意图,该图示出终端设备在X个符号及第二时隙内的部分上行符号或空闲符号上传输第二PUCCH的场景,第二时隙为与第一时隙相邻的下一个上行时隙,其中,图26中(a)示出终端设备不使能跳频的情况下,在X个符号及第二时隙内的部分上行符号上传输第二PUCCH,图26中(b)示出终端设备使能跳频的情况下,在X个符号及第二时隙内的部分上行符号上传输第二PUCCH。在图26中,第一时隙为特殊时隙,第一时隙的配比为6:4:4,X个符号包括第一时隙的第11-14个符号,在已有的RRC配置中存在第一PUCCH的长度L=12的配置,第一PUCCH的格式可以为format 3或format4;终端设备根据配置或指示信息,第二PUCCH的长度L’=6,,第二PUCCH的格式可以为format 3或format4,终端设备在X个符号及第二时隙内的前两个上行符号上传输第二PUCCH,具体的,第一时隙中的第13个符号为承载DMRS的符号,第一时隙中的第11-12和第14个符号为承载UCI的符号,第二时隙中的第1-2个符号为承载UCI的符号,同时,终端设备在第二时隙内传输第一PUCCH,具体的,在第二时隙内的第3-14个符号传输第一PUCCH;在图26中(b)中,第二PUCCH包括两个跳频部分,第一跳频部分包括第一时隙的第11-13个符号,第二跳频部分包括第一时隙的第14个符号及第二时隙的第1-2个符号,其中,第一时隙的第12个符号为承载DMRS的符号,第二时隙的第1个符号为承载DMRS的符号。For example, with reference to FIG. 26, FIG. 26 shows a schematic diagram of a method for transmitting an uplink control channel according to an embodiment of the present application. In the scenario where the second PUCCH is transmitted on the idle symbol, the second time slot is the next uplink time slot adjacent to the first time slot, wherein (a) in FIG. 26 shows that the terminal device does not enable frequency hopping, The second PUCCH is transmitted on X symbols and part of uplink symbols in the second time slot. Figure 26 (b) shows that when the terminal device enables frequency hopping, the part in X symbols and the second time slot The second PUCCH is transmitted on the uplink symbols. In Figure 26, the first time slot is a special time slot, the ratio of the first time slot is 6:4:4, and the X symbols include the 11-14th symbols of the first time slot. In the existing RRC configuration There is a configuration in which the length of the first PUCCH is L=12, and the format of the first PUCCH can be format 3 or format 4; according to the configuration or indication information of the terminal device, the length of the second PUCCH is L'=6, and the format of the second PUCCH can be For format 3 or format 4, the terminal device transmits the second PUCCH on X symbols and the first two uplink symbols in the second time slot. Specifically, the thirteenth symbol in the first time slot is a symbol that carries DMRS, and the first The 11th-12th and 14th symbols in a time slot are symbols that carry UCI, and the 1-2 symbols in the second time slot are symbols that carry UCI. At the same time, the terminal equipment transmits the symbols in the second time slot. A PUCCH, specifically, the 3-14th symbol in the second time slot transmits the first PUCCH; in (b) of FIG. 26 , the second PUCCH includes two frequency hopping parts, and the first frequency hopping part includes the first PUCCH. The 11th to 13th symbols of a time slot, the second frequency hopping part includes the 14th symbol of the first time slot and the 1st to 2nd symbols of the second time slot, wherein the 12th symbol of the first time slot is a symbol that bears DMRS, and the first symbol of the second slot is a symbol that bears DMRS.
图27示出根据本申请一实施例的一种上行控制信道的传输方法的流程图,如图27所示,该方法可以包括:FIG. 27 shows a flowchart of a method for transmitting an uplink control channel according to an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 27 , the method may include:
步骤2701、终端设备接收来自网络设备的配置信息或指示信息,配置信息或指示信息用于配置或指示终端设备发送第一PUCCH,第一PUCCH的传输长度为L个符号,第一PUCCH 的传输次数为N,N为大于或等于1的整数,L为大于或等于1的整数。Step 2701: The terminal device receives configuration information or indication information from the network device, the configuration information or indication information is used to configure or instruct the terminal device to send the first PUCCH, the transmission length of the first PUCCH is L symbols, and the number of transmissions of the first PUCCH is is N, where N is an integer greater than or equal to 1, and L is an integer greater than or equal to 1.
该步骤中可以参考图6中步骤601、图12中步骤1201、图19中步骤1901、图24中步骤2401。For this step, reference may be made to step 601 in FIG. 6 , step 1201 in FIG. 12 , step 1901 in FIG. 19 , and step 2401 in FIG. 24 .
步骤2702、终端设备根据所述配置信息或指示信息确定X个符号,X个符号位于第一时隙,且X个符号用于传输第一PUCCH。Step 2702: The terminal device determines X symbols according to the configuration information or indication information, the X symbols are located in the first time slot, and the X symbols are used for transmitting the first PUCCH.
步骤2703、当X小于L时,终端设备根据预设条件确定在X个符号上不传输第一PUCCH,或者终端设备在X个符号上传输第一PUCCH,或者终端设备在X个符号上传输第二PUCCH,或者终端设备在X个符号上传输DMRS。Step 2703: When X is less than L, the terminal device determines according to preset conditions that the first PUCCH is not transmitted on X symbols, or the terminal device transmits the first PUCCH on X symbols, or the terminal device transmits the first PUCCH on X symbols. Two PUCCH, or terminal equipment transmits DMRS on X symbols.
该步骤中可以参考图6中步骤602、图12中步骤1202、图19中步骤1902、图24中步骤2402。For this step, reference may be made to step 602 in FIG. 6 , step 1202 in FIG. 12 , step 1902 in FIG. 19 , and step 2402 in FIG. 24 .
其中,终端设备根据预设条件确定在X个符号上不传输第一PUCCH可以参考图6-11。Wherein, the terminal device determines not to transmit the first PUCCH on X symbols according to a preset condition, and reference may be made to FIG. 6-11 .
终端设备在X个符号上传输第一PUCCH可以参考图12-18;For the terminal equipment to transmit the first PUCCH on X symbols, refer to Figures 12-18;
终端设备在X个符号上传输第二PUCCH可以参考图25-26;The terminal equipment can refer to Figures 25-26 for transmitting the second PUCCH on X symbols;
终端设备在X个符号上传输DMRS可以参考图19-24;The terminal equipment can refer to Figure 19-24 for transmitting DMRS on X symbols;
本申请实施例中,终端设备基于配置信息或指示信息配置或指示的第一PUCCH的传输长度为L、传输次数为N,确定第一时隙内的X个符号不包括承载DMRS的符号,这X个符号存在无法译码的可能,终端设备根据预设条件确定在X个符号上不传输第一PUCCH,或者终端设备在X个符号上传输第一PUCCH,或者终端设备在X个符号上传输第二PUCCH,或者终端设备在X个符号上传输DMRS,从而解决传输第一PUCCH可能出现的无法译码的问题。In the embodiment of the present application, the terminal device determines that the X symbols in the first time slot do not include symbols bearing DMRS based on the configuration information or the indication information that the transmission length of the first PUCCH is L and the number of transmissions is N. It is possible that the X symbols cannot be decoded. The terminal device determines according to preset conditions that the first PUCCH is not transmitted on the X symbols, or the terminal device transmits the first PUCCH on the X symbols, or the terminal device transmits the X symbols. The second PUCCH, or the terminal device transmits the DMRS on X symbols, so as to solve the problem that the first PUCCH cannot be decoded.
相关技术中,采用Type-B传输PUCCH时存在在部分跳频位置上没有DMRS的问题。例如,如上述图2所示,特殊时隙(S slot)=10:2:2,startingSymbolIndex=12,L=14,PUCCH format 3或4,在图2中,圆圈标注的位置的两个符号没有附近的DMRS供其解调使用。再例如,如上述图3所示,S slot=6:4:4,startingSymbolIndex=9,L=12,圆圈标注的位置的一个符号没有附近的DMRS供其解调使用。再例如,如上述图4所示,S slot=10:2:2,startingSymbolIndex=12,L=14,PUCCH format 3或4,该图中属于另一种跳频方式,此时,圆圈标注的位置的最两个符号甚至都没有前面PUCCH传输的DMRS来参考,完全属于无法译码的情况。In the related art, when using Type-B to transmit PUCCH, there is a problem that there is no DMRS in some frequency hopping positions. For example, as shown in Figure 2 above, special time slot (S slot)=10:2:2, startingSymbolIndex=12, L=14, PUCCH format 3 or 4, in Figure 2, the two symbols in the position marked by the circle There is no nearby DMRS for its demodulation. For another example, as shown in FIG. 3 above, S slot=6:4:4, startingSymbolIndex=9, L=12, a symbol at the position marked by a circle has no nearby DMRS for its demodulation. For another example, as shown in Figure 4 above, S slot=10:2:2, startingSymbolIndex=12, L=14, PUCCH format 3 or 4, this figure belongs to another frequency hopping method, at this time, the circle marked The last two symbols of the position are not even referenced by the DMRS transmitted in the previous PUCCH, which completely belongs to the situation that cannot be decoded.
为了解决采用Type-B传输PUCCH时,在部分跳频位置上没有DMRS的问题,本申请实施例还提供了以下技术方案,可以应用于图5所示的通讯网络架构中。In order to solve the problem that there is no DMRS in some frequency hopping positions when using Type-B to transmit PUCCH, the embodiments of the present application also provide the following technical solutions, which can be applied to the communication network architecture shown in FIG. 5 .
在一个示例性实施例中:如果在时隙内的跳频部分上无DMRS,且下一个时隙为下行时隙,则终端设备放弃部分符号的传输;In an exemplary embodiment: if there is no DMRS on the frequency hopping part of the time slot, and the next time slot is a downlink time slot, the terminal device abandons the transmission of part of the symbols;
核心思想:在时隙内的在一个频域位置上的PUCCH符号只有承载UCI的符号,没有DMRS,且下一个时隙为下行时隙,终端设备放弃上述符号的传输。Core idea: The PUCCH symbol at one frequency domain position in the time slot only has the symbol carrying UCI, no DMRS, and the next time slot is a downlink time slot, and the terminal equipment abandons the transmission of the above symbols.
判断条件1:在一个时隙内可用符号中,一个频域位置上仅有承载UCI的符号,没有DMRS符号,上一个时隙和下一个时隙在该频域位置上也没有DMRS。Judgment condition 1: Among the available symbols in a time slot, there is only a symbol carrying UCI in a frequency domain position, and there is no DMRS symbol, and there is no DMRS in the frequency domain position in the previous time slot and the next time slot.
判断条件2:无DMRS的跳频部分与下一个承载DMRS的可用符号的间隔超过X个时隙,X大于或等于1。Judgment condition 2: The interval between the frequency hopping part without DMRS and the next available symbol carrying DMRS exceeds X time slots, and X is greater than or equal to 1.
判断条件3:定义dropping length(放弃长度),如上述表2所示,针对PUCCH format 3/4 两种格式的PUCCH,给出了不同PUCCH长度和有无额外DMRS场景下,放弃长度的符号数,当传输PUCCH满足PUCCH length(PUCCH长度),且在一个时隙内某个跳频位置的剩余符号小于或等于上述表2放弃长度时,该频域位置不传输PUCCH。特别说明的是,PUCCH可能使能时隙内跳频,即表2中“跳频”,因此,如果两个跳频部分长度不同,可能放弃长度也不同,从而在“跳频”列出现“1,1”两个数值,分别对应两个跳频部分。此外,表2中“0”代表的是没有放弃长度,即无需放弃该PUCCH的传输。Judgment Condition 3: Define dropping length, as shown in Table 2 above, for PUCCH in PUCCH format 3/4, the number of symbols with different PUCCH lengths and with or without additional DMRS is given. , when the transmitted PUCCH satisfies the PUCCH length (PUCCH length), and the remaining symbols in a certain frequency hopping position in a time slot are less than or equal to the abandonment length in Table 2, the frequency domain position does not transmit PUCCH. In particular, PUCCH may enable intra-slot frequency hopping, that is, "frequency hopping" in Table 2. Therefore, if the lengths of the two frequency hopping parts are different, the abandonment lengths may also be different, so that "frequency hopping" appears in the "frequency hopping" column. 1, 1" two values, corresponding to two frequency hopping parts respectively. In addition, "0" in Table 2 represents that the length is not abandoned, that is, the transmission of the PUCCH does not need to be abandoned.
举例如下,如上述图9所示,L=14、startingSymbolIndex=12,图9中时隙内最后两个符号无DMRS,可以查表2得到其放弃长度为3个符号,从而上述最后两个符号放弃传输。For example, as shown in Figure 9 above, L=14, startingSymbolIndex=12, the last two symbols in the time slot in Figure 9 do not have DMRS, and Table 2 can be consulted to obtain the abandonment length of 3 symbols, so the last two symbols above Abandon the transfer.
本实施例中,提出的Type-B传输PUCCH中放弃部分PUCCH传输的判断条件,有效避免了无DMRS的问题出现。In this embodiment, the proposed judgment condition for abandoning part of PUCCH transmission in Type-B transmission PUCCH effectively avoids the problem of no DMRS.
在另一个示例性实施例中:如果在时隙内的跳频部分上无DMRS,终端设备不使能当前位置跳频;In another exemplary embodiment: if there is no DMRS on the frequency hopping portion of the time slot, the terminal device does not enable current location frequency hopping;
核心思想:如果在时隙内的跳频部分上无DMRS,当前位置跳频不使能或调换频域位置。Core idea: If there is no DMRS on the frequency hopping part in the time slot, the frequency hopping at the current location is not enabled or the frequency domain location is exchanged.
一种实现方式中,终端设备不使能跳频:如上述图13所示,当判断出一个跳频部分上无DMRS时,终端设备通过不使能该跳频部分跳频,使得该跳频部分与上一个跳频部分所在的频域位置相同,上一个跳频部分可能与当前跳频部分位于同一次PUCCH传输,也可能不是同一次PUCCH传输。In an implementation manner, the terminal equipment does not enable frequency hopping: as shown in Figure 13 above, when it is judged that there is no DMRS on a frequency hopping part, the terminal equipment makes the frequency hopping by not enabling the frequency hopping of the frequency hopping part. The last frequency hopping part and the previous frequency hopping part may be located in the same PUCCH transmission, or may not be the same PUCCH transmission.
在另一种实现方式中,终端设备调换频域:每次PUCCH传输的两个频域位置切换,如上述图16所示,在第k个分别在频域位置pos1和频域位置pos2的两个频域位置跳频传输,在第k+1次分别在pos2和pos1两个频域位置跳频传输,从而使得前一个时隙内最后两个符号在时隙内没有DMRS的场景下,可以使用同一个频域位置其余跳频部分的DMRS。In another implementation manner, the terminal equipment switches the frequency domain: the two frequency domain positions of each PUCCH transmission are switched, as shown in the above FIG. Frequency hopping transmission at each frequency domain position, and frequency hopping transmission at two frequency domain positions pos2 and pos1 respectively in the k+1th time, so that the last two symbols in the previous time slot have no DMRS in the time slot. Use the DMRS of the remaining frequency hopping parts at the same frequency domain location.
本实施例提出的方案能够使得没有DMRS的符号复用之前传输的DMRS符号,从而解决的DMRS缺失的问题。The solution proposed in this embodiment enables symbols without DMRS to multiplex previously transmitted DMRS symbols, thereby solving the problem of lack of DMRS.
在另一个示例性实施例中:终端设备在时隙内无DMRS的跳频部分上放置DMRS;In another exemplary embodiment: the terminal device places the DMRS on the frequency hopping portion of the time slot without the DMRS;
核心思想:在时隙内无DMRS的跳频部分上放置DMRS,这样做的效果是可以与之前的跳频部分上的DMRS联合增强DMRS的信道测量性能。The core idea is to place the DMRS on the frequency hopping part without DMRS in the time slot. The effect of this is that the channel measurement performance of the DMRS can be jointly enhanced with the DMRS on the previous frequency hopping part.
通过时隙配置情况,该PUCCH跳频部分无DMRS,导致该跳频部分不一定能够解调,如果该跳频部分不传输,则导致该部分资源浪费,而在该部分上增加额外的DMRS,是一种增强传输性能的方法。According to the time slot configuration, there is no DMRS in the frequency hopping part of the PUCCH, so that the frequency hopping part may not be able to be demodulated. It is a method to enhance transmission performance.
一种实现方式,在该部分上传输DMRS,如果出现至少一个符号,上述至少一个的DMRS也位于同一频域位置,如上述图20中(b)所示。In one implementation, the DMRS is transmitted on this part, and if at least one symbol appears, the at least one DMRS is also located in the same frequency domain position, as shown in (b) of the above-mentioned FIG. 20 .
另一种实现方式,如果PUCCH配置了intra-slot hopping,即时隙内跳频,则N个符号的情况下(N>1),按照跳频传输DMRS,第一DMRS部分含
Figure PCTCN2021115721-appb-000025
个符号,第二DMRS部分含
Figure PCTCN2021115721-appb-000026
个符号,如上述图21所示。
In another implementation manner, if intra-slot hopping is configured on the PUCCH, that is, frequency hopping within the slot, in the case of N symbols (N>1), the DMRS is transmitted according to frequency hopping, and the first DMRS part contains
Figure PCTCN2021115721-appb-000025
symbols, the second DMRS part contains
Figure PCTCN2021115721-appb-000026
symbols, as shown in Figure 21 above.
本实施例的技术方案可以解决Type-B传输PUCCH时,跳频部分的DMRS缺失问题,同时有效利用这些符号承载DMRS,增强DMRS的检测性能,从而提高覆盖范围。The technical solution of this embodiment can solve the problem of missing DMRS in the frequency hopping part when Type-B transmits PUCCH, and at the same time effectively use these symbols to carry DMRS, enhance the detection performance of DMRS, and thus improve the coverage.
在另一个示例性实施例中:时隙内无DMRS的跳频部分与上一跳频部分的频域位置相同,以复用前一跳频部分的DMRS;对于配置了大于2个跳频位置hopping position的情况下,下一个DMRS可能位于多个下行时隙之后,则剩余的符号放置在上一跳频部分的译码效果更好。In another exemplary embodiment: the frequency hopping part without DMRS in the time slot is the same as the frequency domain position of the previous frequency hopping part, so as to reuse the DMRS of the previous frequency hopping part; if more than 2 frequency hopping positions are configured In the case of hopping position, the next DMRS may be located after multiple downlink time slots, so the decoding effect of the remaining symbols placed in the previous frequency hopping part is better.
核心思想:时隙内无DMRS的跳频部分与上一跳频部分的频域位置相同,从而使用上一个跳频部分的DMRS进行解调。The core idea is that the frequency hopping part without DMRS in the time slot has the same frequency domain position as the previous frequency hopping part, so that the DMRS of the previous frequency hopping part is used for demodulation.
对于配置了大于或等于2个跳频位置hopping position的情况下,下一个DMRS可能位于多个下行时隙之后,甚至这些符号所在的频域位置没有DMRS,如上述图14中“更新频域位置”之前所示的情况。For the case where more than or equal to 2 frequency hopping positions hopping positions are configured, the next DMRS may be located after multiple downlink time slots, and even the frequency domain positions where these symbols are located have no DMRS, as shown in "Update frequency domain position" in Figure 14 above. "The situation shown earlier.
此时,针对这种情况,配置剩余的符号放置在上一跳频部分的相同频域位置,从而最大限度利用上一个跳频部分的DMRS,从而提高译码效果,即对于时隙内跳频部分且无DMRS的情况,更新其频域位置到上一个跳频位置,如上述图14中“更新频域位置”之后所示的情况。At this time, in view of this situation, the remaining symbols are configured to be placed in the same frequency domain position of the previous frequency hopping part, so as to maximize the use of the DMRS of the previous frequency hopping part, thereby improving the decoding effect, that is, for frequency hopping in the time slot In the case of partial and no DMRS, the frequency domain position is updated to the last frequency hopping position, as shown after "Update frequency domain position" in Figure 14 above.
本实施例的技术方案更新这些符号的频域位置,从而能够复用之前传输的DMRS;可以解决Type-B传输PUCCH时,跳频部分的DMRS缺失问题。The technical solution of this embodiment updates the frequency domain positions of these symbols, so that the previously transmitted DMRS can be multiplexed; the problem of missing DMRS in the frequency hopping part when Type-B transmits PUCCH can be solved.
在另一个示例性实施例中:基于传统终端设备(legacy UE)的复用结构,确定额外传输符号位置及内容;其中,In another exemplary embodiment: based on the multiplexing structure of the legacy terminal equipment (legacy UE), the location and content of the additional transmission symbols are determined; wherein,
符号数大于或等于4时,可以增加一个L’长度的PUCCH format3/4传输。When the number of symbols is greater than or equal to 4, an additional L' length of PUCCH format3/4 can be transmitted.
符号数较少,不足提供L个长度内的DMRS符号,则放弃这些符号。If the number of symbols is too small to provide DMRS symbols within L lengths, these symbols are discarded.
可选的,符号数较少,增加的符号作为额外的DMRS或L截短后的符号。Optionally, the number of symbols is less, and the added symbols are used as extra DMRS or L-truncated symbols.
核心思想:基于已有的PUCCH资源配置信息,确定额外传输符号位置及内容,并通过指示信息,指示额外的传输PUCCH传输资源。Core idea: Determine the location and content of additional transmission symbols based on the existing PUCCH resource configuration information, and indicate additional transmission PUCCH transmission resources through indication information.
一种实现方式:可以增加一个L’长度的PUCCH format 3/4传输;可选的,可用符号数大于等于4;其中,L’长度的跳频情况可选择是否使用RRC配置的跳频hopping。具体的,在PUCCH-config中配置额外PUCCH资源集合additional PUCCH resource set,与现有的资源集合resource set可前后位置匹配,比如现有的resource set中一个资源startingSymbolIndex是0,长度为14,那么考虑到S slot=6:4:4的配置情况下,additional PUCCH resrouce set中一个资源的startingSymbolIndex是10,长度为4。在具体调度时,由DCI指示PDSCH传输时,额外指示additional PUCCH resource set中的资源,终端设备使用两个resource set中的PUCCH资源(可能含重复次数等)。An implementation method: an L' length of PUCCH format 3/4 transmission can be added; optionally, the number of available symbols is greater than or equal to 4; among them, the frequency hopping of L' length can be selected whether to use the frequency hopping configured by RRC. Specifically, configure an additional PUCCH resource set additional PUCCH resource set in PUCCH-config, which can be matched with the existing resource set resource set. For example, a resource startingSymbolIndex in the existing resource set is 0 and the length is 14, then consider In the configuration of S slot=6:4:4, the startingSymbolIndex of a resource in the additional PUCCH resrouce set is 10 and the length is 4. During specific scheduling, when PDSCH transmission is indicated by DCI, resources in the additional PUCCH resource set are additionally indicated, and the terminal device uses the PUCCH resources in the two resource sets (may include the number of repetitions, etc.).
举例来说,如上述图25所示,S slot=6:4:4,startingSymbolIndex=10,已有的RRC配置中存在L=14的配置,得到L’=4;进而配置对应L’的PUCCH,可能使用跳频(如图25中(a)所示)也可能不使用跳频传输(如图25中(b)所示)。For example, as shown in Figure 25 above, S slot=6:4:4, startingSymbolIndex=10, there is a configuration of L=14 in the existing RRC configuration, and L'=4 is obtained; then configure the PUCCH corresponding to L' , may use frequency hopping (as shown in Figure 25 (a)) or may not use frequency hopping transmission (as shown in Figure 25 (b)).
另一种实现方式:符号数较少,不足提供L个长度内的DMRS符号,终端设备放弃相应符号上的PUCCH传输。Another implementation manner: the number of symbols is small, and the DMRS symbols within the length of L are insufficient to provide, and the terminal equipment abandons the PUCCH transmission on the corresponding symbols.
如上述图11所示,S slot=10:2:2,startingSymbolIndex=13,已有的RRC配置中存在startingSymbolIndex=0,L=14的配置,此时,考虑到已有的PUCCH有与其他终端设备的复用,为了避免资源浪费,startingSymbolIndex=13的PUCCH传输放弃。As shown in Figure 11 above, S slot=10:2:2, startingSymbolIndex=13, and there is a startingSymbolIndex=0, L=14 configuration in the existing RRC configuration. At this time, considering that the existing PUCCH has connections with other terminals For device multiplexing, in order to avoid resource waste, PUCCH transmission with startingSymbolIndex=13 is abandoned.
另一种实现方式:增加的额外符号作为附加DMRS或L截短后的符号;上述L截短的PUCCH或者额外的DMRS可跨时隙边界。Another implementation manner: the added extra symbols are used as additional DMRS or L-truncated symbols; the above-mentioned L-truncated PUCCH or extra DMRS may cross the slot boundary.
可选的,当额外符号用于承载DMRS且跳频时,第一DMRS部分含
Figure PCTCN2021115721-appb-000027
个符号,第二DMRS部分含
Figure PCTCN2021115721-appb-000028
个符号。
Optionally, when the extra symbol is used to carry DMRS and frequency hopping, the first DMRS part contains
Figure PCTCN2021115721-appb-000027
symbols, the second DMRS part contains
Figure PCTCN2021115721-appb-000028
symbol.
例如,如上述图18及图23所示,图18中L*即表示L截短,图23中附加DMRS即表示L截短,S slot=6:4:4,startsymbolIndex=10,已有的RRC配置中存在startingSymbolIndex=2, L=12的配置,此时S slot剩余4个符号,下一个时隙剩余了前两个符号,可以配置L=12的PUCCH传输,但是只占据6个符号,即L截短后的PUCCH,如上述图18所示。另一种可能的情况,在上述6个符号上增加额外的DMRS,如果不跳频,上述6个符号位于同一频域位置上,如果使能跳频,第一DMRS部分含
Figure PCTCN2021115721-appb-000029
个符号,第二DMRS部分含
Figure PCTCN2021115721-appb-000030
个符号,如上述图23所示。
For example, as shown in Fig. 18 and Fig. 23 above, L* in Fig. 18 means L truncation, adding DMRS in Fig. 23 means L truncation, S slot=6:4:4, startsymbolIndex=10, existing There is a configuration of startingSymbolIndex=2, L=12 in the RRC configuration. At this time, there are 4 symbols left in the S slot, and the first two symbols are left in the next time slot. The PUCCH transmission of L=12 can be configured, but only 6 symbols are occupied. That is, the L-truncated PUCCH is shown in FIG. 18 above. Another possible situation is to add additional DMRS to the above 6 symbols. If frequency hopping is not used, the above 6 symbols are located in the same frequency domain position. If frequency hopping is enabled, the first DMRS part contains
Figure PCTCN2021115721-appb-000029
symbols, the second DMRS part contains
Figure PCTCN2021115721-appb-000030
symbols, as shown in Figure 23 above.
再例如:如上述图17及图22所示,S slot=6:4:4,startsymbolIndex=10,已有的RRC配置中存在startsymbolIndex=0,L=14的配置。For another example: as shown in Figure 17 and Figure 22 above, S slot=6:4:4, startsymbolIndex=10, and there is a configuration of startsymbolIndex=0, L=14 in the existing RRC configuration.
本实施例的技术方案可以解决Type-B传输PUCCH时,跳频部分的DMRS缺失问题;同时,基于已有的PUCCH配置进行调度额外PUCCH资源,从而不影响现有配置中PUCCH复用,提高的频域资源利用率。The technical solution of this embodiment can solve the problem of missing DMRS in the frequency hopping part when Type-B transmits PUCCH; at the same time, additional PUCCH resources are scheduled based on the existing PUCCH configuration, so that the PUCCH multiplexing in the existing configuration is not affected, and the improved Frequency domain resource utilization.
图28示出根据本申请一实施例的一种上行控制信道的传输方法的流程图,该方法可以应用于以Type-B的方式传输PUCCH的场景,如图28所示,该方法可以包括以下步骤:FIG. 28 shows a flowchart of a method for transmitting an uplink control channel according to an embodiment of the present application. The method can be applied to a scenario of transmitting PUCCH in a Type-B manner. As shown in FIG. 28 , the method may include the following step:
步骤2801、网络设备向终端设备发送配置信息或指示信息,配置信息或指示信息用于配置或指示终端设备发送第一PUCCH,第一PUCCH的传输长度为L个符号,第一PUCCH的传输次数为N,N为大于或等于1的整数,L为大于或等于1的整数;X个符号位于第一时隙,且述X个符号用于传输第一PUCCH;Step 2801: The network device sends configuration information or indication information to the terminal device, where the configuration information or indication information is used to configure or instruct the terminal device to send the first PUCCH, the transmission length of the first PUCCH is L symbols, and the transmission times of the first PUCCH is N, N is an integer greater than or equal to 1, L is an integer greater than or equal to 1; X symbols are located in the first time slot, and the X symbols are used to transmit the first PUCCH;
步骤2802、当X小于L时,网络设备根据预设条件确定在X个符号上不接收第一PUCCH,或者网络设备在X个符号上接收第一PUCCH,或者网络设备在X个符号上接收第二PUCCH,或者网络设备在X个符号上接收DMRS。Step 2802: When X is less than L, the network device determines according to a preset condition that the first PUCCH is not received on X symbols, or the network device receives the first PUCCH on X symbols, or the network device receives the first PUCCH on X symbols. Two PUCCH, or the network device receives DMRS on X symbols.
在一种可能的实现方式中,X个符号不包括承载DMRS的符号。In a possible implementation, the X symbols do not include symbols carrying DMRS.
在一种可能的实现方式中,网络设备根据预设条件确定在X个符号上不接收第一PUCCH,可以包括:当X个符号所在的频域位置与第一时隙及第二时隙内的承载DMRS的符号所在的频域位置不同时,网络设备确定在X符号上不接收第一PUCCH;其中,第一时隙与第二时隙相邻。In a possible implementation manner, the network device determines not to receive the first PUCCH on X symbols according to a preset condition, which may include: when the frequency domain positions where the X symbols are located are within the first time slot and the second time slot When the frequency domain positions of the symbols carrying the DMRS of X are different, the network device determines that the first PUCCH is not received on the X symbol; wherein the first time slot is adjacent to the second time slot.
在一种可能的实现方式中,网络设备根据预设条件确定在X个符号上不接收第一PUCCH,可以包括:当X个符号与第一符号之间间隔超过第一阈值时,网络设备确定在X个符号上不接收第一PUCCH;其中,第一符号为位于X个符号之后的第一个承载DMRS的符号。In a possible implementation manner, determining that the network device does not receive the first PUCCH on X symbols according to a preset condition may include: when the interval between the X symbols and the first symbol exceeds a first threshold, the network device determines The first PUCCH is not received on X symbols; wherein, the first symbol is the first symbol that carries the DMRS after the X symbols.
在一种可能的实现方式中,网络设备根据预设条件确定在X个符号上不接收第一PUCCH,包括:当X小于或等于第二阈值时,网络设备确定在X个符号上不接收第一PUCCH;其中,第二阈值根据长度L、DMRS配置方式、第一PUCCH的格式以及第一PUCCH的跳频方式中的至少其中之一确定。In a possible implementation manner, the network device determines not to receive the first PUCCH on X symbols according to a preset condition, including: when X is less than or equal to the second threshold, the network device determines not to receive the first PUCCH on X symbols A PUCCH; wherein the second threshold is determined according to at least one of the length L, the DMRS configuration mode, the format of the first PUCCH, and the frequency hopping mode of the first PUCCH.
在一种可能的实现方式中,网络设备根据预设条件确定在X个符号上不接收第一PUCCH,包括:当第三时隙中包括下行符号时,网络设备确定在X个符号上不接收第一PUCCH;其中,第三时隙与第一时隙相邻,且位于第一时隙之后。In a possible implementation manner, the network device determines not to receive the first PUCCH on X symbols according to a preset condition, including: when the third time slot includes downlink symbols, the network device determines not to receive on X symbols The first PUCCH; wherein the third time slot is adjacent to the first time slot and is located after the first time slot.
在一种可能的实现方式中,网络设备在X个符号上接收第一PUCCH,包括:In a possible implementation manner, the network device receives the first PUCCH over X symbols, including:
网络设备根据X个符号的前一跳频部分所在的频域位置,在X个符号上接收所述第一PUCCH;或者,网络设备根据第二符号所在的频域位置,在X个符号上接收第一PUCCH;其中,第二符号与X个符号相邻,或者第二符号与X个符号间隔在14个符号内。The network device receives the first PUCCH on X symbols according to the frequency domain position where the previous frequency hopping part of the X symbols is located; or, the network device receives the first PUCCH on X symbols according to the frequency domain position where the second symbol is located The first PUCCH; wherein the second symbol is adjacent to X symbols, or the second symbol and X symbols are spaced within 14 symbols.
在一种可能的实现方式中,配置信息或指示信息还用于指示终端设备在X个符号上不使 能跳频。In a possible implementation manner, the configuration information or the indication information is further used to instruct the terminal device not to enable frequency hopping on X symbols.
在一种可能的实现方式中,配置信息或指示信息还用于指示终端设备将X个符号所在跳频部分的频域位置调整为与X个符号的前一跳频部分的频域位置相同,且将X个符号的下一跳频部分的频域位置调整为与X个符号的频域位置相同。In a possible implementation manner, the configuration information or the indication information is further used to instruct the terminal device to adjust the frequency domain position of the frequency hopping part where the X symbols are located to be the same as the frequency domain position of the previous frequency hopping part of the X symbols, And the frequency domain position of the next frequency hopping part of the X symbols is adjusted to be the same as the frequency domain position of the X symbols.
在一种可能的实现方式中,当网络设备在X个符号上接收第二PUCCH时,配置信息或指示信息还用于指示第二PUCCH的长度。In a possible implementation manner, when the network device receives the second PUCCH over X symbols, the configuration information or the indication information is further used to indicate the length of the second PUCCH.
在一种可能的实现方式中,网络设备在X个符号上接收第二PUCCH,可以包括:在X个符号及第二时隙内的部分上行符号或空闲符号上接收第二PUCCH;其中,第一时隙与第二时隙相邻。In a possible implementation manner, the network device receiving the second PUCCH on X symbols may include: receiving the second PUCCH on X symbols and some uplink symbols or idle symbols in the second time slot; wherein, the first A time slot is adjacent to the second time slot.
在一种可能的实现方式中,网络设备在X个符号上接收DMRS,可以包括:在X个符号及第二时隙内的部分上行符号或空闲符号上接收DMRS;其中,第一时隙与第二时隙相邻。In a possible implementation manner, the network device receiving the DMRS on the X symbols may include: receiving the DMRS on the X symbols and some uplink symbols or idle symbols in the second time slot; wherein the first time slot is the same as the The second time slot is adjacent.
在一种可能的实现方式中,网络设备在X个符号上接收第一PUCCH,可以包括:网络设备在X个符号及第二时隙内的部分上行符号或空闲符号上接收第一PUCCH;其中,第一时隙与第二时隙相邻。In a possible implementation manner, the network device receiving the first PUCCH on X symbols may include: the network device receiving the first PUCCH on X symbols and some uplink symbols or idle symbols in the second time slot; wherein , the first time slot is adjacent to the second time slot.
在一种可能的实现方式中网络设备在X个符号上接收DMRS,可以包括:网络设备在X个符号上接收以跳频方式传输的DMRS,其中,X个符号的第一跳频部分包括
Figure PCTCN2021115721-appb-000031
个符号,X个符号的第二跳频部分包括
Figure PCTCN2021115721-appb-000032
个符号。
In a possible implementation manner, the network device receives the DMRS on X symbols, which may include: the network device receives the DMRS transmitted in the frequency hopping manner on the X symbols, wherein the first frequency hopping part of the X symbols includes:
Figure PCTCN2021115721-appb-000031
symbols, the second frequency hopping portion of the X symbols includes
Figure PCTCN2021115721-appb-000032
symbol.
基于上述技术方案,网络设备向终端设备发送的配置信息或指示信息配置或指示的第一PUCCH的传输长度为L、传输次数为N,由此能够确定第一时隙内的X个符号不包括承载DMRS的符号,这X个符号存在无法译码的可能,网络设备根据预设条件确定在X个符号上不接收第一PUCCH,或者在X个符号上接收第一PUCCH,或者在X个符号上接收第二PUCCH,或者在X个符号上接收DMRS,从而解决传输第一PUCCH可能出现的无法译码的问题。Based on the above technical solutions, the transmission length of the first PUCCH configured or indicated by the configuration information or the indication information sent by the network device to the terminal device is L and the number of transmissions is N, so it can be determined that the X symbols in the first time slot do not include A symbol carrying a DMRS, the X symbols may not be decoded, and the network device determines according to preset conditions that the first PUCCH is not received on the X symbols, or the first PUCCH is received on the X symbols, or the X symbols are received. The second PUCCH is received on the TX, or the DMRS is received on the X symbols, so as to solve the problem that the first PUCCH cannot be decoded.
上述实施例的各种可能的实现方式或说明参见上文,此处不再赘述。Various possible implementation manners or descriptions of the foregoing embodiments are referred to above, and details are not repeated here.
图29示出根据本申请一实施例的一种通信装置的结构示意图,如图29所示,通信装置包括:FIG. 29 shows a schematic structural diagram of a communication device according to an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 29 , the communication device includes:
第一模块2901,用于终端设备接收来自网络设备的配置信息或指示信息,配置信息或指示信息用于配置或指示所述终端设备发送第一PUCCH,第一PUCCH的传输长度为L个符号,第一PUCCH的传输次数为N,N为大于或等于1的整数,L为大于或等于1的整数;The first module 2901 is used for a terminal device to receive configuration information or indication information from a network device, where the configuration information or indication information is used to configure or instruct the terminal device to send a first PUCCH, and the transmission length of the first PUCCH is L symbols, The number of times of transmission of the first PUCCH is N, where N is an integer greater than or equal to 1, and L is an integer greater than or equal to 1;
第二模块2901,用于终端设备根据所述配置信息或指示信息确定X个符号,X个符号位于第一时隙,且X个符号用于传输第一PUCCH;The second module 2901 is used for the terminal device to determine X symbols according to the configuration information or the indication information, where the X symbols are located in the first time slot, and the X symbols are used to transmit the first PUCCH;
第二模块2901,还用于当X小于L时,终端设备根据预设条件确定在X个符号上不传输第一PUCCH,或者终端设备在所述X个符号上传输第一PUCCH,或者终端设备在X个符号上传输第二PUCCH,或者终端设备在X个符号上传输DMRS。The second module 2901 is further configured to, when X is less than L, the terminal device determines not to transmit the first PUCCH on the X symbols according to a preset condition, or the terminal device transmits the first PUCCH on the X symbols, or the terminal device transmits the first PUCCH on the X symbols. The second PUCCH is transmitted on X symbols, or the terminal device transmits DMRS on X symbols.
在一种可能的实现方式中,X个符号不包括承载DMRS的符号。In a possible implementation, the X symbols do not include symbols carrying DMRS.
在一种可能的实现方式中,第二模块,还用于:当X个符号所在的频域位置与第一时隙及第二时隙内的承载DMRS的符号所在的频域位置不同时,终端设备确定在X符号上不传输第一PUCCH;其中,第一时隙与第二时隙相邻。In a possible implementation manner, the second module is further configured to: when the frequency domain positions where the X symbols are located are different from the frequency domain positions where the DMRS-bearing symbols in the first time slot and the second time slot are located, The terminal device determines not to transmit the first PUCCH on the X symbol; wherein the first time slot is adjacent to the second time slot.
在一种可能的实现方式中,第二模块,还用于:当X个符号与第一符号之间间隔超过第 一阈值时,终端设备确定在所述X个符号上不传输第一PUCCH;其中,第一符号为位于X个符号之后的第一个承载DMRS的符号。In a possible implementation manner, the second module is further configured to: when the interval between the X symbols and the first symbol exceeds a first threshold, the terminal device determines not to transmit the first PUCCH on the X symbols; The first symbol is the first symbol that carries the DMRS after the X symbols.
在一种可能的实现方式中,第二模块,还用于:当X小于或等于第二阈值时,终端设备确定在X个符号上不传输第一PUCCH;其中,第二阈值根据长度L、DMRS配置方式、第一PUCCH的格式以及第一PUCCH的跳频方式中的至少其中之一确定。In a possible implementation manner, the second module is further configured to: when X is less than or equal to the second threshold, the terminal device determines not to transmit the first PUCCH on the X symbols; wherein the second threshold is based on the length L, At least one of the DMRS configuration mode, the format of the first PUCCH, and the frequency hopping mode of the first PUCCH is determined.
在一种可能的实现方式中,第二模块,还用于:当第三时隙中包括下行符号时,终端设备确定在X个符号上不传输第一PUCCH;其中,第三时隙与第一时隙相邻,且位于第一时隙之后。In a possible implementation manner, the second module is further configured to: when the third time slot includes downlink symbols, the terminal device determines not to transmit the first PUCCH on X symbols; wherein the third time slot is the same as the first PUCCH. A slot is adjacent and after the first slot.
在一种可能的实现方式中,第二模块,还用于:终端设备根据X个符号的前一跳频部分所在的频域位置,在X个符号上传输第一PUCCH;或者,终端设备根据第二符号所在的频域位置,在X个符号上传输第一PUCCH;其中,第二符号与X个符号相邻,或者第二符号与X个符号间隔在14个符号内。In a possible implementation manner, the second module is further configured to: the terminal device transmits the first PUCCH on the X symbols according to the frequency domain position where the previous frequency hopping part of the X symbols is located; At the frequency domain position where the second symbol is located, the first PUCCH is transmitted on X symbols; wherein the second symbol is adjacent to the X symbols, or the second symbol and the X symbols are spaced within 14 symbols.
在一种可能的实现方式中,第二模块,还用于:终端设备在X个符号上不使能跳频。In a possible implementation manner, the second module is further configured to: the terminal device does not enable frequency hopping on X symbols.
在一种可能的实现方式中,第二模块,还用于:终端设备将X个符号所在跳频部分的频域位置调整为与X个符号的前一跳频部分的频域位置相同,且将X个符号的下一跳频部分的频域位置调整为与X个符号的频域位置相同。In a possible implementation manner, the second module is further configured to: the terminal device adjusts the frequency domain position of the frequency hopping part where the X symbols are located to be the same as the frequency domain position of the previous frequency hopping part of the X symbols, and Adjust the frequency domain position of the next frequency hopping part of X symbols to be the same as the frequency domain position of X symbols.
在一种可能的实现方式中,第二模块,还用于当终端设备在X个符号上传输第二PUCCH时,配置信息或指示信息还用于指示第二PUCCH的长度。In a possible implementation manner, the second module is further configured to, when the terminal device transmits the second PUCCH on X symbols, the configuration information or the indication information is further configured to indicate the length of the second PUCCH.
在一种可能的实现方式中,第二模块,还用于:终端设备仅在X个符号上传输第二PUCCH,或者,终端设备在X个符号及第二时隙内的部分上行符号或空闲符号上传输第二PUCCH;其中,第一时隙与第二时隙相邻。In a possible implementation manner, the second module is further configured to: the terminal device transmits the second PUCCH only on X symbols, or the terminal device transmits the second PUCCH on X symbols and part of uplink symbols or idle in the second time slot A second PUCCH is transmitted on the symbol; wherein the first slot is adjacent to the second slot.
在一种可能的实现方式中,第二模块,还用于:终端设备仅在X个符号上传输DMRS,或者,终端设备在所述X个符号及第二时隙内的部分上行符号或空闲符号上传输DMRS;其中,第一时隙与第二时隙相邻。In a possible implementation manner, the second module is further configured to: the terminal device transmits the DMRS only on X symbols, or the terminal device transmits the DMRS in the X symbols and part of the uplink symbols in the second time slot or is idle The DMRS is transmitted on the symbol; wherein the first time slot is adjacent to the second time slot.
在一种可能的实现方式中,第二模块,还用于:终端设备在X个符号及第二时隙内的部分上行符号或空闲符号上传输第一PUCCH;其中,第一时隙与第二时隙相邻。In a possible implementation manner, the second module is further configured to: the terminal device transmits the first PUCCH on X symbols and some uplink symbols or idle symbols in the second time slot; The two time slots are adjacent.
在一种可能的实现方式中,第二模块,还用于:终端设备在X个符号上以跳频方式传输DMRS,其中,X个符号的第一跳频部分包括
Figure PCTCN2021115721-appb-000033
个符号,X个符号的第二跳频部分包括
Figure PCTCN2021115721-appb-000034
个符号。
In a possible implementation manner, the second module is further configured to: the terminal device transmits the DMRS in a frequency hopping manner over X symbols, wherein the first frequency hopping part of the X symbols includes
Figure PCTCN2021115721-appb-000033
symbols, the second frequency hopping portion of the X symbols includes
Figure PCTCN2021115721-appb-000034
symbol.
基于上述技术方案,终端设备基于配置信息或指示信息配置或指示的第一PUCCH的传输长度为L、传输次数为N,确定第一时隙内的X个符号不包括承载DMRS的符号,这X个符号存在无法译码的可能,终端设备根据预设条件确定在X个符号上不传输第一PUCCH,或者终端设备在X个符号上传输第一PUCCH,或者终端设备在X个符号上传输第二PUCCH,或者终端设备在X个符号上传输DMRS,从而解决传输第一PUCCH可能出现的无法译码的问题。Based on the above technical solution, the terminal device determines that the X symbols in the first time slot do not include symbols bearing DMRS, based on the configuration information or the indication information that the transmission length of the first PUCCH is L and the number of transmissions is N. There is a possibility that the number of symbols cannot be decoded. The terminal device determines according to preset conditions that the first PUCCH is not transmitted on the X symbols, or the terminal device transmits the first PUCCH on the X symbols, or the terminal device transmits the first PUCCH on the X symbols. Two PUCCHs, or the terminal device transmits DMRS on X symbols, so as to solve the problem that the first PUCCH cannot be decoded.
上述实施例的各种可能的实现方式或说明参见上文,此处不再赘述。Various possible implementation manners or descriptions of the foregoing embodiments are referred to above, and details are not repeated here.
图30示出根据本申请一实施例的一种通信装置的结构示意图,如图30所示,通信装置包括:FIG. 30 shows a schematic structural diagram of a communication device according to an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 30 , the communication device includes:
第三模块3001,用于网络设备向终端设备发送配置信息或指示信息,配置信息或指示信 息用于配置或指示终端设备发送第一PUCCH,第一PUCCH的传输长度为L个符号,第一PUCCH的传输次数为N,N为大于或等于1的整数,L为大于或等于1的整数;X个符号位于第一时隙,且X个符号用于传输第一PUCCH;The third module 3001 is used for the network device to send configuration information or indication information to the terminal device, the configuration information or indication information is used to configure or instruct the terminal device to send the first PUCCH, the transmission length of the first PUCCH is L symbols, and the first PUCCH The number of times of transmission is N, where N is an integer greater than or equal to 1, and L is an integer greater than or equal to 1; X symbols are located in the first time slot, and X symbols are used to transmit the first PUCCH;
第四模块3002,用于当X小于L时,网络设备根据预设条件确定在X个符号上不接收第一PUCCH,或者网络设备在X个符号上接收第一PUCCH,或者网络设备在X个符号上接收第二PUCCH,或者网络设备在X个符号上接收DMRS。The fourth module 3002 is configured to, when X is less than L, the network device determines according to a preset condition that the first PUCCH is not received on the X symbols, or the network device receives the first PUCCH on the X symbols, or the network device receives the first PUCCH on the X symbols. The second PUCCH is received on the symbol, or the network device receives the DMRS on X symbols.
在一种可能的实现方式中,X个符号不包括承载DMRS的符号。In a possible implementation, the X symbols do not include symbols carrying DMRS.
在一种可能的实现方式中,第四模块,还用于:当X个符号所在的频域位置与第一时隙及第二时隙内的承载DMRS的符号所在的频域位置不同时,网络设备确定在X符号上不接收第一PUCCH;其中,第一时隙与第二时隙相邻。In a possible implementation manner, the fourth module is further configured to: when the frequency domain positions where the X symbols are located are different from the frequency domain positions where the DMRS-bearing symbols in the first time slot and the second time slot are located, The network device determines that the first PUCCH is not received on the X symbol; wherein the first time slot is adjacent to the second time slot.
在一种可能的实现方式中,第四模块,还用于:当X个符号与第一符号之间间隔超过第一阈值时,网络设备确定在X个符号上不接收第一PUCCH;其中,第一符号为位于X个符号之后的第一个承载DMRS的符号。In a possible implementation manner, the fourth module is further configured to: when the interval between the X symbols and the first symbol exceeds a first threshold, the network device determines not to receive the first PUCCH on the X symbols; wherein, The first symbol is the first DMRS-bearing symbol located after the X symbols.
在一种可能的实现方式中,第四模块,还用于:当X小于或等于第二阈值时,网络设备确定在X个符号上不接收第一PUCCH;其中,所述第二阈值根据长度L、DMRS配置方式、第一PUCCH的格式以及第一PUCCH的跳频方式中的至少其中之一确定。In a possible implementation manner, the fourth module is further configured to: when X is less than or equal to a second threshold, the network device determines not to receive the first PUCCH over X symbols; wherein the second threshold is based on the length L, at least one of the DMRS configuration mode, the format of the first PUCCH, and the frequency hopping mode of the first PUCCH is determined.
在一种可能的实现方式中,第四模块,还用于:当第三时隙中包括下行符号时,网络设备确定在X个符号上不接收第一PUCCH;其中,第三时隙与第一时隙相邻,且位于第一时隙之后。In a possible implementation manner, the fourth module is further configured to: when the third time slot includes downlink symbols, the network device determines not to receive the first PUCCH on X symbols; wherein the third time slot is the same as the first PUCCH. A slot is adjacent and after the first slot.
在一种可能的实现方式中,第四模块,还用于:网络设备根据X个符号的前一跳频部分所在的频域位置,在X个符号上接收第一PUCCH;或者,网络设备根据第二符号所在的频域位置,在X个符号上接收第一PUCCH;其中,第二符号与X个符号相邻,或者第二符号与X个符号间隔在14个符号内。In a possible implementation manner, the fourth module is further configured to: the network device receives the first PUCCH on the X symbols according to the frequency domain position where the previous frequency hopping part of the X symbols is located; At the frequency domain position where the second symbol is located, the first PUCCH is received on X symbols; wherein the second symbol is adjacent to the X symbols, or the second symbol and the X symbols are spaced within 14 symbols.
在一种可能的实现方式中,配置信息或指示信息还用于指示终端设备在X个符号上不使能跳频。In a possible implementation manner, the configuration information or the indication information is further used to instruct the terminal device not to enable frequency hopping on X symbols.
在一种可能的实现方式中,配置信息或指示信息还用于指示终端设备将X个符号所在跳频部分的频域位置调整为与X个符号的前一跳频部分的频域位置相同,且将X个符号的下一跳频部分的频域位置调整为与X个符号的频域位置相同。In a possible implementation manner, the configuration information or the indication information is further used to instruct the terminal device to adjust the frequency domain position of the frequency hopping part where the X symbols are located to be the same as the frequency domain position of the previous frequency hopping part of the X symbols, And the frequency domain position of the next frequency hopping part of the X symbols is adjusted to be the same as the frequency domain position of the X symbols.
在一种可能的实现方式中,第四模块,还用于当网络设备在X个符号上接收第二PUCCH时,配置信息或指示信息还用于指示第二PUCCH的长度。In a possible implementation manner, the fourth module is further configured to, when the network device receives the second PUCCH on X symbols, the configuration information or the indication information is further configured to indicate the length of the second PUCCH.
在一种可能的实现方式中,第四模块,还用于:在X个符号及第二时隙内的部分上行符号或空闲符号上接收第二PUCCH;其中,第一时隙与第二时隙相邻。In a possible implementation manner, the fourth module is further configured to: receive the second PUCCH on X symbols and some uplink symbols or idle symbols in the second time slot; gaps are adjacent.
在一种可能的实现方式中,第四模块,还用于:在X个符号及第二时隙内的部分上行符号或空闲符号上接收DMRS;其中,第一时隙与第二时隙相邻。In a possible implementation manner, the fourth module is further configured to: receive the DMRS on X symbols and some uplink symbols or idle symbols in the second time slot; wherein the first time slot is the same as the second time slot adjacent.
在一种可能的实现方式中,第四模块,还用于:网络设备在X个符号及第二时隙内的部分上行符号或空闲符号上接收第一PUCCH;其中,第一时隙与第二时隙相邻。In a possible implementation manner, the fourth module is further configured to: the network device receives the first PUCCH on X symbols and some uplink symbols or idle symbols in the second time slot; The two time slots are adjacent.
在一种可能的实现方式中,第四模块,还用于:网络设备在X个符号上接收以跳频方式传输的DMRS,其中,X个符号的第一跳频部分包括
Figure PCTCN2021115721-appb-000035
个符号,X个符号的第二跳频部分包括
Figure PCTCN2021115721-appb-000036
个符号。
In a possible implementation manner, the fourth module is further configured to: the network device receives the DMRS transmitted in the frequency hopping manner on the X symbols, wherein the first frequency hopping part of the X symbols includes
Figure PCTCN2021115721-appb-000035
symbols, the second frequency hopping portion of the X symbols includes
Figure PCTCN2021115721-appb-000036
symbol.
基于上述技术方案,网络设备向终端设备发送的配置信息或指示信息配置或指示的第一PUCCH的传输长度为L、传输次数为N,由此能够确定第一时隙内的X个符号不包括承载DMRS的符号,这X个符号存在无法译码的可能,网络设备根据预设条件确定在X个符号上不接收第一PUCCH,或者在X个符号上接收第一PUCCH,或者在X个符号上接收第二PUCCH,或者在X个符号上接收DMRS,从而解决传输第一PUCCH可能出现的无法译码的问题。Based on the above technical solutions, the transmission length of the first PUCCH configured or indicated by the configuration information or the indication information sent by the network device to the terminal device is L and the number of transmissions is N, so it can be determined that the X symbols in the first time slot do not include A symbol carrying a DMRS, the X symbols may not be decoded, and the network device determines according to preset conditions that the first PUCCH is not received on the X symbols, or the first PUCCH is received on the X symbols, or the X symbols are received. The second PUCCH is received on the TX, or the DMRS is received on the X symbols, so as to solve the problem that the first PUCCH cannot be decoded.
上述实施例的各种可能的实现方式或说明参见上文,此处不再赘述。Various possible implementation manners or descriptions of the foregoing embodiments are referred to above, and details are not repeated here.
图31示出根据本申请一实施例的一种通信装置的结构示意图,如图31所示,该通信装置可以包括:至少一个处理器3101,通信线路3102,存储器3103以及至少一个通信接口3104。FIG. 31 shows a schematic structural diagram of a communication device according to an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 31 , the communication device may include: at least one processor 3101 , a communication line 3102 , a memory 3103 and at least one communication interface 3104 .
处理器3101可以是一个通用中央处理器(central processing unit,CPU),微处理器,特定应用集成电路(application-specific integrated circuit,ASIC),或一个或多个用于控制本申请方案程序执行的集成电路。The processor 3101 may be a general-purpose central processing unit (CPU), a microprocessor, an application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC), or one or more processors for controlling the execution of the programs of the present application. integrated circuit.
通信线路3102可包括一通路,在上述组件之间传送信息。Communication line 3102 may include a path to communicate information between the components described above.
通信接口3104,使用任何收发器一类的装置,用于与其他设备或通信网络通信,如以太网,RAN,无线局域网(wireless local area networks,WLAN)等。The communication interface 3104, using any transceiver-like device, is used to communicate with other devices or communication networks, such as Ethernet, RAN, wireless local area networks (WLAN), and the like.
存储器3103可以是只读存储器(read-only memory,ROM)或可存储静态信息和指令的其他类型的静态存储设备,随机存取存储器(random access memory,RAM)或者可存储信息和指令的其他类型的动态存储设备,也可以是电可擦可编程只读存储器(electrically erasable programmable read-only memory,EEPROM)、只读光盘(compact disc read-only memory,CD-ROM)或其他光盘存储、光碟存储(包括压缩光碟、激光碟、光碟、数字通用光碟、蓝光光碟等)、磁盘存储介质或者其他磁存储设备、或者能够用于携带或存储具有指令或数据结构形式的期望的程序代码并能够由计算机存取的任何其他介质,但不限于此。存储器可以是独立存在,通过通信线路3102与处理器相连接。存储器也可以和处理器集成在一起。本申请实施例提供的存储器通常可以具有非易失性。其中,存储器3103用于存储执行本申请方案的计算机执行指令,并由处理器3101来控制执行。处理器3101用于执行存储器3103中存储的计算机执行指令,从而实现本申请上述实施例中提供的方法。 Memory 3103 may be read-only memory (ROM) or other types of static storage devices that can store static information and instructions, random access memory (RAM) or other types of information and instructions It can also be an electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (EEPROM), a compact disc read-only memory (CD-ROM) or other optical disk storage, CD-ROM storage (including compact discs, laser discs, optical discs, digital versatile discs, Blu-ray discs, etc.), magnetic disk storage media or other magnetic storage devices, or capable of carrying or storing desired program code in the form of instructions or data structures and capable of being executed by a computer Access any other medium without limitation. The memory may exist independently and be connected to the processor through communication line 3102. The memory can also be integrated with the processor. The memory provided by the embodiments of the present application may generally be non-volatile. The memory 3103 is used for storing computer-executed instructions for executing the solution of the present application, and the execution is controlled by the processor 3101 . The processor 3101 is configured to execute the computer-executed instructions stored in the memory 3103, thereby implementing the methods provided in the foregoing embodiments of the present application.
可选的,本申请实施例中的计算机执行指令也可以称之为应用程序代码,本申请实施例对此不作具体限定。Optionally, the computer-executed instructions in the embodiment of the present application may also be referred to as application code, which is not specifically limited in the embodiment of the present application.
在具体实现中,作为一种实施例,处理器3101可以包括一个或多个CPU,例如图31中的CPU0和CPU1。In a specific implementation, as an embodiment, the processor 3101 may include one or more CPUs, such as CPU0 and CPU1 in FIG. 31 .
在具体实现中,作为一种实施例,通信装置可以包括多个处理器,例如图31中的处理器3101和处理器3107。这些处理器中的每一个可以是一个单核(single-CPU)处理器,也可以是一个多核(multi-CPU)处理器。这里的处理器可以指一个或多个设备、电路、和/或用于处理数据(例如计算机程序指令)的处理核。In a specific implementation, as an embodiment, the communication apparatus may include multiple processors, for example, the processor 3101 and the processor 3107 in FIG. 31 . Each of these processors can be a single-core (single-CPU) processor or a multi-core (multi-CPU) processor. A processor herein may refer to one or more devices, circuits, and/or processing cores for processing data (eg, computer program instructions).
在具体实现中,作为一种实施例,通信装置还可以包括输出设备3105和输入设备3106。输出设备3105和处理器3101通信,可以以多种方式来显示信息。例如,输出设备3105可以是液晶显示器(liquid crystal display,LCD),发光二级管(light emitting diode,LED)显示设备,阴极射线管(cathode ray tube,CRT)显示设备,或投影仪(projector)等。输入设备3106和处理器3101通信,可以以多种方式接收用户的输入。例如,输入设备3106可以是鼠标、 键盘、触摸屏设备或传感设备等。In a specific implementation, as an embodiment, the communication apparatus may further include an output device 3105 and an input device 3106 . The output device 3105 is in communication with the processor 3101 and can display information in a variety of ways. For example, the output device 3105 may be a liquid crystal display (LCD), a light emitting diode (LED) display device, a cathode ray tube (CRT) display device, or a projector (projector) Wait. Input device 3106 is in communication with processor 3101 and can receive user input in a variety of ways. For example, the input device 3106 may be a mouse, a keyboard, a touch screen device, a sensor device, or the like.
作为一个示例,结合图31所示的通信装置,图29中的第一模块2901可以由图31中的通信接口3104来实现,图29中的第二模块2901可以由图31中的处理器3101来实现,本申请实施例对此不作任何限制。As an example, in conjunction with the communication device shown in FIG. 31 , the first module 2901 in FIG. 29 may be implemented by the communication interface 3104 in FIG. 31 , and the second module 2901 in FIG. 29 may be implemented by the processor 3101 in FIG. 31 This is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
作为一个示例,结合图31所示的通信装置,图30中的第三模块3001可以由图31中的通信接口3104来实现,图31中的第四模块3002可以由图31中的处理器3101来实现,本申请实施例对此不作任何限制。As an example, in conjunction with the communication device shown in FIG. 31 , the third module 3001 in FIG. 30 may be implemented by the communication interface 3104 in FIG. 31 , and the fourth module 3002 in FIG. 31 may be implemented by the processor 3101 in FIG. 31 This is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
图32示出根据本申请一实施例的一种芯片的结构示意图,如图32所示,图32所示的芯片可以为通用处理器,也可以为专用处理器。该芯片包括处理器3201。其中,处理器3201用于支持通信装置执行图6、图12、图19、图24、图27或者图28所示的技术方案。FIG. 32 shows a schematic structural diagram of a chip according to an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 32 , the chip shown in FIG. 32 may be a general-purpose processor or a special-purpose processor. The chip includes processor 3201 . The processor 3201 is configured to support the communication device to execute the technical solutions shown in FIG. 6 , FIG. 12 , FIG. 19 , FIG. 24 , FIG. 27 or FIG. 28 .
可选的,该芯片还包括收发器3202,收发器3202用于接受处理器3201的控制,用于支持通信装置执行上述技术方案,示例性地,可以执行图6、图12、图19、图24、图27或者图28所示的方法。Optionally, the chip further includes a transceiver 3202, and the transceiver 3202 is configured to accept the control of the processor 3201 and to support the communication device to perform the above technical solution. 24. The method shown in FIG. 27 or FIG. 28 .
可选的,图32所示的芯片还可以包括:存储介质3203。Optionally, the chip shown in FIG. 32 may further include: a storage medium 3203 .
需要说明的是,图32所示的芯片可以使用下述电路或者器件来实现:一个或多个现场可编程门阵列(field programmable gate array,FPGA)、可编程逻辑器件(programmable logic device,PLD)、控制器、状态机、门逻辑、分立硬件部件、任何其他适合的电路、或者能够执行本申请通篇所描述的各种功能的电路的任意组合。It should be noted that the chip shown in FIG. 32 can be implemented using the following circuits or devices: one or more field programmable gate arrays (FPGA), programmable logic devices (PLDs) , controllers, state machines, gate logic, discrete hardware components, any other suitable circuits, or any combination of circuits capable of performing the various functions described throughout this application.
本申请的实施例提供了一种非易失性计算机可读存储介质,其上存储有计算机程序指令,所述计算机程序指令被处理器执行时实现上述技术方案,示例性地,可以执行图6、图12、图19、图24、图27或者图28所示的方法。Embodiments of the present application provide a non-volatile computer-readable storage medium on which computer program instructions are stored, and when the computer program instructions are executed by a processor, the foregoing technical solutions are implemented. Exemplarily, FIG. 6 can be executed. , FIG. 12 , FIG. 19 , FIG. 24 , FIG. 27 or the method shown in FIG. 28 .
本申请的实施例提供了一种计算机程序产品,包括计算机可读代码,或者承载有计算机可读代码的非易失性计算机可读存储介质,当所述计算机可读代码在电子设备的处理器中运行时,所述电子设备中的处理器执行执行上述技术方案,示例性地,可以执行图6、图12、图19、图24、图27或者图28所示的方法。Embodiments of the present application provide a computer program product, including computer-readable codes, or a non-volatile computer-readable storage medium carrying computer-readable codes, when the computer-readable codes are stored in a processor of an electronic device When running in the electronic device, the processor in the electronic device executes the above technical solution, and exemplarily, the method shown in FIG. 6 , FIG. 12 , FIG. 19 , FIG. 24 , FIG. 27 or FIG. 28 may be executed.
计算机可读存储介质可以是可以保持和存储由指令执行设备使用的指令的有形设备。计算机可读存储介质例如可以是――但不限于――电存储设备、磁存储设备、光存储设备、电磁存储设备、半导体存储设备或者上述的任意合适的组合。计算机可读存储介质的更具体的例子(非穷举的列表)包括:便携式计算机盘、硬盘、随机存取存储器(Random Access Memory,RAM)、只读存储器(Read Only Memory,ROM)、可擦式可编程只读存储器(Electrically Programmable Read-Only-Memory,EPROM或闪存)、静态随机存取存储器(Static Random-Access Memory,SRAM)、便携式压缩盘只读存储器(Compact Disc Read-Only Memory,CD-ROM)、数字多功能盘(Digital Video Disc,DVD)、记忆棒、软盘、机械编码设备、例如其上存储有指令的打孔卡或凹槽内凸起结构、以及上述的任意合适的组合。A computer-readable storage medium may be a tangible device that can hold and store instructions for use by the instruction execution device. The computer-readable storage medium may be, for example, but not limited to, an electrical storage device, a magnetic storage device, an optical storage device, an electromagnetic storage device, a semiconductor storage device, or any suitable combination of the foregoing. More specific examples (a non-exhaustive list) of computer-readable storage media include: portable computer disks, hard disks, random access memory (RAM), read only memory (ROM), erasable programmable read-only memory (Electrically Programmable Read-Only-Memory, EPROM or flash memory), static random access memory (Static Random-Access Memory, SRAM), portable compact disk read-only memory (Compact Disc Read-Only Memory, CD - ROM), Digital Video Disc (DVD), memory sticks, floppy disks, mechanically encoded devices, such as punch cards or raised structures in grooves on which instructions are stored, and any suitable combination of the foregoing .
这里所描述的计算机可读程序指令或代码可以从计算机可读存储介质下载到各个计算/处理设备,或者通过网络、例如因特网、局域网、广域网和/或无线网下载到外部计算机或外部存储设备。网络可以包括铜传输电缆、光纤传输、无线传输、路由器、防火墙、交换机、网关计算机和/或边缘服务器。每个计算/处理设备中的网络适配卡或者网络接口从网络接收计算机可读程序指令,并转发该计算机可读程序指令,以供存储在各个计算/处理设备中的计算 机可读存储介质中。The computer readable program instructions or code described herein may be downloaded to various computing/processing devices from a computer readable storage medium, or to an external computer or external storage device over a network such as the Internet, a local area network, a wide area network and/or a wireless network. The network may include copper transmission cables, fiber optic transmission, wireless transmission, routers, firewalls, switches, gateway computers, and/or edge servers. A network adapter card or network interface in each computing/processing device receives computer-readable program instructions from a network and forwards the computer-readable program instructions for storage in a computer-readable storage medium in each computing/processing device .
用于执行本申请操作的计算机程序指令可以是汇编指令、指令集架构(Instruction Set Architecture,ISA)指令、机器指令、机器相关指令、微代码、固件指令、状态设置数据、或者以一种或多种编程语言的任意组合编写的源代码或目标代码,所述编程语言包括面向对象的编程语言—诸如Smalltalk、C++等,以及常规的过程式编程语言—诸如“C”语言或类似的编程语言。计算机可读程序指令可以完全地在用户计算机上执行、部分地在用户计算机上执行、作为一个独立的软件包执行、部分在用户计算机上部分在远程计算机上执行、或者完全在远程计算机或服务器上执行。在涉及远程计算机的情形中,远程计算机可以通过任意种类的网络—包括局域网(Local Area Network,LAN)或广域网(Wide Area Network,WAN)—连接到用户计算机,或者,可以连接到外部计算机(例如利用因特网服务提供商来通过因特网连接)。在一些实施例中,通过利用计算机可读程序指令的状态信息来个性化定制电子电路,例如可编程逻辑电路、现场可编程门阵列(Field-Programmable Gate Array,FPGA)或可编程逻辑阵列(Programmable Logic Array,PLA),该电子电路可以执行计算机可读程序指令,从而实现本申请的各个方面。The computer program instructions used to perform the operations of the present application may be assembly instructions, Instruction Set Architecture (ISA) instructions, machine instructions, machine-related instructions, microcode, firmware instructions, state setting data, or in one or more source or object code written in any combination of programming languages, including object-oriented programming languages such as Smalltalk, C++, etc., and conventional procedural programming languages such as the "C" language or similar programming languages. The computer readable program instructions may execute entirely on the user's computer, partly on the user's computer, as a stand-alone software package, partly on the user's computer and partly on a remote computer, or entirely on the remote computer or server implement. In the case of a remote computer, the remote computer may be connected to the user's computer through any kind of network—including a Local Area Network (LAN) or a Wide Area Network (WAN)—or, may be connected to an external computer (eg, use an internet service provider to connect via the internet). In some embodiments, electronic circuits, such as programmable logic circuits, Field-Programmable Gate Arrays (FPGA), or Programmable Logic Arrays (Programmable Logic Arrays), are personalized by utilizing state information of computer-readable program instructions. Logic Array, PLA), the electronic circuit can execute computer readable program instructions to implement various aspects of the present application.
这里参照根据本申请实施例的方法、装置(系统)和计算机程序产品的流程图和/或框图描述了本申请的各个方面。应当理解,流程图和/或框图的每个方框以及流程图和/或框图中各方框的组合,都可以由计算机可读程序指令实现。Aspects of the present application are described herein with reference to flowchart illustrations and/or block diagrams of methods, apparatus (systems) and computer program products according to embodiments of the present application. It will be understood that each block of the flowchart illustrations and/or block diagrams, and combinations of blocks in the flowchart illustrations and/or block diagrams, can be implemented by computer readable program instructions.
这些计算机可读程序指令可以提供给通用计算机、专用计算机或其它可编程数据处理装置的处理器,从而生产出一种机器,使得这些指令在通过计算机或其它可编程数据处理装置的处理器执行时,产生了实现流程图和/或框图中的一个或多个方框中规定的功能/动作的装置。也可以把这些计算机可读程序指令存储在计算机可读存储介质中,这些指令使得计算机、可编程数据处理装置和/或其他设备以特定方式工作,从而,存储有指令的计算机可读介质则包括一个制造品,其包括实现流程图和/或框图中的一个或多个方框中规定的功能/动作的各个方面的指令。These computer readable program instructions may be provided to a processor of a general purpose computer, special purpose computer or other programmable data processing apparatus to produce a machine that causes the instructions when executed by the processor of the computer or other programmable data processing apparatus , resulting in means for implementing the functions/acts specified in one or more blocks of the flowchart and/or block diagrams. These computer readable program instructions can also be stored in a computer readable storage medium, these instructions cause a computer, programmable data processing apparatus and/or other equipment to operate in a specific manner, so that the computer readable medium on which the instructions are stored includes An article of manufacture comprising instructions for implementing various aspects of the functions/acts specified in one or more blocks of the flowchart and/or block diagrams.
也可以把计算机可读程序指令加载到计算机、其它可编程数据处理装置、或其它设备上,使得在计算机、其它可编程数据处理装置或其它设备上执行一系列操作步骤,以产生计算机实现的过程,从而使得在计算机、其它可编程数据处理装置、或其它设备上执行的指令实现流程图和/或框图中的一个或多个方框中规定的功能/动作。Computer readable program instructions can also be loaded onto a computer, other programmable data processing apparatus, or other equipment to cause a series of operational steps to be performed on the computer, other programmable data processing apparatus, or other equipment to produce a computer-implemented process , thereby causing instructions executing on a computer, other programmable data processing apparatus, or other device to implement the functions/acts specified in one or more blocks of the flowcharts and/or block diagrams.
结合以上,本申请还提供如下实施例:In conjunction with the above, the application also provides the following embodiments:
实施例1、一种上行控制信道PUCCH传输方法,其中,所述方法包括:Embodiment 1, a method for transmitting an uplink control channel PUCCH, wherein the method includes:
终端设备接收来自网络设备的配置信息或指示信息,所述配置信息或指示信息用于配置或指示所述终端设备发送第一PUCCH,所述第一PUCCH的传输长度为L个符号,所述第一PUCCH的传输次数为N,N为大于或等于1的整数,L为大于或等于1的整数;The terminal device receives configuration information or indication information from the network device, the configuration information or indication information is used to configure or instruct the terminal device to send the first PUCCH, the transmission length of the first PUCCH is L symbols, and the first PUCCH is L symbols. The number of times of transmission of a PUCCH is N, where N is an integer greater than or equal to 1, and L is an integer greater than or equal to 1;
所述终端设备根据所述配置信息或指示信息确定X个符号,所述X个符号位于第一时隙,且所述X个符号用于传输所述第一PUCCH;The terminal device determines X symbols according to the configuration information or the indication information, the X symbols are located in the first time slot, and the X symbols are used to transmit the first PUCCH;
当X小于L时,所述终端设备根据预设条件确定在所述X个符号上不传输所述第一PUCCH,或者所述终端设备在所述X个符号上传输所述第一PUCCH,或者所述终端设备在所述X个符号上传输第二PUCCH,或者所述终端设备在所述X个符号上传输DMRS。When X is less than L, the terminal device determines not to transmit the first PUCCH on the X symbols according to a preset condition, or the terminal device transmits the first PUCCH on the X symbols, or The terminal device transmits the second PUCCH on the X symbols, or the terminal device transmits the DMRS on the X symbols.
实施例2、根据实施例1所述的方法,其中,所述X个符号不包括承载DMRS的符号。Embodiment 2. The method according to Embodiment 1, wherein the X symbols do not include symbols carrying DMRS.
实施例3、根据实施例1或实施例2所述的方法,其中,所述终端设备根据预设条件确定在所述X个符号上不传输所述第一PUCCH,包括:Embodiment 3. The method according to Embodiment 1 or Embodiment 2, wherein the terminal device determines not to transmit the first PUCCH on the X symbols according to a preset condition, comprising:
当所述X个符号所在的频域位置与所述第一时隙及第二时隙内的任一承载DMRS的符号所在的频域位置不同时,所述终端设备确定在所述X符号上不传输所述第一PUCCH;When the frequency domain position where the X symbols are located is different from the frequency domain position where any DMRS-carrying symbol in the first time slot and the second time slot is located, the terminal device determines that the X symbol is located on the X symbol not transmitting the first PUCCH;
其中,所述第一时隙与所述第二时隙相邻。Wherein, the first time slot is adjacent to the second time slot.
实施例4、根据实施例1至实施例3中任一实施例所述的方法,其中,所述终端设备根据预设条件确定在所述X个符号上不传输所述第一PUCCH,包括: Embodiment 4. The method according to any one of Embodiments 1 to 3, wherein the terminal device determines not to transmit the first PUCCH on the X symbols according to a preset condition, comprising:
当所述X个符号与第一符号之间间隔超过第一阈值时,所述终端设备确定在所述X个符号上不传输所述第一PUCCH;When the interval between the X symbols and the first symbol exceeds a first threshold, the terminal device determines not to transmit the first PUCCH on the X symbols;
其中,所述第一符号为位于所述X个符号之后的第一个承载DMRS的符号。Wherein, the first symbol is the first symbol that bears DMRS after the X symbols.
实施例5、根据实施例1至实施例4中任一实施例所述的方法,其中,所述终端设备根据预设条件确定在所述X个符号上不传输所述第一PUCCH,包括:Embodiment 5. The method according to any one of Embodiments 1 to 4, wherein the terminal device determines not to transmit the first PUCCH on the X symbols according to a preset condition, comprising:
当所述X小于或等于第二阈值时,所述终端设备确定在所述X个符号上不传输所述第一PUCCH;When the X is less than or equal to a second threshold, the terminal device determines not to transmit the first PUCCH on the X symbols;
其中,所述第二阈值根据所述长度L、DMRS配置方式、所述第一PUCCH的格式以及所述第一PUCCH的跳频方式中的至少其中之一确定。The second threshold is determined according to at least one of the length L, a DMRS configuration mode, a format of the first PUCCH, and a frequency hopping mode of the first PUCCH.
实施例6、根据实施例1至实施例5中任一实施例所述的方法,其中,所述终端设备根据预设条件确定在所述X个符号上不传输所述第一PUCCH,包括: Embodiment 6. The method according to any one of Embodiments 1 to 5, wherein the terminal device determines not to transmit the first PUCCH on the X symbols according to a preset condition, comprising:
当第三时隙中包括下行符号时,所述终端设备确定在所述X个符号上不传输所述第一PUCCH;When the third time slot includes downlink symbols, the terminal device determines not to transmit the first PUCCH on the X symbols;
其中,所述第三时隙与所述第一时隙相邻,且位于所述第一时隙之后。Wherein, the third time slot is adjacent to the first time slot and is located after the first time slot.
实施例7、根据根据实施例1至实施例6中任一实施例所述的方法,其中,所述终端设备在所述X个符号上传输所述第一PUCCH,包括:Embodiment 7. The method according to any one of Embodiments 1 to 6, wherein the terminal device transmits the first PUCCH on the X symbols, comprising:
所述终端设备根据所述X个符号的前一跳频部分所在的频域位置,在所述X个符号上传输所述第一PUCCH;The terminal device transmits the first PUCCH on the X symbols according to the frequency domain position where the previous frequency hopping part of the X symbols is located;
或者,所述终端设备根据第二符号所在的频域位置,在所述X个符号上传输所述第一PUCCH;其中,所述第二符号与所述X个符号相邻,或者所述第二符号与所述X个符号间隔在14个符号内。Or, the terminal device transmits the first PUCCH on the X symbols according to the frequency domain position where the second symbol is located; wherein the second symbol is adjacent to the X symbols, or the first PUCCH Two symbols are spaced within 14 symbols from the X symbols.
实施例8、根据实施例1至实施例7中任一实施例所述的方法,其中,所述终端设备根据所述X个符号的前一跳频部分所在的频域位置,在所述X个符号上传输所述第一PUCCH,包括:Embodiment 8. The method according to any one of Embodiments 1 to 7, wherein, according to the frequency domain position where the previous frequency hopping part of the X symbols is located, the terminal device The first PUCCH is transmitted over symbols, including:
所述终端设备在所述X个符号上不使能跳频。The terminal device does not enable frequency hopping on the X symbols.
实施例9、根据实施例1至实施例8中任一实施例所述的方法,其中,所述终端设备根据所述X个符号的前一跳频部分所在的频域位置,在所述X个符号上传输所述第一PUCCH,包括:Embodiment 9. The method according to any one of Embodiments 1 to 8, wherein, according to the frequency domain location where the previous frequency hopping part of the X symbols is located, the terminal device The first PUCCH is transmitted over symbols, including:
所述终端设备将所述X个符号所在跳频部分的频域位置调整为与所述X个符号的前一跳频部分的频域位置相同,且将所述X个符号的下一跳频部分的频域位置调整为与所述X个符号的频域位置相同。The terminal device adjusts the frequency domain position of the frequency hopping part where the X symbols are located to be the same as the frequency domain position of the previous frequency hopping part of the X symbols, and adjusts the frequency hopping part of the X symbols to the next frequency hopping part. The frequency domain positions of the parts are adjusted to be the same as the frequency domain positions of the X symbols.
实施例10、根据实施例1至实施例9中任一实施例所述的方法,其中,当所述终端设备 在所述X个符号上传输所述第二PUCCH时,所述配置信息或指示信息还用于指示所述第二PUCCH的长度。Embodiment 10. The method according to any one of Embodiments 1 to 9, wherein when the terminal device transmits the second PUCCH on the X symbols, the configuration information or indication The information is also used to indicate the length of the second PUCCH.
实施例11、根据实施例1至实施例10中任一实施例所述的方法,其中,所述终端设备在所述X个符号上传输所述第二PUCCH,包括:Embodiment 11. The method according to any one of Embodiments 1 to 10, wherein the terminal device transmits the second PUCCH on the X symbols, comprising:
所述终端设备仅在X个符号上传输第二PUCCH,或者,所述终端设备在所述X个符号及第二时隙内的部分上行符号或空闲符号上传输所述第二PUCCH;The terminal device transmits the second PUCCH only on X symbols, or the terminal device transmits the second PUCCH on the X symbols and some uplink symbols or idle symbols in the second time slot;
其中,所述第一时隙与所述第二时隙相邻。Wherein, the first time slot is adjacent to the second time slot.
实施例12、根据实施例1至实施例11中任一实施例所述的方法,其中,所述终端设备在所述X个符号上传输DMRS,包括: Embodiment 12. The method according to any one of Embodiments 1 to 11, wherein the terminal device transmits the DMRS on the X symbols, comprising:
所述终端设备仅在X个符号上传输DMRS,或者,所述终端设备在所述X个符号及第二时隙内的部分上行符号或空闲符号上传输DMRS;The terminal device transmits the DMRS only on X symbols, or the terminal device transmits the DMRS on the X symbols and some uplink symbols or idle symbols in the second time slot;
其中,所述第一时隙与所述第二时隙相邻。Wherein, the first time slot is adjacent to the second time slot.
实施例13、根据实施例1至实施例12中任一实施例所述的方法,其中,所述终端设备在所述X个符号上传输所述第一PUCCH,包括:Embodiment 13. The method according to any one of Embodiments 1 to 12, wherein the terminal device transmits the first PUCCH on the X symbols, comprising:
所述终端设备在所述X个符号及第二时隙内的部分上行符号或空闲符号上传输所述第一PUCCH;transmitting, by the terminal device, the first PUCCH on the X symbols and part of uplink symbols or idle symbols in the second time slot;
其中,所述第一时隙与所述第二时隙相邻。Wherein, the first time slot is adjacent to the second time slot.
实施例14、根据实施例1至实施例13中任一实施例所述的方法,其中,所述终端设备在所述X个符号上传输DMRS,包括: Embodiment 14. The method according to any one of Embodiments 1 to 13, wherein the terminal device transmits the DMRS on the X symbols, comprising:
所述终端设备在所述X个符号上以跳频方式传输DMRS,其中,所述X个符号的第一跳频部分包括
Figure PCTCN2021115721-appb-000037
个符号,所述X个符号的第二跳频部分包括
Figure PCTCN2021115721-appb-000038
个符号。
The terminal device transmits the DMRS in a frequency hopping manner over the X symbols, wherein the first frequency hopping part of the X symbols includes
Figure PCTCN2021115721-appb-000037
symbols, the second frequency hopping portion of the X symbols includes
Figure PCTCN2021115721-appb-000038
symbol.
实施例15.一种上行控制信道PUCCH传输方法,其中,所述方法包括:Embodiment 15. A method for transmitting an uplink control channel PUCCH, wherein the method comprises:
网络设备向终端设备发送配置信息或指示信息,所述配置信息或指示信息用于配置或指示所述终端设备发送第一PUCCH,所述第一PUCCH的传输长度为L个符号,所述第一PUCCH的传输次数为N,N为大于或等于1的整数,L为大于或等于1的整数;X个符号位于第一时隙,且所述X个符号用于传输所述第一PUCCH;The network device sends configuration information or indication information to the terminal device, where the configuration information or indication information is used to configure or instruct the terminal device to send the first PUCCH, the transmission length of the first PUCCH is L symbols, and the first PUCCH is L symbols. The number of times of PUCCH transmission is N, where N is an integer greater than or equal to 1, and L is an integer greater than or equal to 1; X symbols are located in the first time slot, and the X symbols are used to transmit the first PUCCH;
当X小于L时,所述网络设备根据预设条件确定在所述X个符号上不接收所述第一PUCCH,或者所述网络设备在所述X个符号上接收所述第一PUCCH,或者所述网络设备在所述X个符号上接收第二PUCCH,或者所述网络设备在所述X个符号上接收DMRS。When X is less than L, the network device determines not to receive the first PUCCH on the X symbols according to a preset condition, or the network device receives the first PUCCH on the X symbols, or The network device receives the second PUCCH on the X symbols, or the network device receives the DMRS on the X symbols.
实施例16、根据实施例15所述的方法,其中,所述X个符号不包括承载DMRS的符号。Embodiment 16. The method of Embodiment 15, wherein the X symbols do not include symbols carrying DMRS.
实施例17、根据实施例15或实施例16所述的方法,其中,所述网络设备根据预设条件确定在所述X个符号上不接收所述第一PUCCH,包括:Embodiment 17. The method according to Embodiment 15 or Embodiment 16, wherein the network device determines not to receive the first PUCCH on the X symbols according to a preset condition, comprising:
当所述X个符号所在的频域位置与所述第一时隙及第二时隙内的任一承载DMRS的符号所在的频域位置不同时,所述网络设备确定在所述X符号上不接收所述第一PUCCH;When the frequency domain position where the X symbols are located is different from the frequency domain position where any DMRS-bearing symbol in the first time slot and the second time slot is located, the network device determines that the X symbol is located on the X symbol not receiving the first PUCCH;
其中,所述第一时隙与所述第二时隙相邻。Wherein, the first time slot is adjacent to the second time slot.
实施例18、根据实施例15至实施例17中任一实施例所述的方法,其中,所述网络设备根据预设条件确定在所述X个符号上不接收所述第一PUCCH,包括:Embodiment 18. The method according to any one of Embodiments 15 to 17, wherein the network device determines not to receive the first PUCCH on the X symbols according to a preset condition, comprising:
当所述X个符号与第一符号之间间隔超过第一阈值时,所述网络设备确定在所述X个符号上不接收所述第一PUCCH;When the interval between the X symbols and the first symbol exceeds a first threshold, the network device determines that the first PUCCH is not received on the X symbols;
其中,所述第一符号为位于所述X个符号之后的第一个承载DMRS的符号。Wherein, the first symbol is the first symbol that bears DMRS after the X symbols.
实施例19、根据实施例15至实施例18中任一实施例所述的方法,其中,所述网络设备根据预设条件确定在所述X个符号上不接收所述第一PUCCH,包括:Embodiment 19. The method according to any one of Embodiments 15 to 18, wherein the network device determines not to receive the first PUCCH on the X symbols according to a preset condition, comprising:
当所述X小于或等于第二阈值时,所述网络设备确定在所述X个符号上不接收所述第一PUCCH;When the X is less than or equal to a second threshold, the network device determines not to receive the first PUCCH on the X symbols;
其中,所述第二阈值根据所述长度L、DMRS配置方式、所述第一PUCCH的格式以及所述第一PUCCH的跳频方式中的至少其中之一确定。The second threshold is determined according to at least one of the length L, a DMRS configuration mode, a format of the first PUCCH, and a frequency hopping mode of the first PUCCH.
实施例20、根据实施例15至实施例19中任一实施例所述的方法,其中,所述网络设备根据预设条件确定在所述X个符号上不接收所述第一PUCCH,包括:Embodiment 20. The method according to any one of Embodiments 15 to 19, wherein the network device determines not to receive the first PUCCH on the X symbols according to a preset condition, comprising:
当第三时隙中包括下行符号时,所述网络设备确定在所述X个符号上不接收所述第一PUCCH;When the third time slot includes downlink symbols, the network device determines that the first PUCCH is not received on the X symbols;
其中,所述第三时隙与所述第一时隙相邻,且位于所述第一时隙之后。Wherein, the third time slot is adjacent to the first time slot and is located after the first time slot.
实施例21、根据根据实施例15至实施例20中任一实施例所述的方法,其中,所述网络设备在所述X个符号上接收所述第一PUCCH,包括:Embodiment 21. The method according to any one of Embodiments 15 to 20, wherein the network device receives the first PUCCH on the X symbols, comprising:
所述网络设备根据所述X个符号的前一跳频部分所在的频域位置,在所述X个符号上接收所述第一PUCCH;receiving, by the network device, the first PUCCH on the X symbols according to the frequency domain position where the previous frequency hopping part of the X symbols is located;
或者,所述网络设备根据第二符号所在的频域位置,在所述X个符号上接收所述第一PUCCH;其中,所述第二符号与所述X个符号相邻,或者所述第二符号与所述X个符号间隔在14个符号内。Or, the network device receives the first PUCCH on the X symbols according to the frequency domain position where the second symbol is located; wherein the second symbol is adjacent to the X symbols, or the first PUCCH is Two symbols are spaced within 14 symbols from the X symbols.
实施例22、根据实施例15至实施例21中任一实施例所述的方法,其中,所述配置信息或指示信息还用于指示所述终端设备在所述X个符号上不使能跳频。Embodiment 22. The method according to any one of Embodiments 15 to 21, wherein the configuration information or the indication information is further used to instruct the terminal device not to enable jumping on the X symbols. frequency.
实施例23、根据实施例15至实施例23中任一实施例所述的方法,其中,所述配置信息或指示信息还用于指示所述终端设备将所述X个符号所在跳频部分的频域位置调整为与所述X个符号的前一跳频部分的频域位置相同,且将所述X个符号的下一跳频部分的频域位置调整为与所述X个符号的频域位置相同。Embodiment 23. The method according to any one of Embodiment 15 to Embodiment 23, wherein the configuration information or the indication information is further used to instruct the terminal device to convert the frequency hopping part where the X symbols are located. The frequency domain position is adjusted to be the same as the frequency domain position of the previous frequency hopping part of the X symbols, and the frequency domain position of the next frequency hopping part of the X symbols is adjusted to be the same as the frequency domain position of the X symbols. The domain location is the same.
实施例24、根据实施例15至实施例23中任一实施例所述的方法,其中,当所述网络设备在所述X个符号上接收第二PUCCH时,所述配置信息或指示信息还用于指示所述第二PUCCH的长度。Embodiment 24. The method according to any one of Embodiments 15 to 23, wherein when the network device receives the second PUCCH on the X symbols, the configuration information or the indication information is further Used to indicate the length of the second PUCCH.
实施例25、根据实施例15至实施例24中任一实施例所述的方法,其中,所述网络设备在所述X个符号上接收第二PUCCH,包括:Embodiment 25. The method according to any one of Embodiments 15 to 24, wherein the network device receives the second PUCCH on the X symbols, comprising:
在所述X个符号及第二时隙内的部分上行符号或空闲符号上接收所述第二PUCCH;receiving the second PUCCH on the X symbols and a portion of uplink symbols or idle symbols in the second slot;
其中,所述第一时隙与所述第二时隙相邻。Wherein, the first time slot is adjacent to the second time slot.
实施例26、根据实施例15至实施例25中任一实施例所述的方法,其中,所述网络设备在所述X个符号上接收DMRS,包括:Embodiment 26. The method according to any one of Embodiments 15 to 25, wherein the network device receives the DMRS on the X symbols, comprising:
在所述X个符号及第二时隙内的部分上行符号或空闲符号上接收DMRS;receiving DMRS on the X symbols and a portion of uplink symbols or idle symbols in the second time slot;
其中,所述第一时隙与所述第二时隙相邻。Wherein, the first time slot is adjacent to the second time slot.
实施例27、根据实施例15至实施例26中任一实施例所述的方法,其中,所述网络设备在所述X个符号上接收所述第一PUCCH,包括:Embodiment 27. The method according to any one of Embodiments 15 to 26, wherein the network device receiving the first PUCCH on the X symbols includes:
所述网络设备在所述X个符号及第二时隙内的部分上行符号或空闲符号上接收所述第一 PUCCH;receiving, by the network device, the first PUCCH on the X symbols and part of uplink symbols or idle symbols in the second time slot;
其中,所述第一时隙与所述第二时隙相邻。Wherein, the first time slot is adjacent to the second time slot.
实施例28、根据实施例15至实施例27中任一实施例所述的方法,其中,所述网络设备在所述X个符号上接收DMRS,包括:Embodiment 28. The method according to any one of Embodiments 15 to 27, wherein the network device receives the DMRS on the X symbols, comprising:
所述网络设备在所述X个符号上接收以跳频方式传输的DMRS,其中,所述X个符号的第一跳频部分包括
Figure PCTCN2021115721-appb-000039
个符号,所述X个符号的第二跳频部分包括
Figure PCTCN2021115721-appb-000040
个符号。
The network device receives the DMRS transmitted in a frequency hopping manner on the X symbols, wherein the first frequency hopping part of the X symbols includes
Figure PCTCN2021115721-appb-000039
symbols, the second frequency hopping portion of the X symbols includes
Figure PCTCN2021115721-appb-000040
symbol.
实施例29、一种通信装置,其中,所述装置包括:Embodiment 29, a communication device, wherein the device comprises:
第一模块,用于终端设备接收来自网络设备的配置信息或指示信息,所述配置信息或指示信息用于配置或指示所述终端设备发送第一PUCCH,所述第一PUCCH的传输长度为L个符号,所述第一PUCCH的传输次数为N,N为大于或等于1的整数,L为大于或等于1的整数;The first module is used for a terminal device to receive configuration information or indication information from a network device, where the configuration information or indication information is used to configure or instruct the terminal device to send a first PUCCH, and the transmission length of the first PUCCH is L symbols, the number of times of transmission of the first PUCCH is N, N is an integer greater than or equal to 1, and L is an integer greater than or equal to 1;
第二模块,用于所述终端设备根据所述配置信息或指示信息确定X个符号,所述X个符号位于第一时隙,且所述X个符号用于传输所述第一PUCCH;a second module, configured for the terminal device to determine X symbols according to the configuration information or the indication information, the X symbols are located in the first time slot, and the X symbols are used to transmit the first PUCCH;
第二模块,还用于当X小于L时,所述终端设备根据预设条件确定在所述X个符号上不传输所述第一PUCCH,或者所述终端设备在所述X个符号上传输所述第一PUCCH,或者所述终端设备在所述X个符号上传输第二PUCCH,或者所述终端设备在所述X个符号上传输DMRS。The second module is further configured to, when X is less than L, determine, according to a preset condition, that the terminal device does not transmit the first PUCCH on the X symbols, or the terminal device transmits the first PUCCH on the X symbols The first PUCCH, or the terminal device transmits the second PUCCH on the X symbols, or the terminal device transmits the DMRS on the X symbols.
实施例30、根据实施例29所述的装置,其中,所述X个符号不包括承载DMRS的符号。Embodiment 30. The apparatus of Embodiment 29, wherein the X symbols do not include symbols carrying DMRS.
实施例31、根据实施例29或实施例30所述的装置,其中,所述第二模块,还用于:Embodiment 31. The apparatus according to Embodiment 29 or Embodiment 30, wherein the second module is further configured to:
当所述X个符号所在的频域位置与所述第一时隙及第二时隙内的任一承载DMRS的符号所在的频域位置不同时,所述终端设备确定在所述X符号上不传输所述第一PUCCH;When the frequency domain position where the X symbols are located is different from the frequency domain position where any DMRS-carrying symbol in the first time slot and the second time slot is located, the terminal device determines that the X symbol is located on the X symbol not transmitting the first PUCCH;
其中,所述第一时隙与所述第二时隙相邻。Wherein, the first time slot is adjacent to the second time slot.
实施例32、根据实施例29至实施例31中任一实施例所述的装置,其中,所述第二模块,还用于:Embodiment 32. The apparatus according to any one of Embodiments 29 to 31, wherein the second module is further configured to:
当所述X个符号与第一符号之间间隔超过第一阈值时,所述终端设备确定在所述X个符号上不传输所述第一PUCCH;When the interval between the X symbols and the first symbol exceeds a first threshold, the terminal device determines not to transmit the first PUCCH on the X symbols;
其中,所述第一符号为位于所述X个符号之后的第一个承载DMRS的符号。Wherein, the first symbol is the first symbol that bears DMRS after the X symbols.
实施例33、根据实施例29至实施例32中任一实施例所述的装置,其中,所述第二模块,还用于:Embodiment 33. The apparatus according to any one of Embodiments 29 to 32, wherein the second module is further configured to:
当所述X小于或等于第二阈值时,所述终端设备确定在所述X个符号上不传输所述第一PUCCH;When the X is less than or equal to a second threshold, the terminal device determines not to transmit the first PUCCH on the X symbols;
其中,所述第二阈值根据所述长度L、DMRS配置方式、所述第一PUCCH的格式以及所述第一PUCCH的跳频方式中的至少其中之一确定。The second threshold is determined according to at least one of the length L, a DMRS configuration mode, a format of the first PUCCH, and a frequency hopping mode of the first PUCCH.
实施例34、根据实施例29至实施例33中任一实施例所述的装置,其中,所述第二模块,还用于:当第三时隙中包括下行符号时,所述终端设备确定在所述X个符号上不传输所述第一PUCCH;Embodiment 34. The apparatus according to any one of Embodiment 29 to Embodiment 33, wherein the second module is further configured to: when the third time slot includes downlink symbols, the terminal device determines not transmitting the first PUCCH on the X symbols;
其中,所述第三时隙与所述第一时隙相邻,且位于所述第一时隙之后。Wherein, the third time slot is adjacent to the first time slot and is located after the first time slot.
实施例35、根据根据实施例29至实施例34中任一实施例所述的装置,其中,所述第二模块,还用于:所述终端设备根据所述X个符号的前一跳频部分所在的频域位置,在所述X 个符号上传输所述第一PUCCH;Embodiment 35: The apparatus according to any one of Embodiments 29 to 34, wherein the second module is further configured to: the terminal device hops according to the previous frequency of the X symbols The frequency domain position where the part is located, and the first PUCCH is transmitted on the X symbols;
或者,所述终端设备根据第二符号所在的频域位置,在所述X个符号上传输所述第一PUCCH;其中,所述第二符号与所述X个符号相邻,或者所述第二符号与所述X个符号间隔在14个符号内。Or, the terminal device transmits the first PUCCH on the X symbols according to the frequency domain position where the second symbol is located; wherein the second symbol is adjacent to the X symbols, or the first PUCCH Two symbols are spaced within 14 symbols from the X symbols.
实施例36、根据实施例29至实施例35中任一实施例所述的装置,其中,所述第二模块,还用于:所述终端设备在所述X个符号上不使能跳频。Embodiment 36. The apparatus according to any one of Embodiments 29 to 35, wherein the second module is further configured to: the terminal device does not enable frequency hopping on the X symbols .
实施例37、根据实施例29至实施例36中任一实施例所述的装置,其中,所述第二模块,还用于:所述终端设备将所述X个符号所在跳频部分的频域位置调整为与所述X个符号的前一跳频部分的频域位置相同,且将所述X个符号的下一跳频部分的频域位置调整为与所述X个符号的频域位置相同。Embodiment 37. The apparatus according to any one of Embodiment 29 to Embodiment 36, wherein the second module is further configured to: the terminal device converts the frequency of the frequency hopping part where the X symbols are located. The domain position is adjusted to be the same as the frequency domain position of the previous frequency hopping part of the X symbols, and the frequency domain position of the next frequency hopping part of the X symbols is adjusted to be the same as the frequency domain position of the X symbols Same location.
实施例38、根据实施例29至实施例37中任一实施例所述的装置,其中,当所述第二模块,用于所述终端设备在所述X个符号上传输第二PUCCH时,所述配置信息或指示信息还用于指示所述第二PUCCH的长度。Embodiment 38. The apparatus according to any one of Embodiment 29 to Embodiment 37, wherein, when the second module is used for the terminal device to transmit the second PUCCH on the X symbols, The configuration information or the indication information is also used to indicate the length of the second PUCCH.
实施例39、根据实施例29至实施例38中任一实施例所述的装置,其中,所述第二模块,还用于:Embodiment 39. The apparatus according to any one of Embodiments 29 to 38, wherein the second module is further configured to:
所述终端设备仅在X个符号上传输第二PUCCH,或者,所述终端设备在所述X个符号及第二时隙内的部分上行符号或空闲符号上传输所述第二PUCCH;The terminal device transmits the second PUCCH only on X symbols, or the terminal device transmits the second PUCCH on the X symbols and some uplink symbols or idle symbols in the second time slot;
其中,所述第一时隙与所述第二时隙相邻。Wherein, the first time slot is adjacent to the second time slot.
实施例40、根据实施例29至实施例39中任一实施例所述的装置,其中,所述第二模块,还用于:所述终端设备仅在X个符号上传输DMRS,或者,所述终端设备在所述X个符号及第二时隙内的部分上行符号或空闲符号上传输DMRS;Embodiment 40. The apparatus according to any one of Embodiments 29 to 39, wherein the second module is further configured to: the terminal device transmits the DMRS only on X symbols, or, The terminal device transmits the DMRS on the X symbols and part of the uplink symbols or idle symbols in the second time slot;
其中,所述第一时隙与所述第二时隙相邻。Wherein, the first time slot is adjacent to the second time slot.
实施例41、根据实施例29至实施例20中任一实施例所述的装置,其中,所述第二模块,还用于:所述终端设备在所述X个符号及第二时隙内的部分上行符号或空闲符号上传输所述第一PUCCH;Embodiment 41. The apparatus according to any one of Embodiments 29 to 20, wherein the second module is further configured to: the terminal equipment is in the X symbols and the second time slot The first PUCCH is transmitted on part of the uplink symbols or idle symbols;
其中,所述第一时隙与所述第二时隙相邻。Wherein, the first time slot is adjacent to the second time slot.
实施例42、根据实施例29至实施例41中任一实施例所述的装置,其中,所述第二模块,还用于:所述终端设备在所述X个符号上以跳频方式传输DMRS,其中,所述X个符号的第一跳频部分包括
Figure PCTCN2021115721-appb-000041
个符号,所述X个符号的第二跳频部分包括
Figure PCTCN2021115721-appb-000042
个符号。
Embodiment 42: The apparatus according to any one of Embodiment 29 to Embodiment 41, wherein the second module is further configured to: the terminal equipment transmits in a frequency hopping manner on the X symbols DMRS, wherein the first frequency hopping portion of the X symbols includes
Figure PCTCN2021115721-appb-000041
symbols, the second frequency hopping portion of the X symbols includes
Figure PCTCN2021115721-appb-000042
symbol.
实施例43.一种通信装置,其中,所述装置包括:Embodiment 43. A communication device, wherein the device comprises:
第三模块,用于网络设备向终端设备发送配置信息或指示信息,所述配置信息或指示信息用于配置或指示所述终端设备发送第一PUCCH,所述第一PUCCH的传输长度为L个符号,所述第一PUCCH的传输次数为N,N为大于或等于1的整数,L为大于或等于1的整数;X个符号位于第一时隙,且所述X个符号用于传输所述第一PUCCH;The third module is used for the network device to send configuration information or indication information to the terminal device, where the configuration information or indication information is used to configure or instruct the terminal device to send the first PUCCH, and the transmission length of the first PUCCH is L symbol, the number of times of transmission of the first PUCCH is N, N is an integer greater than or equal to 1, and L is an integer greater than or equal to 1; X symbols are located in the first time slot, and the X symbols are used for transmitting all the first PUCCH;
第四模块,用于当X小于L时,所述网络设备根据预设条件确定在所述X个符号上不接收所述第一PUCCH,或者所述网络设备在所述X个符号上接收所述第一PUCCH,或者所述网络设备在所述X个符号上接收第二PUCCH,或者所述网络设备在所述X个符号上接收DMRS。The fourth module is configured to, when X is less than L, determine, according to a preset condition, that the network device does not receive the first PUCCH on the X symbols, or the network device receives the first PUCCH on the X symbols. the first PUCCH, or the network device receives the second PUCCH on the X symbols, or the network device receives the DMRS on the X symbols.
实施例44、根据实施例43所述的装置,其中,所述X个符号不包括承载DMRS的符号。Embodiment 44. The apparatus of Embodiment 43, wherein the X symbols do not include symbols carrying DMRS.
实施例45、根据实施例43或实施例44所述的装置,其中,所述第四模块,还用于:Embodiment 45. The apparatus according to Embodiment 43 or Embodiment 44, wherein the fourth module is further configured to:
当所述X个符号所在的频域位置与所述第一时隙及第二时隙内的任一承载DMRS的符号所在的频域位置不同时,所述网络设备确定在所述X符号上不接收所述第一PUCCH;When the frequency domain position where the X symbols are located is different from the frequency domain position where any DMRS-bearing symbol in the first time slot and the second time slot is located, the network device determines that the X symbol is located on the X symbol not receiving the first PUCCH;
其中,所述第一时隙与所述第二时隙相邻。Wherein, the first time slot is adjacent to the second time slot.
实施例46、根据实施例43至实施例45中任一实施例所述的装置,其中,所述第四模块,还用于:Embodiment 46. The apparatus according to any one of Embodiment 43 to Embodiment 45, wherein the fourth module is further configured to:
当所述X个符号与第一符号之间间隔超过第一阈值时,所述网络设备确定在所述X个符号上不接收所述第一PUCCH;When the interval between the X symbols and the first symbol exceeds a first threshold, the network device determines that the first PUCCH is not received on the X symbols;
其中,所述第一符号为位于所述X个符号之后的第一个承载DMRS的符号。Wherein, the first symbol is the first symbol that bears DMRS after the X symbols.
实施例47、根据实施例43至实施例46中任一实施例所述的装置,其中,所述第四模块,还用于:当所述X小于或等于第二阈值时,所述网络设备确定在所述X个符号上不接收所述第一PUCCH;Embodiment 47. The apparatus according to any one of Embodiment 43 to Embodiment 46, wherein the fourth module is further configured to: when the X is less than or equal to a second threshold, the network device determining that the first PUCCH is not received on the X symbols;
其中,所述第二阈值根据所述长度L、DMRS配置方式、所述第一PUCCH的格式以及所述第一PUCCH的跳频方式中的至少其中之一确定。The second threshold is determined according to at least one of the length L, a DMRS configuration mode, a format of the first PUCCH, and a frequency hopping mode of the first PUCCH.
实施例48、根据实施例43至实施例47中任一实施例所述的装置,其中,所述第四模块,还用于:当第三时隙中包括下行符号时,所述网络设备确定在所述X个符号上不接收所述第一PUCCH;Embodiment 48. The apparatus according to any one of Embodiment 43 to Embodiment 47, wherein the fourth module is further configured to: when the third time slot includes downlink symbols, the network device determines not receiving the first PUCCH on the X symbols;
其中,所述第三时隙与所述第一时隙相邻,且位于所述第一时隙之后。Wherein, the third time slot is adjacent to the first time slot and is located after the first time slot.
实施例49、根据根据实施例43至实施例48中任一实施例所述的装置,其中,所述第四模块,还用于:所述网络设备根据所述X个符号的前一跳频部分所在的频域位置,在所述X个符号上接收所述第一PUCCH;Embodiment 49: The apparatus according to any one of Embodiment 43 to Embodiment 48, wherein the fourth module is further configured to: the network device hops according to the previous frequency of the X symbols The frequency domain position where the part is located, and the first PUCCH is received on the X symbols;
或者,所述网络设备根据第二符号所在的频域位置,在所述X个符号上接收所述第一PUCCH;其中,所述第二符号与所述X个符号相邻,或者所述第二符号与所述X个符号间隔在14个符号内。Or, the network device receives the first PUCCH on the X symbols according to the frequency domain position where the second symbol is located; wherein the second symbol is adjacent to the X symbols, or the first PUCCH is Two symbols are spaced within 14 symbols from the X symbols.
实施例50、根据实施例43至实施例49中任一实施例所述的装置,其中,所述配置信息或指示信息还用于指示所述终端设备在所述X个符号上不使能跳频。Embodiment 50. The apparatus according to any one of Embodiment 43 to Embodiment 49, wherein the configuration information or the indication information is further used to instruct the terminal device not to enable hopping on the X symbols frequency.
实施例51、根据实施例43至实施例50中任一实施例所述的装置,其中,所述配置信息或指示信息还用于指示所述终端设备将所述X个符号所在跳频部分的频域位置调整为与所述X个符号的前一跳频部分的频域位置相同,且将所述X个符号的下一跳频部分的频域位置调整为与所述X个符号的频域位置相同。Embodiment 51. The apparatus according to any one of Embodiments 43 to 50, wherein the configuration information or the indication information is further used to instruct the terminal device to use the frequency hopping part where the X symbols are located. The frequency domain position is adjusted to be the same as the frequency domain position of the previous frequency hopping part of the X symbols, and the frequency domain position of the next frequency hopping part of the X symbols is adjusted to be the same as the frequency domain position of the X symbols. The domain location is the same.
实施例52、根据实施例43至实施例51中任一实施例所述的装置,其中,当所述第四模块,用于所述网络设备在所述X个符号上接收第二PUCCH时,所述配置信息或指示信息还用于指示所述第二PUCCH的长度。Embodiment 52. The apparatus according to any one of Embodiment 43 to Embodiment 51, wherein, when the fourth module is used for the network device to receive the second PUCCH on the X symbols, The configuration information or the indication information is also used to indicate the length of the second PUCCH.
实施例53、根据实施例43至实施例52中任一实施例所述的装置,其中,所述网络设备在所述X个符号上接收第二PUCCH,包括:Embodiment 53. The apparatus according to any one of Embodiment 43 to Embodiment 52, wherein the network device receives the second PUCCH on the X symbols, comprising:
在所述X个符号及第二时隙内的部分上行符号或空闲符号上接收所述第二PUCCH;receiving the second PUCCH on the X symbols and a portion of uplink symbols or idle symbols in the second slot;
其中,所述第一时隙与所述第二时隙相邻。Wherein, the first time slot is adjacent to the second time slot.
实施例54、根据实施例43至实施例53中任一实施例所述的装置,其中,所述网络设备在所述X个符号上接收DMRS,包括:Embodiment 54. The apparatus according to any one of Embodiments 43 to 53, wherein the network device receives the DMRS on the X symbols, comprising:
在所述X个符号及第二时隙内的部分上行符号或空闲符号上接收DMRS;receiving DMRS on the X symbols and a portion of uplink symbols or idle symbols in the second time slot;
其中,所述第一时隙与所述第二时隙相邻。Wherein, the first time slot is adjacent to the second time slot.
实施例55、根据实施例43至实施例54中任一实施例所述的装置,其中,所述网络设备在所述X个符号上接收所述第一PUCCH,包括:Embodiment 55. The apparatus according to any one of Embodiments 43 to 54, wherein the network device receives the first PUCCH on the X symbols, comprising:
所述网络设备在所述X个符号及第二时隙内的部分上行符号或空闲符号上接收所述第一PUCCH;receiving, by the network device, the first PUCCH on the X symbols and part of uplink symbols or idle symbols in the second time slot;
其中,所述第一时隙与所述第二时隙相邻。Wherein, the first time slot is adjacent to the second time slot.
实施例56、根据实施例43至实施例55中任一实施例所述的装置,其中,所述网络设备在所述X个符号上接收DMRS,包括:Embodiment 56. The apparatus according to any one of Embodiments 43 to 55, wherein the network device receives the DMRS on the X symbols, comprising:
所述网络设备在所述X个符号上接收以跳频方式传输的DMRS,其中,所述X个符号的第一跳频部分包括
Figure PCTCN2021115721-appb-000043
个符号,所述X个符号的第二跳频部分包括
Figure PCTCN2021115721-appb-000044
个符号。
The network device receives the DMRS transmitted in a frequency hopping manner on the X symbols, wherein the first frequency hopping part of the X symbols includes
Figure PCTCN2021115721-appb-000043
symbols, the second frequency hopping portion of the X symbols includes
Figure PCTCN2021115721-appb-000044
symbol.
实施例57.一种通信装置,其中,包括:Embodiment 57. A communication device, comprising:
处理器;processor;
用于存储处理器可执行指令的存储器;memory for storing processor-executable instructions;
其中,所述处理器被配置为执行所述指令时实现实施例1至实施例14中任一实施例所述所述的方法。Wherein, the processor is configured to implement the method described in any one of Embodiments 1 to 14 when executing the instructions.
实施例58、一种非易失性计算机可读存储介质,其中,所述计算机可读存储介质包括计算机指令,当所述计算机指令在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行如实施例1至实施例14中任一实施例所述的方法。Embodiment 58. A non-volatile computer-readable storage medium, wherein the computer-readable storage medium includes computer instructions that, when executed on a computer, cause the computer to perform the steps of Embodiments 1 to 1. The method of any one of Embodiments 14.
实施例59、一种芯片,其中,包括处理器,当所述处理器执行指令时,所述处理器执行如实施例1至实施例14中任一实施例所述的方法。Embodiment 59. A chip, comprising a processor, when the processor executes an instruction, the processor executes the method described in any one of Embodiments 1 to 14.
实施例60、一种包含指令的计算机程序产品,其中,当其在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行如实施例1至实施例14中任一实施例所述的方法。Embodiment 60. A computer program product comprising instructions, which, when run on a computer, cause the computer to perform the method of any one of embodiments 1 to 14.
实施例61.一种通信装置,其中,包括:Embodiment 61. A communication device, comprising:
处理器;processor;
用于存储处理器可执行指令的存储器;memory for storing processor-executable instructions;
其中,所述处理器被配置为执行所述指令时实现实施例15至实施例28中任一实施例所述所述的方法。Wherein, the processor is configured to implement the method described in any one of Embodiments 15 to 28 when executing the instructions.
实施例62、一种非易失性计算机可读存储介质,其中,所述计算机可读存储介质包括计算机指令,当所述计算机指令在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行如实施例15至实施例28中任一实施例所述的方法。Embodiment 62. A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium, wherein the computer-readable storage medium includes computer instructions that, when executed on a computer, cause the computer to perform as in Embodiments 15 to 15 The method of any one of Embodiments 28.
实施例63、一种芯片,其中,包括处理器,当所述处理器执行指令时,所述处理器执行如实施例15至实施例28中任一实施例所述的方法。Embodiment 63. A chip, comprising a processor, when the processor executes an instruction, the processor executes the method according to any one of Embodiments 15 to 28.
实施例64、一种包含指令的计算机程序产品,其中,当其在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行如实施例15至实施例28中任一实施例所述的方法。Embodiment 64. A computer program product comprising instructions, which, when executed on a computer, cause the computer to perform the method of any one of embodiments 15 to 28.
附图中的流程图和框图显示了根据本申请的多个实施例的装置、系统、方法和计算机程序产品的可能实现的体系架构、功能和操作。在这点上,流程图或框图中的每个方框可以代表一个模块、程序段或指令的一部分,所述模块、程序段或指令的一部分包含一个或多个用于实现规定的逻辑功能的可执行指令。在有些作为替换的实现中,方框中所标注的功能也可 以以不同于附图中所标注的顺序发生。例如,两个连续的方框实际上可以基本并行地执行,它们有时也可以按相反的顺序执行,这依所涉及的功能而定。The flowchart and block diagrams in the Figures illustrate the architecture, functionality, and operation of possible implementations of apparatuses, systems, methods and computer program products according to various embodiments of the present application. In this regard, each block in the flowchart or block diagrams may represent a module, segment, or portion of instructions, which comprises one or more functions for implementing the specified logical function(s) executable instructions. In some alternative implementations, the functions noted in the blocks may occur out of the order noted in the figures. For example, two blocks in succession may, in fact, be executed substantially concurrently, or the blocks may sometimes be executed in the reverse order, depending upon the functionality involved.
也要注意的是,框图和/或流程图中的每个方框、以及框图和/或流程图中的方框的组合,可以用执行相应的功能或动作的硬件(例如电路或ASIC(Application Specific Integrated Circuit,专用集成电路))来实现,或者可以用硬件和软件的组合,如固件等来实现。It is also noted that each block of the block diagrams and/or flowchart illustrations, and combinations of blocks in the block diagrams and/or flowchart illustrations, can be implemented in hardware (eg, circuits or ASICs (Application) that perform the corresponding functions or actions. Specific Integrated Circuit, application-specific integrated circuit)), or can be implemented by a combination of hardware and software, such as firmware.
尽管在此结合各实施例对本发明进行了描述,然而,在实施所要求保护的本发明过程中,本领域技术人员通过查看所述附图、公开内容、以及所附权利要求书,可理解并实现所述公开实施例的其它变化。在权利要求中,“包括”(comprising)一词不排除其他组成部分或步骤,“一”或“一个”不排除多个的情况。单个处理器或其它单元可以实现权利要求中列举的若干项功能。相互不同的从属权利要求中记载了某些措施,但这并不表示这些措施不能组合起来产生良好的效果。While the invention has been described herein in connection with various embodiments, those skilled in the art will understand and understand from a review of the drawings, the disclosure, and the appended claims in practicing the claimed invention. Other variations of the disclosed embodiments are implemented. In the claims, the word "comprising" does not exclude other components or steps, and "a" or "an" does not exclude a plurality. A single processor or other unit may fulfill the functions of several items recited in the claims. The mere fact that certain measures are recited in mutually different dependent claims does not indicate that these measures cannot be combined to advantage.
以上已经描述了本申请的各实施例,上述说明是示例性的,并非穷尽性的,并且也不限于所披露的各实施例。在不偏离所说明的各实施例的范围和精神的情况下,对于本技术领域的普通技术人员来说许多修改和变更都是显而易见的。本文中所用术语的选择,旨在最好地解释各实施例的原理、实际应用或对市场中的技术的改进,或者使本技术领域的其它普通技术人员能理解本文披露的各实施例。Various embodiments of the present application have been described above, and the foregoing descriptions are exemplary, not exhaustive, and not limiting of the disclosed embodiments. Numerous modifications and variations will be apparent to those of ordinary skill in the art without departing from the scope and spirit of the described embodiments. The terminology used herein was chosen to best explain the principles of the various embodiments, the practical application or improvement over the technology in the marketplace, or to enable others of ordinary skill in the art to understand the various embodiments disclosed herein.

Claims (18)

  1. 一种上行控制信道PUCCH传输方法,其特征在于,所述方法包括:A method for transmitting an uplink control channel PUCCH, wherein the method comprises:
    终端设备接收来自网络设备的配置信息或指示信息,所述配置信息或指示信息用于配置或指示所述终端设备发送第一PUCCH,所述第一PUCCH的传输长度为L个符号,所述第一PUCCH的传输次数为N,N为大于或等于1的整数,L为大于或等于1的整数;The terminal device receives configuration information or indication information from the network device, the configuration information or indication information is used to configure or instruct the terminal device to send the first PUCCH, the transmission length of the first PUCCH is L symbols, and the first PUCCH is L symbols. The number of times of transmission of a PUCCH is N, where N is an integer greater than or equal to 1, and L is an integer greater than or equal to 1;
    所述终端设备根据所述配置信息或指示信息确定X个符号,所述X个符号位于第一时隙,且所述X个符号用于传输所述第一PUCCH;The terminal device determines X symbols according to the configuration information or the indication information, the X symbols are located in the first time slot, and the X symbols are used to transmit the first PUCCH;
    当X小于L时,所述终端设备根据预设条件确定在所述X个符号上不传输所述第一PUCCH,或者所述终端设备在所述X个符号上传输所述第一PUCCH,或者所述终端设备在所述X个符号上传输第二PUCCH,或者所述终端设备在所述X个符号上传输解调参考信号DMRS。When X is less than L, the terminal device determines not to transmit the first PUCCH on the X symbols according to a preset condition, or the terminal device transmits the first PUCCH on the X symbols, or The terminal device transmits the second PUCCH on the X symbols, or the terminal device transmits a demodulation reference signal DMRS on the X symbols.
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述X个符号不包括承载DMRS的符号。The method according to claim 1, wherein the X symbols do not include symbols carrying DMRS.
  3. 根据权利要求1或2所述的方法,其特征在于,所述终端设备根据预设条件确定在所述X个符号上不传输所述第一PUCCH,包括:The method according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the terminal device determines not to transmit the first PUCCH on the X symbols according to a preset condition, comprising:
    当所述X个符号所在的频域位置与所述第一时隙及第二时隙内的任一承载DMRS的符号所在的频域位置不同时,所述终端设备确定在所述X符号上不传输所述第一PUCCH;When the frequency domain position where the X symbols are located is different from the frequency domain position where any DMRS-carrying symbol in the first time slot and the second time slot is located, the terminal device determines that the X symbol is located on the X symbol not transmitting the first PUCCH;
    其中,所述第一时隙与所述第二时隙相邻。Wherein, the first time slot is adjacent to the second time slot.
  4. 根据权利要求1或2所述的方法,其特征在于,所述终端设备根据预设条件确定在所述X个符号上不传输所述第一PUCCH,包括:The method according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the terminal device determines not to transmit the first PUCCH on the X symbols according to a preset condition, comprising:
    当所述X个符号与第一符号之间间隔超过第一阈值时,所述终端设备确定在所述X个符号上不传输所述第一PUCCH;When the interval between the X symbols and the first symbol exceeds a first threshold, the terminal device determines not to transmit the first PUCCH on the X symbols;
    其中,所述第一符号为位于所述X个符号之后的第一个承载DMRS的符号。Wherein, the first symbol is the first symbol that bears DMRS after the X symbols.
  5. 根据权利要求1或2所述的方法,其特征在于,所述终端设备根据预设条件确定在所述X个符号上不传输所述第一PUCCH,包括:The method according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the terminal device determines not to transmit the first PUCCH on the X symbols according to a preset condition, comprising:
    当所述X小于或等于第二阈值时,所述终端设备确定在所述X个符号上不传输所述第一PUCCH;When the X is less than or equal to a second threshold, the terminal device determines not to transmit the first PUCCH on the X symbols;
    其中,所述第二阈值根据所述长度L、DMRS配置方式、所述第一PUCCH的格式以及所述第一PUCCH的跳频方式中的至少其中之一确定。The second threshold is determined according to at least one of the length L, a DMRS configuration mode, a format of the first PUCCH, and a frequency hopping mode of the first PUCCH.
  6. 根据权利要求1或2所述的方法,其特征在于,所述终端设备根据预设条件确定在所述X个符号上不传输所述第一PUCCH,包括:The method according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the terminal device determines not to transmit the first PUCCH on the X symbols according to a preset condition, comprising:
    当第三时隙中包括下行符号时,所述终端设备确定在所述X个符号上不传输所述第一PUCCH;When the third time slot includes downlink symbols, the terminal device determines not to transmit the first PUCCH on the X symbols;
    其中,所述第三时隙与所述第一时隙相邻,且位于所述第一时隙之后。Wherein, the third time slot is adjacent to the first time slot and is located after the first time slot.
  7. 根据权利要求1或2所述的方法,其特征在于,所述终端设备在所述X个符号上传输所述第一PUCCH,包括:The method according to claim 1 or 2, wherein, the terminal device transmitting the first PUCCH on the X symbols, comprising:
    所述终端设备根据所述X个符号的前一跳频部分所在的频域位置,在所述X个符号上传输所述第一PUCCH;The terminal device transmits the first PUCCH on the X symbols according to the frequency domain position where the previous frequency hopping part of the X symbols is located;
    或者,所述终端设备根据第二符号所在的频域位置,在所述X个符号上传输所述第一PUCCH;其中,所述第二符号与所述X个符号相邻,或者所述第二符号与所述X个符号间 隔在14个符号内。Or, the terminal device transmits the first PUCCH on the X symbols according to the frequency domain position where the second symbol is located; wherein the second symbol is adjacent to the X symbols, or the first PUCCH Two symbols are spaced within 14 symbols from the X symbols.
  8. 根据权利要求7所述的方法,其特征在于,所述终端设备根据所述X个符号的前一跳频部分所在的频域位置,在所述X个符号上传输所述第一PUCCH,包括:The method according to claim 7, wherein the terminal device transmits the first PUCCH on the X symbols according to the frequency domain position where the previous frequency hopping part of the X symbols is located, comprising: :
    所述终端设备在所述X个符号上不使能跳频。The terminal device does not enable frequency hopping on the X symbols.
  9. 根据权利要求7所述的方法,其特征在于,所述终端设备根据所述X个符号的前一跳频部分所在的频域位置,在所述X个符号上传输所述第一PUCCH,包括:The method according to claim 7, wherein the terminal device transmits the first PUCCH on the X symbols according to the frequency domain position where the previous frequency hopping part of the X symbols is located, comprising: :
    所述终端设备将所述X个符号所在跳频部分的频域位置调整为与所述X个符号的前一跳频部分的频域位置相同,且将所述X个符号的下一跳频部分的频域位置调整为与所述X个符号的频域位置相同。The terminal device adjusts the frequency domain position of the frequency hopping part where the X symbols are located to be the same as the frequency domain position of the previous frequency hopping part of the X symbols, and adjusts the frequency hopping part of the X symbols to the next frequency hopping part. The frequency domain positions of the parts are adjusted to be the same as the frequency domain positions of the X symbols.
  10. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,当所述终端设备在所述X个符号上传输所述第二PUCCH时,所述配置信息或指示信息还用于指示所述第二PUCCH的长度。The method according to claim 1, wherein when the terminal device transmits the second PUCCH on the X symbols, the configuration information or the indication information is further used to indicate the length.
  11. 根据权利要求1或10所述方法,其特征在于,所述终端设备在所述X个符号上传输第二PUCCH,包括:The method according to claim 1 or 10, wherein, the terminal device transmitting the second PUCCH on the X symbols, comprising:
    所述终端设备仅在所述X个符号上传输所述第二PUCCH;the terminal device transmits the second PUCCH only on the X symbols;
    或者,所述终端设备在所述X个符号及第二时隙内的部分上行符号或空闲符号上传输所述第二PUCCH;Alternatively, the terminal device transmits the second PUCCH on the X symbols and some uplink symbols or idle symbols in the second time slot;
    其中,所述第一时隙与所述第二时隙相邻。Wherein, the first time slot is adjacent to the second time slot.
  12. 根据权利要求1所述方法,其特征在于,所述终端设备在所述X个符号上传输DMRS,包括:The method according to claim 1, wherein the terminal equipment transmits DMRS on the X symbols, comprising:
    所述终端设备仅在X个符号上传输DMRS;The terminal equipment transmits DMRS only on X symbols;
    或者,所述终端设备在所述X个符号及第二时隙内的部分上行符号或空闲符号上传输DMRS;Alternatively, the terminal device transmits the DMRS on the X symbols and some uplink symbols or idle symbols in the second time slot;
    其中,所述第一时隙与所述第二时隙相邻。Wherein, the first time slot is adjacent to the second time slot.
  13. 根据权利要求1所述方法,其特征在于,所述终端设备在所述X个符号上传输所述第一PUCCH,包括:The method according to claim 1, wherein, the terminal device transmitting the first PUCCH on the X symbols, comprising:
    所述终端设备在所述X个符号及第二时隙内的部分上行符号或空闲符号上传输所述第一PUCCH;transmitting, by the terminal device, the first PUCCH on the X symbols and part of uplink symbols or idle symbols in the second time slot;
    其中,所述第一时隙与所述第二时隙相邻。Wherein, the first time slot is adjacent to the second time slot.
  14. 根据权利要求1或12所述的方法,其特征在于,所述终端设备在所述X个符号上传输DMRS,包括:The method according to claim 1 or 12, wherein the terminal device transmits the DMRS on the X symbols, comprising:
    所述终端设备在所述X个符号上以跳频方式传输DMRS,其中,所述X个符号的第一跳频部分包括
    Figure PCTCN2021115721-appb-100001
    个符号,所述X个符号的第二跳频部分包括
    Figure PCTCN2021115721-appb-100002
    个符号。
    The terminal device transmits the DMRS in a frequency hopping manner over the X symbols, wherein the first frequency hopping part of the X symbols includes
    Figure PCTCN2021115721-appb-100001
    symbols, the second frequency hopping portion of the X symbols includes
    Figure PCTCN2021115721-appb-100002
    symbol.
  15. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括:A communication device, comprising:
    处理器;processor;
    用于存储处理器可执行指令的存储器;memory for storing processor-executable instructions;
    其中,所述处理器被配置为执行所述指令时实现权利要求1-14任一项所述的方法。wherein the processor is configured to implement the method of any of claims 1-14 when executing the instructions.
  16. 一种非易失性计算机可读存储介质,其特征在于,所述计算机可读存储介质包括计算机指令,当所述计算机指令在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行如权利要求1至14任一项所述的方法。A non-volatile computer-readable storage medium, characterized in that the computer-readable storage medium comprises computer instructions that, when the computer instructions are executed on a computer, cause the computer to execute any one of claims 1 to 14 the method described.
  17. 一种芯片,其特征在于,包括处理器,当所述处理器执行指令时,所述处理器执行如权利要求1至14任一项所述的方法。A chip, characterized by comprising a processor, when the processor executes an instruction, the processor executes the method according to any one of claims 1 to 14.
  18. 一种包含指令的计算机程序产品,其特征在于,当其在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行如权利要求1至14任一项所述的方法。A computer program product comprising instructions which, when run on a computer, cause the computer to perform a method as claimed in any one of claims 1 to 14.
PCT/CN2021/115721 2020-09-28 2021-08-31 Uplink control channel transmission method and apparatus, storage medium, and chip WO2022062861A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202011054926.0 2020-09-28
CN202011054926 2020-09-28
CN202011111902.4A CN114340001A (en) 2020-09-28 2020-10-16 Transmission method, device, storage medium and chip of uplink control channel
CN202011111902.4 2020-10-16

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2022062861A1 true WO2022062861A1 (en) 2022-03-31

Family

ID=80844908

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2021/115721 WO2022062861A1 (en) 2020-09-28 2021-08-31 Uplink control channel transmission method and apparatus, storage medium, and chip

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2022062861A1 (en)

Citations (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2019028797A1 (en) * 2017-08-10 2019-02-14 华为技术有限公司 Uplink control signaling transmission method, terminal device and base station
CN109525999A (en) * 2017-09-18 2019-03-26 维沃移动通信有限公司 DMRS determines method, configuration method, terminal and base station
WO2019099565A1 (en) * 2017-11-16 2019-05-23 Sharp Laboratories Of America, Inc. MULTIPLE SLOT LONG PHYSICAL UPLINK CONTROL CHANNEL (PUCCH) DESIGN FOR 5th GENERATION (5G) NEW RADIO (NR)
WO2019160359A1 (en) * 2018-02-14 2019-08-22 엘지전자 주식회사 Method for performing uplink transmission through frequency hopping in wireless communication system, and device therefor
CN110611958A (en) * 2019-08-16 2019-12-24 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Transmission resource allocation method, device and computer storage medium
CN110972277A (en) * 2018-09-28 2020-04-07 华为技术有限公司 Data transmission method, device and storage medium
CN110999186A (en) * 2017-08-10 2020-04-10 夏普株式会社 Multi-slot long Physical Uplink Control Channel (PUCCH) design for fifth generation (5G) New Radio (NR)

Patent Citations (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2019028797A1 (en) * 2017-08-10 2019-02-14 华为技术有限公司 Uplink control signaling transmission method, terminal device and base station
CN110999186A (en) * 2017-08-10 2020-04-10 夏普株式会社 Multi-slot long Physical Uplink Control Channel (PUCCH) design for fifth generation (5G) New Radio (NR)
CN109525999A (en) * 2017-09-18 2019-03-26 维沃移动通信有限公司 DMRS determines method, configuration method, terminal and base station
WO2019099565A1 (en) * 2017-11-16 2019-05-23 Sharp Laboratories Of America, Inc. MULTIPLE SLOT LONG PHYSICAL UPLINK CONTROL CHANNEL (PUCCH) DESIGN FOR 5th GENERATION (5G) NEW RADIO (NR)
WO2019160359A1 (en) * 2018-02-14 2019-08-22 엘지전자 주식회사 Method for performing uplink transmission through frequency hopping in wireless communication system, and device therefor
CN110972277A (en) * 2018-09-28 2020-04-07 华为技术有限公司 Data transmission method, device and storage medium
CN110611958A (en) * 2019-08-16 2019-12-24 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Transmission resource allocation method, device and computer storage medium

Non-Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
INTEL CORPORATION: "Long PUCCH over multiple slots", 3GPP DRAFT; R1-1716315 INTEL LONG PUCCH MULTIPLE SLOTS, 3RD GENERATION PARTNERSHIP PROJECT (3GPP), MOBILE COMPETENCE CENTRE ; 650, ROUTE DES LUCIOLES ; F-06921 SOPHIA-ANTIPOLIS CEDEX ; FRANCE, vol. RAN WG1, no. Nagoya, Japan; 20170918 - 20170921, 17 September 2017 (2017-09-17), Mobile Competence Centre ; 650, route des Lucioles ; F-06921 Sophia-Antipolis Cedex ; France , XP051339771 *

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US20210250159A1 (en) Resource configuration method and apparatus
WO2019214657A1 (en) Time-domain resource allocation and determination method and apparatus, base station, terminal, and storage medium
EP4277428A2 (en) Method for transmitting configuration information and terminal device
US11523395B2 (en) Transmission direction configuration method, device, and system
RU2768891C1 (en) Configuration of control channel structure to support v2x traffic
CN111865536B (en) Search space monitoring and configuration method and device
JP6833868B2 (en) Communication method, network equipment and terminal equipment
JP7055888B2 (en) Methods and Devices for Signaling Frequency Offsets in NB-IOT TDD Networks
JP7027440B2 (en) Uplink transmission method, device, terminal device, access network device and system
WO2018228579A1 (en) Method and apparatus for determining transport block size
WO2019242776A1 (en) Wireless communication method and apparatus
JP2024026381A (en) Search space monitoring method and device
JP2022521689A (en) Downlink control information (DCI) size handling
JP2020513174A5 (en)
WO2021030991A1 (en) Method and apparatus for determining uplink transmission resource
US11889474B2 (en) Method for carrier selection in vehicle to everything system and terminal device
CN114340001A (en) Transmission method, device, storage medium and chip of uplink control channel
CN111436108B (en) Power control method and power control device
WO2022062861A1 (en) Uplink control channel transmission method and apparatus, storage medium, and chip
WO2021228163A1 (en) Method, apparatus and system for determining resource
WO2021031948A1 (en) Data processing method and communication apparatus
WO2024031463A1 (en) Sl communication method and apparatus, device, storage medium and program product
WO2022151407A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
WO2021032167A1 (en) Method and device for determining transport block size
KR20230011893A (en) Method and apparatus for allocating sidelink resource in wireless communication system

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 21871233

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 21871233

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1